JP6299695B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, and the like are known. As these gaming machines, those equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. The gaming machine is equipped with a memory in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the display device using the image data read from the memory. (For example, refer to Patent Document 1).

JP 2009-261415 A

  Here, in the gaming machines such as the above-described examples, a configuration capable of suitably performing display control is required, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The present invention has been made in view of the circumstances exemplified above, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably performing display control.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problem, the invention according to claim 1 includes display means for displaying an image,
Image information storage means for storing image data in advance;
Display control means for creating drawing data based on setting the image data in the setting storage means, and displaying an image on the display means based on outputting an image signal corresponding to the drawing data to the display means; ,
In a gaming machine equipped with
The display means includes a first display means and a second display means,
The display control unit creates first drawing data for displaying an image on the first display unit in a partial area of the setting storage unit, and displays the image on the second display unit. 2 comprising aggregation setting means for setting drawing data in another area of the setting storage means ,
The aggregation setting unit displays the first drawing data and the second data in the setting storage unit even when the image is displayed on the first display unit and the image is not displayed on the second display unit. It is characterized by setting drawing data .

  According to the present invention, it is possible to suitably perform display control.

It is a perspective view which shows the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view which shows the structure of a game board. (A)-(j) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content on the display surface of a main display apparatus. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content on the display surface of a main display apparatus. It is a schematic diagram of the variable display unit for demonstrating a 1st sub display apparatus and a 2nd sub display apparatus. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating an example of the movement aspect of each sub-display apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the various counters used for big hit generation | occurrence | production lottery etc. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed in the distribution side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the table setting process performed in distribution side MPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the electrical structure of an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the V interruption process performed with CPU for production. It is a flowchart which shows the task process for display control performed with CPU for production. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the various area | regions of the register | resistor used when drawing processing is performed in 2D control part and 3D control part. (A)-(c) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the drawing list for 2D. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the drawing list for 3D. It is a flowchart which shows the 2D drawing process performed in a 2D control part. It is a flowchart which shows the 3D drawing process performed in a 3D control part. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a mode that drawing data are produced in connection with execution of 3D drawing processing. (A)-(c) It is a time chart for demonstrating the timing at which drawing data is created, and the timing at which image data is transferred in advance. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the storage area for before transfer, and the storage area for after transfer. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a pre-transfer area | region, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating an identification information counter. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the table for search. (A)-(d) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a mode that rewriting of the address information of a drawing list, and rewriting of address ID of the table for a search are performed. It is a flowchart which shows the drawing list output process performed with CPU for production. (A) to (e) Image data necessary for starting a game-playing effect is read into the pre-transfer area at a timing at which at least the next game-playing effect can be started. It is a time chart which shows a mode. It is a flowchart which shows the pre-transfer process performed in a pre-transfer control part. It is a flowchart which shows the rewriting process of the address information performed in a prior transfer control part. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of a file table. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between VRAM and an index area | region. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of an index table. It is a flowchart which shows the transfer execution process performed with the transfer controller. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of one drawing list in which the image data corresponding to each display apparatus were collected and set. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the execution object table for display control. It is a flowchart which shows the creation process of the drawing list performed with CPU for production. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure for outputting an image signal to each sub display apparatus. (A) to (e) A state in which one drawing data is created in order to display an image for one frame on each of the sub-display devices, and each sub-display device using the one drawing data It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a mode that the image for 1 frame is displayed on each. (A)-(d) It is a time chart which shows a mode that an image signal is output to each display apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the write-in process performed in 2D control part. It is a flowchart which shows the drawing process to the drawing area for a sub display performed in 2D control part. It is a flowchart which shows the signal output process performed in a 2nd display circuit. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating an example of the execution object table for display control in a displacement production period. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the right-handed alerting | reporting image displayed on each display apparatus. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the data memorize | stored in the memory module, (b), (c) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content displayed as a right-handed alerting | reporting image on the sub side. . (A)-(d) It is a time chart which shows a mode that the rotational speed of the right side alerting | reporting image of a sub side is changed according to the displacement state of a sub display apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for the right-handed alerting | reporting performed with CPU for production. (A)-(e) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the effect using the image for rotation periods. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the rotational movement display performed with CPU for production. (A)-(d) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production method in the pachinko machine design stage of the image data for displaying the image for rotation periods, (e) Explanation of the content of the data memorize | stored in the memory module It is explanatory drawing for doing. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the event used as the execution target of abnormality alert | report. (A)-(e) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display mode of an abnormality alerting | reporting image. (A)-(d) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display aspect of the abnormality alerting image in the period when the effect which displaces a sub display apparatus is performed. It is a flowchart which shows the response | compatibility process of the notification command performed with CPU for production. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for alerting | reporting performed with CPU for production. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the data memorize | stored in the memory module. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of normal moving image data, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of special moving image data. (A)-(c) It is a time chart which shows a mode that the decoding process of moving image data is performed using the period which is displaying the image using attached image data. It is a flowchart which shows the use setting process of the moving image data performed with CPU for production. It is a flowchart which shows the decoding process performed in a moving image decoder. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the drawing area for sub displays in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the drawing data synthetic | combination process for the sub display performed in 3D control part. It is a flowchart which shows the rewriting process of the address information performed in the prior transfer control part in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the drawing list output process performed in CPU for production in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the pre-transfer process performed in a pre-transfer control part.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as “pachinko machine”), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 that forms an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine body 12 that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 11. . The gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 disposed in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 disposed behind the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is supported so as to be rotatable with respect to the outer frame 11. Specifically, the inner frame 13 can be rotated forward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in front view. A front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13 and can be rotated forward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in a front view. Further, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and can be rotated rearward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in a front view.

  The gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device at the rotating tip, and has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened. The door frame 14 has a function of locking the door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so as not to be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation using the unlocking key on the cylinder lock 17 that is exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.

  A game board 21 is mounted on the inner frame 13. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 21.

  An inner rail portion 22 and an outer rail portion 23 are attached to the game board 21 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA, and the inner rail portion 22 and the outer rail portion 23 provide guidance means. As a guide rail, it is configured. A game ball launched from a game ball launching mechanism (not shown) attached below the game board 21 in the inner frame 13 is guided to the upper part of the game area PA by a guide rail. The game ball launch mechanism performs a game ball launch operation by manually operating the launch operation device 24 provided on the front door frame 14.

  The game board 21 has a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. Each opening is provided with a general winning port 31, a special electricity winning device 32, a first operating port 33, a second operating port 34, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, a special drawing unit 37, a universal drawing unit 38, and the like. ing.

  Even if a ball enters the through gate 35, the game ball is not paid out. On the other hand, when a ball enters the general winning port 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Specifically, with respect to the number of prize balls, when a ball enters the first working port 33 or a ball enters the second working port 34, three prize balls are paid out. When a ball is entered into the general prize opening 31, 10 prize balls are paid out. When a ball enters the special electricity prize winning device 32, 15 prize balls are paid out. Executed.

  The number of prize balls may be arbitrary. For example, the second actuation port 34 may have a smaller number of prize balls than the first actuation port 33, and the second actuation port 34 may be configured as the first actuation port. The number of prize balls may be larger than 33.

  In addition, an out port 21a is provided at the lowermost part of the game board 21, and game balls that have not entered various winning ports etc. are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 21a. The game board 21 is provided with a large number of nails 21b in order to disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball as appropriate, and various members such as a windmill.

  Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and not only the mode of discharging from the game area PA after passing through the opening, but also from the game area PA after passing through the opening. A mode in which the game area PA continues to flow down without being discharged is also included. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the game ball from entering the out port 21a, the general winning port 31, the special winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the through gate 35 are provided. Entering a game ball into is also expressed as a prize.

  The first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are unitized as operating port devices and are installed in the game board 21. Both the first working port 33 and the second working port 34 are opened upward. Further, both the operation ports 33 and 34 are arranged in the vertical direction so that the first operation port 33 is located on the upper side. The second operating port 34 is provided with a general electric utility 34a as a guide piece composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces. In the closed state of the utility wire 34a, the game ball cannot win the second operating port 34, and the winning of the second operating port 34 becomes possible when the universal power 34a is opened.

  A through gate 35 is provided on the upstream side in the flow-down direction of the game ball from the second working port 34. The through gate 35 has a through hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction, and the game ball that has won the through gate 35 flows down the game area PA after winning. As a result, the game ball that has won the through gate 35 can win the second working port 34.

  Based on the winning of the through gate 35, the common utility 34 a of the second operating port 34 is switched from the closed state to the open state. Specifically, an internal lottery is performed with a winning at the through gate 35 as a trigger, and a normal display of a general-purpose unit 38 provided at the lower right corner, which is a region where game balls do not pass in the game region PA, is displayed. In the part 38a, the change display of the pattern is performed. Then, when the result of the internal lottery is the electrification opening winning, the stop result corresponding to the result is displayed, and the fluctuation display of the general map display unit 38a is finished, the state shifts to the public power open state. In the public power open state, the general electric utility 34a is opened in a predetermined manner.

  The general map display unit 38a is constituted by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but is not limited to this, and is not limited to this. A liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device , Or other types of display devices such as CRT or dot matrix display. In addition, as a pattern variably displayed on the general map display unit 38a, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, or A configuration in which a plurality of colors are switched and displayed is conceivable.

  In the universal map unit 38, a universal map hold display section 38b is provided at a position adjacent to the universal map display section 38a. A maximum of four game balls won in the through gate 35 are reserved, and the number of the reserved balls is displayed by turning on the general-purpose display unit 38b.

  A lottery is performed with the winning of the first working port 33 or the second working port 34 as a trigger. Then, the lottery result is clearly shown through display effects on the main display device 41 of the special figure unit 37 and the variable display unit 36.

  Specifically, the special figure unit 37 is provided with a special figure display unit 37a. The display area of the special figure display unit 37 a is narrower than the display surface of the main display device 41. In the special figure display unit 37a, the variation display of the picture is performed by performing the big hit occurrence lottery with the winning of the first operating port 33 or the winning of the second operating port 34 as a trigger. And the display corresponding to the result of lottery occurrence lottery is performed as a stop result after the change display of a picture is performed. In addition, although the special figure display part 37a is comprised by the segment display by which several segment light emission parts are arranged in the predetermined | prescribed aspect, it is not limited to this, A liquid crystal display device, an organic electroluminescence display device , Or other types of display devices such as CRT or dot matrix display. In addition, as a picture displayed on the special figure display unit 37a, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, or a plurality of types of colors A configuration in which is displayed is conceivable.

  In the special figure unit 37, a special figure holding display part 37b is provided at a position adjacent to the special figure display part 37a. A maximum of four game balls won in the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 are reserved, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting the special figure reservation display portion 37b.

  Specifically, the main display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, and display contents are controlled by an effect control device 80 described later. The main display device 41 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device having a display surface such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT, and is a dot matrix display. May be.

  In the main display device 41, when the special symbol display unit 37a displays the variation of the pattern based on the winning in the first working port 33 or the winning in the second working port 34, the variation display of the symbol is performed accordingly. Is called. That is, when the variable display is performed on the special figure display unit 37a, the main display device 41 performs the variable display accordingly. Then, for example, in the game times in which the result of the jackpot occurrence lottery becomes the jackpot result, a predetermined combination of symbols is stopped and displayed on the active line set in advance on the main display device 41.

  The display contents of the main display device 41 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 3A to 3J are diagrams individually showing symbols variably displayed on the main display device 41. FIGS. 4A and 4B are display surfaces of the main display device 41. FIG. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 3 (a) to FIG. 3 (j), a design which is a kind of design is composed of nine main designs with numbers "1" to "9" respectively, and a shell-shaped design. It is comprised by the sub-pattern which consists of. More specifically, the main symbols are configured by attaching numbers “1” to “9” to nine types of character symbols such as octopus.

  As shown in FIG. 4A, on the display surface of the main display device 41, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of an upper stage, a middle stage, and a lower stage are set as a plurality of display areas. Each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 includes a main symbol and a sub symbol arranged in a predetermined order. Specifically, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in descending order of numbers in the upper symbol row Z1, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending numerical order, and one sub symbol is arranged between the main symbols.

  That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending numerical order, and then between the main symbol “9” and the main symbol “1”. In addition, a main symbol “4” is additionally arranged, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. In other words, only the middle symbol row Z2 is composed of 20 symbols by arranging 10 main symbols. On the display surface, the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a variable manner so as to scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity.

  As shown in FIG. 4B, on the display surface, 3 symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of 9 symbols of 3 × 3 are stopped and displayed. It has become. Further, five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right lowering line L4, and a right uppering line L5 are set on the display surface. Then, the variable display stops in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and all the symbol rows Z1 are formed in a state in which a combination of symbols having the same number attached to any one of the effective lines is formed. When the fluctuation display of .about.Z3 is completed, the jackpot moving image is displayed as a normal jackpot result or a 15R probability variable jackpot result which will be described later.

  In this pachinko machine 10, the main symbols assigned with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) correspond to “specific symbols” and are assigned even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8). The main symbol corresponds to “non-specific symbol”. When the 15R probability variation jackpot result is generated, the same specific symbol combination or the same non-specific symbol combination is stopped and displayed. When a normal jackpot result occurs, the same combination of non-specific symbols is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the case of an explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result to be described later, the variation display of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is finished in a state where a predetermined symbol combination different from the same symbol combination is formed, and then, An explicit video is displayed.

  Note that the variation display mode of the symbols on the main display device 41 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary, such as the number of symbol rows, the direction of symbol variation display in the symbol rows, the number of symbols in each symbol row, etc. Can be appropriately changed. Further, the pattern that is variably displayed on the main display device 41 is not limited to the above-described pattern. For example, only a number may be variably displayed as the pattern.

  Further, based on the winning in one of the operation ports 33, 34, the variable display is started in the special figure display unit 37a and the main display device 41 until a predetermined stop result is displayed and the above-mentioned variable display is stopped. Corresponds to one game time.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 2, when a big win is won in the big win occurrence lottery based on the winning to the first working port 33 or the second working port 34, the special electricity winning device 32 can be won. Transition to the open / close execution mode. The special electric prize winning device 32 is provided with a large winning opening (not shown) leading to the back side of the game board 21 and an open / close door 32a for opening and closing the large winning opening. The open / close door 32a is arranged in either a closed state or an open state. Specifically, the open / close door 32a is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot be won, and can be switched to an open state in which game balls can be won when winning the transition to the open / close execution mode in the internal lottery. It has become. Incidentally, the opening / closing execution mode is a mode that shifts when a hit result is obtained. Note that, in the closed state, winning may not be impossible, but it may be configured such that winning is less likely to occur than in the open state. Further, in the opening / closing execution mode, a display effect corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode is executed by the main display device 41.

  A variable display unit 36 is provided so as to include the central portion of the game area PA. In the variable display unit 36, the game area PA is variable because the center frame 42 provided so as to surround the main display device 41 protrudes in front of the pachinko machine 10 from the surface of the game board 21. An upper area that is an area above the predetermined height position of the display unit 36, a left area that is continuous to the upper area below and on the left side of the variable display unit 36, and an upper area below the upper area. The right side area, which is a right side area from the variable display unit 36, and the lower side area, which is a lower side area and continuous from the left side area and the right side area below the variable display unit 36. It is divided into and. In this case, the first working port 33 and the second working port 34 are provided in the lower region. The first operation port 33 is disposed directly below the stage 42a formed in the center frame 42, and the game balls discharged from the center of the stage 42a to the outside of the variable display unit 36 win the first operation port 33. In addition to being easy, the entrance portion of the guide passage that allows the game ball to be guided onto the stage 42a is formed to allow the game ball to enter from the left region. Therefore, when the launch operation is performed so that the game ball flows down the left region, the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 is performed rather than when the launch operation is performed so that the game ball flows down the right region. This makes it easier for game balls to enter. On the other hand, the special electric prize winning device 32 is provided in the right region. Therefore, when the opening / closing execution mode occurs, if the shooting operation has been performed so that the game ball flows down the left area until then, it is necessary to change the shooting operation mode to the mode where the game ball flows down the right area. There is.

  Here, the variable display unit 36 includes a first sub display device 43 and a second sub display device 44 in addition to the main display device 41. The first sub display device 43 and the second sub display device 44 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of the variable display unit 36 for explaining the first sub display device 43 and the second sub display device 44.

  Each of the first sub display device 43 and the second sub display device 44 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by an effect control device described later. The first sub display device 43 and the second sub display device 44 are not limited to the liquid crystal display device, and are other display devices having a display surface such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT. Alternatively, a dot matrix display may be used. In addition, the first sub display device 43 and the second sub display device 44 are not limited to the configuration in which the same type of display device is used. Of the first sub display device 43 and the second sub display device 44, A different type of display device may be used for the first sub display device 43 and the second sub display device 44, such that one is a liquid crystal display device and the other is a dot matrix display.

  The first sub display device 43 and the second sub display device 44 are display devices having the same shape, and the resolution of the display surface, the shape of the display surface, and the size of the display surface are the same. The display surface of the first sub display device 43 and the display surface of the second sub display device 44 are both rectangular. The display surface of the first sub display device 43 and the display surface of the second sub display device 44 are both narrower than the display surface of the main display device 41, and further, the display surface of the first sub display device 43 and the second sub display. The total area of the display surface of the device 44 is also smaller than the display surface of the main display device 41. Furthermore, the dimension of the long side on the display surface of the first sub display device 43 is shorter than the size of any side of the rectangular display surface of the main display device 41, and the long side of the display surface of the second sub display device 44 is long. Is shorter than the dimension of any side of the rectangular display surface of the main display device 41. As a result, even if the first sub display device 43 and the second sub display device 44 are provided separately from the main display device 41, the player's attention to the main display device 41 is extremely reduced. It becomes possible to prevent this.

  Both the first sub display device 43 and the second sub display device 44 are arranged in front of the display surface of the main display device 41. The first sub display device 43 is provided with a first drive unit 45 for sliding and rotating the first sub display device 43 in front of the main display device 41. A second drive unit 46 for sliding and rotating the second sub display device 44 in front of the main display device 41 is provided.

  The first drive unit 45 is provided on the back side of the center frame 42 above the rectangular opening 42 b that exposes the display surface of the main display device 41 in the center frame 42 toward the front of the game board 21. The second drive unit 46 is provided on the back side of the center frame 42 below the opening 42b. That is, the center frame 42 is provided with a pair of upper and lower drive units 45 and 46.

  The first drive unit 45 and the second drive unit 46 have the same configuration. Specifically, each of the drive units 45 and 46 is capable of reciprocating in the horizontal direction along the drive rails 45a and 46a extending in the horizontal direction and the sub display devices 43 and 44. The slide drive motors 45c and 46c that enable the support members 45b and 46b to be supported to reciprocate in the vertical direction and the sub display devices 43 and 44 that are rotatably supported by the support members 45b and 46b are rotationally driven. Rotational drive motors 45d and 46d. The sub display devices 43 and 44 are supported by the rotation drive motors 45d and 46d so that the display surface faces the front of the pachinko machine 10 which is the same direction as the display surface of the main display device 41. When 45d and 46d are in a drive state, the pachinko machine 10 rotates about the front-rear direction as a rotation axis.

  The support members 45b and 46b have a long plate shape, and are mounted on the slide drive motors 45c and 46c so that the longitudinal direction thereof is the vertical direction. In this case, the combination of the first sub-display device 43 and the rotary drive motor 45d is mounted on the lower end side of the support member 45b of the first drive unit 45, and the second end is on the upper end side of the support member 46b of the second drive unit 46. A combination of the sub display device 44 and the rotation drive motor 46d is mounted. When the slide drive motors 45c and 46c are in a driving state in which the support members 45b and 46b are moved in the vertical direction, the support members 45b and 46b are moved in the vertical direction, and accordingly, are integrated with the support members 45b and 46b. The combination of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 and the rotational drive motors 45d and 46d that move are moved vertically. Further, when the slide drive motors 45c, 46c are in a drive state in which the slide drive motors 45c, 46c move in the lateral direction along the drive rails 45a, 46a, the slide drive motors 45c, 46c move in the lateral direction. , 46c integrated with the sub display devices 43, 44, the support members 45b, 46b, and the rotation drive motors 45d, 46d move in the lateral direction.

  The state shown in FIG. 5 is a state in which each of the first sub display device 43 and the second sub display device 44 is disposed at the initial position. In this case, the first sub display device 43 is disposed on the upper side of the opening 42 b of the center frame 42 in a landscape orientation, and the lower half of the display surface of the first sub display device 43 is the display of the main display device 41. It is exposed from the opening 42b in front of the surface and the upper half is hidden behind the center frame 42. In addition, the second sub display device 44 is also disposed in the lower side portion of the opening 42 b of the center frame 42 in a landscape orientation, and the upper half of the display surface of the second sub display device 44 is the display surface of the main display device 41. The lower half is exposed from the opening 42b in front of the center frame 42 and hidden behind the center frame 42. Thus, in a situation where both the first sub display device 43 and the second sub display device 44 are arranged at the initial position, the sub display devices 43 and 44 are in a positional relationship in which they are separated in the vertical direction. Further, in a situation where both the sub display devices 43 and 44 are arranged at the initial positions, the horizontal positions of the sub display devices 43 and 44 are the same. Thereby, the entire lower surface of the first sub display device 43 is opposed to the entire upper surface of the second sub display device 44.

  FIG. 6A and FIG. 6B are explanatory diagrams for explaining an example of a movement mode of each of the sub display devices 43 and 44. The slide drive motors 45c and 46c are in a drive state in which the support members 45b and 46b are moved downward in a state where the sub display devices 43 and 44 are disposed at the initial positions, so that the first position is maintained while maintaining a horizontally long posture. The first sub display device 43 moves downward and the second sub display device 44 moves upward while maintaining a horizontally long posture. Then, the sub display devices 43 and 44 are brought close to each other up to a position where the lower surface of the horizontally oriented first sub display device 43 and the upper surface of the horizontally oriented second sub display device 44 face each other at a short distance. By moving in the vertical direction, the sub display devices 43 and 44 are arranged side by side in the vertical direction as shown in FIG. In this case, the display surface of the first sub-display device 43 and the display surface of the second sub-display device 44 are arranged so as to be visually continuous, and one surface of a square shape or a rectangular shape is formed by these display surfaces. Will be. This position is the first juxtaposed position. At the first juxtaposed position, the boundary between the display surface of the first sub display device 43 and the display surface of the second sub display device 44 exists so as to extend in the horizontal direction. Note that a detection sensor (not shown) is provided for detecting that each of the sub display devices 43 and 44 is disposed at the first juxtaposition position. In the distribution control device 70 described later, the detection result of the detection sensor is displayed. Based on this, it is specified that the sub display devices 43 and 44 are arranged at the first juxtaposed position, and the drive state of the slide drive motors 45c and 46c is stopped.

  In the state shown in FIG. 6A, the slide drive motor 45c of the first drive unit 45 is in a drive state in which the first sub display device 43 is moved rightward and downward, and the rotational drive motor 45d of the first drive unit 45 is moved. The first sub display device 43 is driven to rotate clockwise, and the slide drive motor 46c of the second drive unit 46 is driven to move the second sub display device 44 leftward and upward and second. When the rotational drive motor 46d of the drive unit 46 is in a driving state in which the second sub display device 44 is rotated clockwise, the sub display devices 43 and 44 are moved to the second juxtaposed position as shown in FIG. It will be in the state arranged in. In the second juxtaposed position, each of the sub display devices 43 and 44 has a vertically long posture, and the left surface of the first sub display device 43 in the vertically long posture and the right surface of the second sub display device 44 in the vertically long posture are close to each other. Opposite at a distance. In this case, the display surface of the first sub-display device 43 and the display surface of the second sub-display device 44 are arranged so as to be visually continuous, and one surface of a square shape or a rectangular shape is formed by these display surfaces. Will be. At the second juxtaposed position, the boundary between the display surface of the first sub display device 43 and the display surface of the second sub display device 44 exists so as to extend in the vertical direction. Note that a detection sensor (not shown) is provided for detecting that each of the sub display devices 43 and 44 is disposed at the second juxtaposition position. In the distribution control device 70 described later, the detection result of the detection sensor is displayed. Based on this, it is determined that the sub display devices 43 and 44 are arranged at the second juxtaposition position, and the drive states of the slide drive motors 45c and 46c and the rotary drive motors 45d and 46d are stopped. In addition to the first juxtaposed position and the second juxtaposed position, a detection sensor (not shown) for detecting an initial position and intermediate positions described later is provided. Based on the detection result of the sensor, the drive states of the slide drive motors 45c and 46c and the rotation drive motors 45d and 46d are stopped.

  In addition to the initial position, the first side-by-side position, and the second side-by-side position, the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are disposed at the initial position shown in FIG. 5 and the first side-by-side position shown in FIG. There is a position where each of the sub display devices 43 and 44 is arranged at an intermediate position from the installation position. In addition, there is a position where the first sub display device 43 moves to the right and the second sub display device 44 moves to the left as compared to the second juxtaposed position shown in FIG. ing. Each of these intermediate positions has a positional relationship in which the first sub display device 43 and the second sub display device 44 are separated in the vertical direction in the former case, and the first sub display device 43 and the second sub-position in the latter case. The sub display device 44 is in a positional relationship separated in the horizontal direction. Further, in a state where the first sub display device 43 is disposed at the initial position, the second sub display device 44 corresponds to the position corresponding to the first juxtaposed position, the position corresponding to the second juxtaposed position, and each intermediate position. In the state where the second sub display device 44 is arranged at the initial position, the first sub display device 43 is located at the position corresponding to the first juxtaposition position, and at the second juxtaposition position. It may be arranged at a position corresponding to each corresponding position and each intermediate position.

  In a situation where the sub display devices 43 and 44 are arranged at positions other than the initial position, the support members 45 b and 46 b are exposed from the opening 42 b of the center frame 42. In this case, since the support members 45b and 46b are formed to be colorless and transparent, the support members 45b and 46b can be made inconspicuous, and the image displayed on the main display device 41 is supported. It becomes possible not to be hidden by the members 45b and 46b.

  As shown in FIG. 1, a front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame 13 having the game board 21 having the above-described configuration. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 51 so that almost the entire game area PA can be viewed from the front. The window part 51 has a substantially elliptical shape, and the window panel 52 is fitted therein. The window panel 52 is formed of colorless and transparent with glass, but is not limited to this, and may be formed of colorless and transparent with synthetic resin. The game area PA is defined through the window panel 52 from the front of the pachinko machine 10. As long as it is visible, it may be colored and transparent.

  A display light emitting unit 53 is provided above the window unit 51. In addition, a pair of left and right speaker portions 54 that output sound effects according to the gaming state are provided. Further, below the window portion 51, an upper bulging portion 55 and a lower bulging portion 56 that bulge to the near side are arranged in parallel vertically. An upper plate 55a that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulge portion 55, and a lower plate 56a that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulge portion 56. The upper plate 55a has a function of temporarily storing the game balls paid out from the payout device provided in the back pack unit 15 and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism side while aligning them in a row. In addition, the lower tray 56a has a function of storing game balls that are surplus in the upper tray 55a.

  On the back side of the inner frame 13, a main control device 60, a distribution control device 70, and an effect control device 80 are mounted. The back pack unit 15 is equipped with a payout mechanism including a payout device 68, a power source and launch control device 65, and a payout control device 66. Hereinafter, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described.

<Electric configuration of pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

<Main controller 60>
The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control of the game. In the main controller 60, a substrate box that accommodates the main control substrate 61 or the like is provided with a trace means for leaving a trace of its opening or a trace structure for leaving a trace of its opening. It may be. As the trace means, a plurality of case bodies constituting the substrate box are unseparably coupled, and a configuration of a coupling portion (caulking portion) that requires destruction of a predetermined part at the time of separation or an adhesive layer to be bonded at the time of peeling The structure which sticks the seal seal | sticker which leaves the trace of having been peeled by remaining so that it may straddle the boundary between several case bodies can be considered. Moreover, as a trace structure, the structure which apply | coats an adhesive agent with respect to the boundary between the some case bodies which comprise a board | substrate box can be considered.

  An MPU 62 is mounted on the main control board 61. The MPU 62 includes a ROM 63 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 62 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 63 is executed. A RAM 64, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are incorporated.

  The ROM 63 is a storage means (that is, a non-volatile storage means) that can be randomly accessed when reading a control program or fixed value data and does not require external power supply for storage retention. Specifically, a NOR type cache memory is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the type of memory used as the ROM 63 is arbitrary as long as random access is possible. In addition, a configuration in which the control and calculation portion, the ROM 63, and the RAM 64 are integrated into one chip is not essential, and each function may be mounted as a separate chip, and some functions may be configured as separate chips. It is good also as a structure currently mounted.

  The MPU 62 is provided with an input port and an output port. A power source and launch control device 65 is connected to the input side of the MPU 62. The power source and launch control device 65 is connected to, for example, a commercial power source (external power source) in a game hall or the like. Then, operating power is supplied to the main control board 61 based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source. Incidentally, the operating power is supplied not only to the main control board 61 but also to other devices such as the payout control device 66 and an effect control device 80 described later.

  A power failure monitoring board may be provided on the power path between the MPU 62 and the power source and launch control device 65. In this case, the occurrence of a power failure is monitored by the power failure monitoring board, and when the occurrence of a power failure is confirmed, a power failure signal is transmitted to the MPU 62 so that the MPU 62 performs processing for a power failure. It becomes possible to do.

  Various sensors (not shown) are connected to the input side of the MPU 62. As a part of the various sensors, detection provided in a one-to-one manner with respect to a winning-corresponding pitching portion such as a general winning opening 31, a special prize winning device 32, a first operating opening 33, a second operating opening 34, and a through gate 35 A sensor is included, and the MPU 62 performs a winning determination (entering determination) for each entering part. In addition, the MPU 62 executes a lottery occurrence lottery and a jackpot result type lottery based on winnings to the first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34, and also executes a reach generation lottery and a variable display time determination lottery for each game time. To do.

  Here, a configuration for performing various lotteries in the MPU 62 will be described.

  The MPU 62 uses lots of counter information during the game to perform jackpot occurrence lottery, special display display unit 37a display setting, main display device 41 symbol display setting, general symbol display unit 38a display setting, and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8, a hit random number counter C1 used for jackpot occurrence lottery, a jackpot type counter C2 used when determining a jackpot type such as a 15R probability variable jackpot result or a normal jackpot result, Reach random number counter C3 used for the reach generation lottery when the main display device 41 moves out and fluctuates, the random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the hit random number counter C1, the special figure display unit 37a and the main display device 41 The variation type counter CS for determining the variation display time at is used. Furthermore, the universal electric utility release counter C4 used for the lottery of whether or not the electric utility item 34a of the second working port 34 is set to the electric utility open state is used. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in the lottery counter buffer 64a.

  Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to “0” after reaching the maximum value. The information corresponding to the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the reserved storage area 64b as an acquisition information storage means when a winning to the first working port 33 or the second working port 34 occurs. Stored in

  The holding storage area 64b includes a holding area RE and an execution area AE. The holding area RE includes a first holding area RE1, a second holding area RE2, a third holding area RE3, and a fourth holding area RE4. In the winning history to the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34, In addition, the numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored as hold information in any of the hold areas RE1 to RE4.

  In the first reservation area RE1 to the fourth reservation area RE4, when a winning to the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 is continuously generated a plurality of times, the first reservation area RE1 → the second reservation area RE2 The numerical information is stored in time series in the order of the third reserved area RE3 → the fourth reserved area RE4. By providing the four holding areas RE1 to RE4 as described above, up to four game balls winning histories to the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 are stored and stored. . Note that the number that can be reserved and stored is not limited to four, but may be any other number such as two, three, or five or more. The execution area AE is an area for moving each value stored in the first holding area RE1 of the holding area RE when starting the variable display of the special figure display section 37a. Is determined based on various numerical information stored in the execution area AE.

  In detail about each counter, the winning random number counter C1 is configured such that “1” is sequentially added within a range of 0 to 599, for example, and after reaching the maximum value, returns to “0”. In particular, when the winning random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the initial random number counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The winning random number counter C1 is periodically updated and stored in the holding storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34.

  The random number value for winning the jackpot is stored in the ROM 63 as a success / failure table. As the success / failure table, a success / failure table for the low probability mode and a success / failure table for the high probability mode are set. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, the low probability mode and the high probability mode are set as the lottery modes in the jackpot occurrence lottery means.

  In the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the low probability mode is referred to at the time of the lottery, the number of random numbers that win the jackpot is two. On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the high probability mode is referred to at the time of the lottery, the number of random numbers that will win the jackpot is 20. If the winning probability in the high probability mode is higher than that in the low probability mode, the number of random numbers to be won is arbitrary.

  The big hit type counter C2 is configured so that “1” is sequentially added within a range of 0 to 29, and after reaching the maximum value, returns to “0”. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated and stored in the holding storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of jackpot results are set. The plurality of jackpot results are as follows: (1) a mode of opening / closing control of the special prize winning device 32 in the opening / closing execution mode, (2) lottery mode in the jackpot generating lottery means after the opening / closing execution mode ends, and (3) after the opening / closing execution mode ends. A plurality of jackpot results are set by providing a difference in the three conditions of the support mode of the second utility port 34 in the utility service 34a.

  As an aspect of the opening / closing control of the special electricity prize winning device 32 in the opening / closing execution mode, the occurrence frequency of winning in the special electricity prize winning device 32 from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode is relatively high. A frequency winning mode and a low frequency winning mode are set. Specifically, in the high-frequency winning mode, the opening / closing of the large winning opening is performed 15 times from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode, and one opening is performed until 30 seconds elapses or winning in the large winning opening Continue until the number reaches 10. On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening / closing of the big prize opening is performed twice from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode, and one opening is performed until 0.2 sec elapses or the number of winning prizes in the big winning opening Continue until there are six.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, in a situation where the launch operation device 24 is operated by the player, the game ball launching mechanism 67 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is launched toward the game area PA every 0.6 sec. Is done. On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening time of one large winning opening is 0.2 sec as described above. That is, in the low-frequency winning mode, the time for opening a single big winning opening is shorter than the game ball firing cycle. Therefore, in the opening / closing execution mode of the low frequency winning mode, the winning of the game ball does not substantially occur.

  It should be noted that the number of opening / closing of the large winning opening in the high frequency winning mode and the low frequency winning mode, the opening time for one opening, and the maximum number of winnings for one opening are higher in the high frequency winning mode than in the low frequency winning mode. As long as the occurrence frequency of the winning to the special electricity winning device 32 from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode is increased, the value is not limited to the above value and is arbitrary.

  However, in order to clarify the difference in privilege between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, a configuration in which a prize is not actually generated in the special electric prize winning device 32 in the opening / closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode. It is good to do. For example, in the high-frequency winning mode, the product of the launch period of the game ball and the upper limit winning number is set shorter than the opening time for one release, while in the low-frequency winning mode, the game ball is set for one release. The product of the firing period and the upper limit winning number may be set longer than the opening time. In addition, even if the launch interval of the game balls and the opening time of one big prize opening are not as described above, in the low frequency winning mode, the latter is set to be shorter than the former. In particular, it is possible to easily realize a configuration in which no prize is awarded to the special electric prize winning device 32.

  The support mode of the electric utility 34a of the second operating port 34 is such that when the game ball PA is continuously fired in the same manner with respect to the game area PA, the second operating port 34 has a universal mode. The low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode are set so that the frequency at which the electrical service object 34a is opened per unit time is relatively high.

  Specifically, in the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric utility open state in the electric utility open lottery using the general electric utility open counter C4 is the same (for example, both 4/5 However, in the high frequency support mode, the number of times that the power utility 34a is in the open state is set more frequently than in the low frequency support mode. The opening time is set longer. In this case, in the high-frequency support mode, when the electrified open state is won and the open state of the general utility 34a occurs a plurality of times, from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state The closing time is set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high frequency support mode, a shorter time is secured as a minimum secured time after the next electric character opening lottery is performed after the electric character object opening lottery is performed than in the low frequency support mode. Is set to be selected.

  As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability of winning a prize to the second operation port 34 is higher than in the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, there is a higher probability of winning the first operating port 33 than in the second operating port 34, but in the high frequency support mode, the second operation is performed more than in the first operating port 33. The probability of winning a prize in the mouth 34 is increased. When a winning is made to the second operation port 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player plays a game while not reducing the number of possessed balls so much. It can be carried out.

  The configuration for increasing the frequency at which the high frequency support mode is set to the power release state per unit time as compared with the low frequency support mode is not limited to the above-described configuration, for example, the electric component release lottery It is good also as a structure which raises the probability of becoming electrified in the electric character open state in In addition, a secured time (e.g., based on a winning to the through gate 35 in the general map display unit 38a) that is secured after the next electrification opening lottery is performed after the first electrification opening lottery is performed. In a configuration in which a plurality of types of variable display time) are prepared, the high frequency support mode is set so that a short securing time is easily selected or the average secure time is shorter than the low frequency support mode. It may be. Further, the number of times of opening is increased, the opening time is lengthened, and the secured time that is secured when the next electric winning combination opening lottery is performed after the first electric winning combination releasing lottery is shortened (that is, Apply one of the conditions or any combination of conditions among shortening the average display time and increasing the winning probability. Thus, the advantage of the high frequency support mode over the low frequency support mode may be increased.

  The game result distribution destination for the big hit type counter C2 is stored in the ROM 63 as a distribution table. As the distribution destinations, a normal jackpot result, an explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, and a 15R probability variation jackpot result are set.

  The normal jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening / closing execution mode becomes the high-frequency winning mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the jackpot occurrence lottery mode becomes the low probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. However, the high-frequency support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode when the number of games reaches the end reference number (specifically, 100 times) after the shift.

  The explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening / closing execution mode becomes the low-frequency winning mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the jackpot occurrence lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. is there. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode are continued until the lottery result in the jackpot occurrence lottery is a jackpot state win and the game shifts to a jackpot state.

  The 15R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening / closing execution mode becomes the high-frequency winning mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the jackpot occurrence lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. . These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode are continued until the lottery result in the jackpot occurrence lottery is a jackpot state win and the game shifts to a jackpot state.

  Note that the normal gaming state in relation to each of the above gaming states refers to a state where the big hit occurrence lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode.

  In the distribution table, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of “0 to 29”, “0 to 9” corresponds to the normal jackpot result, and “10 to 14” corresponds to the explicit 2R probability variable jackpot result. “15 to 29” corresponds to the 15R probability variation jackpot result.

  The reach random number counter C3 is configured such that “1” is sequentially added within a range of 0 to 238, for example, and reaches the maximum value and then returns to “0”. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated and stored in the holding storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 10, an expected effect is set as a kind of display effect in the main display device 41. The expected effect includes a main display device 41 capable of displaying a variation of symbols, and a special display of a stop display result after variation display is provided in a game time in which the opening / closing execution mode of the special electricity prize winning device 32 is a high-frequency winning mode. In the resulting gaming machine, the player is assumed to be in a variable display state that is likely to be the special display result before the stop display result is derived and displayed after the symbol variable display on the main display device 41 is started. The display state for this purpose.

  Two types of expectation effects are set: the reach effect, and a notice effect for expecting a reach effect or a special display result before the reach effect occurs.

  In the reach effect, a combination of jackpot symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the high-frequency winning mode is obtained by stopping and displaying symbols for some of the symbol sequences displayed on the display surface of the main display device 41. It includes a display state in which a combination of reach symbols that may be established is displayed, and in that state, the symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the remaining symbol rows. In addition, in the state where the combination of reach symbols is displayed as described above, the variation display of symbols is performed in the remaining symbol columns, and a reach effect is performed by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image in the background image. In addition, there are those that perform a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface after reducing or not displaying a combination of reach symbols.

  Specifically, for the reach effect, as a step before ending the variable display of symbols, a combination of jackpot symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the high-frequency winning mode on the preset effective line in the display surface of the main display device 41 A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying a combination of reach symbols that may hold the symbol, and a symbol variation display is performed by a final stop symbol sequence in a state where the reach line is formed.

  The display contents of FIG. 4 will be described in detail. In the state where the symbol variation display is first ended in the upper symbol row Z1 and the symbol variation display is further terminated in the lower symbol row Z3, any effective A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying the main symbols having the same numbers on the lines L1 to L5, and in the situation where the reach line is formed, the symbol variation display is performed in the middle symbol row Z2. It will be a reach production. When the high-frequency winning mode occurs, the main symbol with the same number as the main symbol forming the reach line is stopped and displayed on the reach line in the middle symbol row Z2. The symbol variation display is terminated.

  In the notice effect, the symbol display is changed in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 after the symbol variation display is started on the display surface of the main display device 41, or in some symbol sequences. In a situation where the symbols are variably displayed in a plurality of symbol rows, a mode in which the character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is included. Moreover, what makes a background image the predetermined aspect different from the previous aspect, and what makes the symbol on the symbol sequence Z1-Z3 the predetermined aspect different from the previous aspect are also included. Such a notice effect may occur at any game time when the reach effect is performed and when the reach effect is not performed, but is higher when the reach effect is performed than when the reach effect is not performed. It is set to occur with probability.

  The reach effect is executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the game times that shift to the opening / closing execution mode. In the game times that do not shift to the opening / closing execution mode, the reach random number counter C3 acquired at a predetermined timing is referred to the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 63 in response to the occurrence of the reach effect. It is executed when On the other hand, the determination as to whether or not to perform the notice effect is not performed by the main controller 60 but is performed by the distribution controller 70.

  The variation type counter CS is configured such that, for example, “1” is sequentially added within a range of 0 to 198, and after reaching the maximum value, returns to “0”. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 62 determines the variation display time in the special figure display unit 37a and the symbol variation display time in the main display device 41. The variation type counter CS is updated once every time a timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time of the main process, which will be described later. Then, the value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when the variation pattern is determined at the time of starting the variation display in the special diagram display unit 37a and at the time of starting the variation of the symbol by the main display device 41. In determining the variable display time, the variable display time table stored in advance in the variable display time table storage area of the ROM 63 is referred to.

  For example, the universal power release counter C4 is configured such that “1” is sequentially added within a range of 0 to 250, and after reaching the maximum value, returns to “0”. The general electric utility release counter C4 is periodically updated and stored in the electric utility reservation area 64c at the timing when a game ball wins the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the general utility 34a to the open state based on the stored value of the general utility release counter C4.

  As shown in FIG. 7, a payout control device 66 and a power source and launch control device 65 are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. For example, a pay ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 66 based on a winning determination result for the winning corresponding winning portion. The payout control device 66 performs payout control of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 68 based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60. A firing permission command is transmitted from the main control device 60 to the power source and firing control device 65 based on the operation of the firing operation device 24. The power supply and launch control device 65 drives the game ball launch mechanism 67 to launch the game ball toward the game area PA based on the launch permission command received from the main control device 60.

  To the output side of the MPU 62, a special map display unit 37a and a general map display unit 38a are connected. Display control of the special map display unit 37a and the general map display unit 38a is directly performed by the MPU 62. That is, in each game round, the display control of the special figure display unit 37a is executed in the MPU 62. In addition, when the lottery result indicating whether or not to open the electric utility item 34a is clearly indicated, the MPU 62 performs display control of the normal display portion 38a.

  Connected to the output side of the MPU 62 are a special electric prize driving unit that opens and closes the open / close door of the special electric prize device 32 and a universal electric component drive part that opens and closes the electric utility item 34a of the second operating port 34. . That is, in the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 62 performs drive control of the special electric prize driving unit so that the special winning opening is opened and closed. In addition, when the power utility 34a is opened, the MPU 62 performs drive control of the power utility drive unit so that the power utility 34a is opened and closed. The distribution control device 70 is connected to the output side of the MPU 62, and various commands for effects are transmitted to the distribution control device 70.

  Here, processing executed by the MPU 62 will be described. The processing of the MPU 62 is broadly classified into main processing that is started when the power is turned on and timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 4 msec).

  FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing the main process. In step S101, power-on wait processing is executed. In the power-on wait process, for example, the process waits without progressing to the next process until a predetermined time for wait (specifically 1 sec) elapses after the main process is activated. The operation start and initial setting of the main display device 41 are completed during the execution period of the power-on wait process. In the subsequent step S102, access to the RAM 64 is permitted, and in step S103, the internal function register of the MPU 62 is set.

  Thereafter, in step S104, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch provided in the power supply and launch control device 65 is manually operated. In subsequent step S105, whether or not “1” is set in the power failure flag of the RAM 64 is determined. Determine whether. In step S106, a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum is executed. In subsequent step S107, whether or not the checksum matches the checksum stored when the power is turned off, that is, the validity of the stored data is checked. judge.

  In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when a game hall starts business, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch is pressed. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch is pressed, the process proceeds to step S108. Similarly, when the information on occurrence of power shutdown is not set, or when an abnormality of data stored and held is confirmed by the checksum, the process proceeds to step S108. In step S108, the RAM 64 is cleared. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S109.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch has not been pressed, step S109 is executed without executing step S108 on condition that the power failure flag is set to “1” and the checksum is normal. Proceed to In step S109, a power-on setting process is executed. In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the RAM 64 such as initialization of a power failure flag is set to an initial value, and a command corresponding to the current gaming state is transmitted to the distribution control device 70 in order to recognize the current gaming state. To do.

  Then, it progresses to the residual process of step S110-step S113. That is, the MPU 62 is configured to periodically execute the timer interrupt process, but a remaining time is generated between one timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process. The remaining time varies depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, but the remaining processes in steps S110 to S113 are repeatedly executed using such irregular time. In this regard, it can be said that the remaining processes in steps S110 to S113 are non-periodic processes that are performed irregularly.

  In the remaining process, first, in step S110, an interrupt prohibition setting is performed in order to prohibit the generation of the timer interrupt process. In the subsequent step S111, a random number initial value update process for updating the random number initial value counter CINI is executed, and a change counter update process for updating the change type counter CS is executed in step S112. In these update processes, the current numerical information is read from the corresponding counter of the RAM 64, the process of adding 1 to the read numerical information is executed, and then the process of overwriting the read-out counter is executed. In this case, each counter value is cleared to “0” when it reaches the maximum value. Thereafter, in step S113, an interrupt permission setting for switching from a state in which the generation of the timer interrupt process is prohibited to a state in which the timer interrupt process is permitted is performed. If the process of step S113 is performed, it will return to step S110 and will repeat the process of step S110-step S113.

  Next, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The timer interrupt process is executed periodically (for example, at a cycle of 4 msec). First, in step S201, a power failure information storage process is executed. In the power outage information storage process, it is monitored whether or not a power outage signal corresponding to the occurrence of power interruption is received from the power outage monitoring board. If the occurrence of a power outage is specified, the process during power outage is executed.

  In subsequent step S202, a lottery random number update process is executed. In the lottery random number update process, the winning random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the universal utility release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the current numerical information is sequentially read from the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general electric utility release counter C4, and a process of adding 1 to each of the read numerical information is executed. Later, a process of overwriting the reading source counter is executed. In this case, each counter value is cleared to “0” when it reaches the maximum value. Thereafter, in step S203, the random number initial value update process is executed in the same manner as in step S111, and in step S204, the variation counter update process is executed in the same manner as in step S112.

  In subsequent step S205, a fraud detection process for monitoring whether or not a predetermined event set as a fraud monitoring target has occurred is executed. In the fraud detection process, occurrence of a plurality of types of events is monitored, and by confirming that a predetermined event has occurred, “1” is set to a game stop flag provided in the RAM 64.

  In the subsequent step S206, it is determined whether or not the progress of the game is stopped by determining whether or not “1” is set in the game stop flag. If a negative determination is made in step S206, the processing after step S207 is executed.

  In step S207, port output processing is executed. In the port output process, when output information has been set in the previous timer interrupt process, a process for performing output corresponding to the output information to various drive units is executed. For example, when information for switching the special electricity prize winning device 32 to the open state is set, output of the drive signal to the special electricity prize driving unit is started, and when information to switch to the closed state is set, Stop driving signal output. In addition, when the information for switching the power utility 34a of the second working port 34 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the power utility drive unit is started and the information to be switched to the closed state. Is set, the output of the drive signal is stopped.

  In a succeeding step S208, a reading process is executed. In the reading process, signals other than the power failure signal and the winning signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processing.

  In subsequent step S209, a winning detection process is executed. In the winning detection process, a signal received from each winning detection sensor is read, and whether or not there is a winning in the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the through gate 35. Execute the process to identify.

  In the subsequent step S210, timer update processing for updating the numerical information of a plurality of types of timer counters provided in the RAM 64 is executed. In this case, the timer counter that is updated by subtracting the stored numerical information is handled in an integrated manner. However, both the updating of the subtracting timer counter and the updating of the adding timer counter are performed collectively. It is good also as a structure.

  In the subsequent step S211, a launch control process for controlling the launch of the game ball is executed. In a situation where the launch operation to the launch operation device 24 is continued, as described above, one game ball is launched at a predetermined launch cycle of 0.6 sec.

  In the subsequent step S212, as input state monitoring processing, disconnection confirmation of each winning detection sensor and opening confirmation of the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 are performed based on the information read in the reading processing in step S208.

  In the subsequent step S213, a special figure special electric control process for performing execution control of the game times and execution control of the opening / closing execution mode is executed. In the special figure special electric control process, when a winning to the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 occurs in a situation where the number of the hold information stored in the hold storage area 64b is less than the upper limit number, A process of storing the numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 at the time as the hold information in the hold storage area 64b in time series is executed. Also, in the special figure special electric control process, a big hit is generated to determine whether or not the hold information corresponds to the big hit win on the condition that the hold information is stored while not in the game rotation and opening / closing execution mode. If it corresponds to the lottery process and the jackpot winning, a distribution determination process for determining which jackpot result the hold information corresponds to is executed. In addition, in the special figure special electric control process, not only the jackpot occurrence lottery process and the distribution determination process, but if the hold information does not correspond to the jackpot winning, whether or not the hold information corresponds to the occurrence of reach The reach determination process for determining the game time and the process for selecting the variation display time of the game times using the numerical information of the variation type counter CS at that time are performed. In this case, the variable display time table corresponding to the presence / absence of the jackpot winning, the type of jackpot and the presence / absence of reach is read from the ROM 63, and the current information is obtained from the read variation display time table and the numerical information of the variation type counter CS at that timing. Determine the variable display time of the game times. Then, the variation command including information on the variation display time of the determined game times and the type command including information on the game result are transmitted to the distribution control device 70, and the variation of the pattern in the special figure display unit 37a is transmitted. Start display. As a result, one game is started, and an effect for the game is started on the special figure display unit 37a and the main display device 41. Further, the MPU 62 starts measuring the fluctuation display time when the fluctuation command and the type command are transmitted.

  Further, in the special figure special electric control process, when the variable display time corresponding to the game time has elapsed during execution of one game time, the special figure display unit 37a performs the big game occurrence lottery process and the distribution of the current game time. A stop result corresponding to the result of the determination process is displayed, and measurement of a fixed display time (specifically, 0.5 sec) is started. And the state where the stop result was displayed on the special figure display part 37a is maintained over the fixed display time. When the fixed display time has passed, if the current game time corresponds to the result of losing, a new game time is started on the condition that the hold information is stored in the hold storage area 64b. Execute the process. If no hold information is stored, the process waits until new hold information is acquired.

  On the other hand, if the current game time corresponds to the jackpot result, a process for starting the opening / closing execution mode is executed. At the start, an opening command indicating that the opening / closing execution mode is started is transmitted to the distribution control device 70. In the special figure special electric control process, a process for starting each round game and a process for ending each round game are executed. In each of these processes, an open command indicating that the round game is started is transmitted to the distribution control device 70, and a close command indicating that the round game is ended is transmitted to the distribution control device 70. Further, in the special figure special electric control process, when the opening / closing execution mode is ended, an ending command indicating that is sent to the distribution control device 70, and the jackpot occurrence lottery mode and the support mode after the opening / closing execution mode are set. Execute the process. In the opening / closing execution mode, for example, an opening period occurs over a period of 3 seconds, for example, and an effect is made to allow the player to recognize that the opening / closing execution mode has occurred during this opening period. Thereafter, a round game in which opening and closing of the special electricity prize winning device 32 is executed is executed a predetermined number of times. Then, after a predetermined number of round games have been executed, an ending period is generated over a period of, for example, 5 seconds, and an effect that enables the player to recognize that the opening / closing execution mode ends in this ending period is executed. .

  After executing the special figure special electric control process of step S213 in the timer interruption process, the normal figure electric power control process is executed in step S214. In the ordinary map / electric power control process, when a winning to the through gate 35 is generated, a process for acquiring the retained information on the ordinary map side is executed and the retained information on the ordinary map side is stored. In addition, a release determination is performed on the hold information, and a process for performing an effect for a normal diagram is executed using the release determination as a trigger. Further, based on the result of the opening determination, a process for opening and closing the utility wire 34a of the second working port 34 is executed.

  In the subsequent step S215, based on the processing results of the immediately preceding step S213 and step S214, output information for reflecting the increase / decrease number of the hold information corresponding to the special figure display unit 37a to the special figure hold display unit 37b is set. At the same time, output information for reflecting the increase / decrease number of the hold information corresponding to the general map display unit 38a to the general map hold display unit 38b is set. In step S215, the output information for updating the display content of the special figure display unit 37a is set based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S213 and S214, and the display content of the general map display unit 38a is set. Set the output information to be updated.

  In the following step S216, the contents of the command and signal received from the payout control device 66 are confirmed, and a payout state receiving process for performing a process corresponding to the confirmation result is executed. In step S217, a payout output process for setting a prize ball command as an output target is executed. In the subsequent step S218, an external information setting process for controlling the start and end of the output of the external signal according to the processing results of the various processes executed in the current timer interrupt process is executed. Thereafter, the timer interrupt process is terminated.

<Distribution control device 70>
Next, the distribution control device 70 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 7, the distribution control device 70 executes the effects executed by the various display devices 41, 43, 44, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54 based on the command received from the MPU 62 of the main control device 60. Based on the control of the distribution control board 71 having the function of determining the contents, the distribution control board 71 and the effect control device 80 described later, to the various drive motors 45c, 45d, 46c, 46d, the display light emitting part 53 and the speaker part 54 And an output integrated substrate 72 having a function of collecting and outputting the drive signals.

  The distribution control board 71 includes an MPU 73. The MPU 73 includes a ROM 74 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 73 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 74 is executed. A RAM 75, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are incorporated.

  The ROM 74 is a storage means (that is, a non-volatile storage means) that can be randomly accessed when reading a control program or fixed value data and does not require external power supply for storage retention. Specifically, a NOR type cache memory is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the type of memory used as the ROM 74 is arbitrary as long as random access is possible. In addition, a configuration in which the control and calculation portion, the ROM 74, and the RAM 75 are integrated into one chip is not essential, and each function may be mounted as a separate chip, and some functions may be configured as separate chips. It is good also as a structure currently mounted.

  The MPU 73 is provided with an input port and an output port. A main controller 60 is connected to the input side of the MPU 73. An effect control device 80 is connected to the output side of the MPU 73 and an output integrated board 72 is connected. Incidentally, the electrical connection between the distribution control board 71 and the output integration board 72 is performed by the distribution side connector 76 a provided on the distribution control board 71 and the output integration side connector 76 b provided on the output integration board 72. Are connected without interposing a signal line. The electrical connection between the distribution side connector 76a and the output integration side connector 76b is made detachable.

  The output integrated board 72 includes a motor drive circuit 77 and a harness connector 78. The motor drive circuit 77 is based on the drive data output from the MPU 73 of the distribution control board 71, and includes a slide drive motor 45c and a rotary drive motor 45d for moving the first sub display device 43, and a second sub display device. 4 is a circuit for outputting a drive signal to a slide drive motor 46c and a rotation drive motor 46d for moving 44. The MPU 73 of the distribution control board 71 outputs drive data corresponding to each of the drive motors 45c, 45d, 46c, 46d to the motor drive circuit 77 at a timing corresponding to each. The motor drive circuit 77 is individually electrically connected to each of the drive motors 45c, 45d, 46c, 46d, and the drive motor 45c corresponding to the drive data received from the MPU 73 of the distribution control board 71. , 45d, 46c, 46d are individually driven and controlled.

  A harness connector 78 is provided so as to exist in the middle of an electrical path for outputting a signal from the motor drive circuit 77 to each of the drive motors 45c, 45d, 46c, 46d. Further, the harness connector 78 is provided on the effect control board 81 and an electrical path for outputting a signal from the light emission circuit 87 provided on the effect control board 81 of the effect control apparatus 80 to be described later to the display light emitting unit 53. It exists in the middle of the electrical path for outputting a signal from the sound output circuit 88 to the speaker unit 54. As already described, the drive motors 45c, 45d, 46c, 46d are mounted on the game board 21, and the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 are mounted on the front door frame 14. Signal lines for outputting signals to the drive motors 45c, 45d, 46c, 46d, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54 are all relayed by a relay board provided on the game board 21. In this case, each of these signal lines is provided as a harness in which one end is integrated into one connector member and the other end is integrated into one connector member. One end of the harness is electrically connected to the harness connector 78 of the output integrated board 72 in a detachable state, and the other end of the harness is detachable from the harness connector provided on the relay board. It is electrically connected in such a state.

  As will be described in detail later, light emission control of the display light emitting unit 53 and sound output control of the speaker unit 54 are performed by the effect control device 80. In this case, a signal line for outputting a signal to the display light emitting unit 53 and a signal line for outputting a signal to the speaker unit 54 are signal lines for outputting a signal to each of the drive motors 45c, 45d, 46c, and 46d. In addition, since the output is integrated on the output integrated board 72, it is necessary to remove the electrical connection between the drive motors 45c, 45d, 46c, and 46d, the display light emitting unit 53, the speaker unit 54, and the control device side during maintenance and the like. In this case, the work locations are collected on the output integrated board 72, and the workability can be improved.

  In addition, the signal lines for outputting signals to the drive motors 45c, 45d, 46c, 46d, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54 are integrated into one harness and provided at one end of the harness. The connector member is connected to the harness connector 78 of the output integrated board 72. In this case, by removing the harness from the harness connector 78, the electrical connection between the drive motors 45c, 45d, 46c, and 46d, the display light emitting unit 53, the speaker unit 54, and the control device side can be collectively released. This also makes it possible to improve workability during maintenance and the like.

  An electrical path for outputting a signal from the light emission circuit 87 to the display light emitting unit 53 and an electrical path for outputting a signal from the sound output circuit 88 to the speaker unit 54 are the electric paths formed on the distribution control board 71. The circuit and output integrated board 72 is connected to the harness connector 78 through an electric circuit, but the MPU 73 of the distribution control board 71 is not interposed in these electric paths. Accordingly, in the configuration in which the distribution control device 70 is interposed in the electrical path for outputting a signal to the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54, the light emitting circuit 87 and the sound output circuit are provided in the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54. It is possible to prevent the MPU 73 of the distribution control board 71 from intervening in the process for outputting a signal from the 88. The distribution control board 71 is formed with an electrical path for outputting a signal from the light emission circuit 87 to the display light emitting unit 53 and an electrical path for outputting a signal from the sound output circuit 88 to the speaker unit 54. The electric circuit may not be included.

  As described above, the distribution control device 70 is provided not only with the distribution control board 71 but also with the output integrated board 72. The distribution control board 71 and the output integrated board 72 are provided with the distribution side connector 76a and the output integration side connector. It is electrically connected in a detachable state using 76b. The output integrated board 72 is provided with a motor drive circuit 77 and a harness connector 78. Thereby, when it becomes necessary to make the presence / absence or increase / decrease in the number of drive motors 45c, 45d, 46c, 46d different among models, the drive motors 45c, 45d, 46c, 46d, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54, it is only necessary to change the configuration of the output integration board 72 between the models, and the configuration of the distribution control board 71 and the effect control device 80 is required. (Excluding programs and data structures) can be used as is between these models.

  Here, a process executed by the MPU 73 of the distribution control board 71 will be described. In the following description, for convenience of explanation, the MPU 62, ROM 63, and RAM 64 of the main controller 60 are referred to as the main MPU 62, main ROM 63, and main RAM 64, and the MPU 73, ROM 74, and RAM 75 of the distribution control board 71 are assigned to the distribution side. These are referred to as MPU 73, distribution ROM 74 and distribution RAM 75.

  FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing that is repeatedly executed by the distribution side MPU 73 at a relatively short cycle (for example, 4 msec).

  First, in step S301, a table setting process for setting a control table used for executing drive control of each drive motor 45c, 45d, 46c, 46d and control of the effect control device 80 is executed. In the table setting process, for example, a control pattern table for performing a process corresponding to a command received from the main MPU 62 is set. In the subsequent step S302, the contents of the display control of each display device 41, 43, 44, the contents of the light emission control of the display light emitting part 53, and the contents of the sound output control of the speaker part 54 are for the effect provided in the effect control device 80. A command selection process for instructing the CPU 82 is executed. In the command selection process, a command is output to the effect CPU 82 according to the control table read in the table setting process in step S301.

  Thereafter, in step S303, a movable object control process for performing drive control of each drive motor 45c, 45d, 46c, 46d is executed. In the movable object control process, drive control of each of the drive motors 45c, 45d, 46c, and 46d is executed in accordance with the control table read out in the table setting process in step S301. Thereafter, pointer update processing is executed in step S304. In the pointer update process, the pointer information in the current control table is updated to the next pointer information.

<Table setting process>
FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the table setting process executed in step S301 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11).

  When the variation command and the type command are received from the main MPU 62 (step S401: YES), a game result storing process is executed (step S402). Specifically, from the information included in the type command, specify which of the jackpot occurrence lottery and distribution lottery results determined by the main MPU 62 at the start of the current game round, and the identification The written information is written into the RAM 64.

  Thereafter, the notice lottery process is executed on condition that the change display time corresponding to the change command received this time from the main MPU 62 is the change display time corresponding to the possibility of occurrence of the notice effect (step S403: YES). (Step S404). In the notice lottery process, it is determined by lottery whether or not the display devices 41, 43, and 44 perform the notice effect in the current game round. As described above, as described above, in the situation where the symbols are variably displayed in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 after the symbol variation display is started on the main display device 41, or as part of the notice effect, In a situation where the symbols are variably displayed in a plurality of symbol rows, a character is displayed on any of the display devices 41, 43, 44 separately from the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The thing which makes a predetermined | prescribed aspect different from the aspect until now, and a thing which makes the background screen a predetermined aspect different from the aspect until then is also included. The notice effect may occur in any game time when the reach effect is performed or when the reach effect is not performed, but the case where the reach effect is performed is higher than the case where the reach effect is not performed. It is set to occur with probability. In addition, the notice effect is more likely to occur in game times corresponding to any of the jackpot results than in game times corresponding to the missed results, and the game times corresponding to the jackpot results have a lower appearance rate. Is set to be easy to occur.

  In the notice lottery process, the notice lottery table stored in advance in the distribution ROM 74 is read into the distribution RAM 75. The notice lottery table is prepared in a one-to-one correspondence with the combination of the variation command and the type command. Then, the value is obtained from the notice lottery counter provided so as to be periodically updated in the distribution side RAM 75, and the information on the notice lottery result corresponding to the obtained value is obtained from the notice lottery table read this time. Identify.

  When a negative determination is made in step S403, or when the process of step S404 is executed, the variable display time corresponding to the change command received this time from the main MPU 62 is the variable display time corresponding to the occurrence of the reach effect. (Step S405: YES), a reach effect lottery process is executed (Step S406). That is, when the game time variation display time determined by the main MPU 62 corresponds to the occurrence of the reach effect, the type of reach effect to be executed is determined in the reach effect lottery process, and the main MPU 62 When the variation display time of the game times determined in (1) does not correspond to the occurrence of the reach effect, the reach effect lottery process is not executed.

  As described above, in the reach production, the symbols are stopped and displayed for some of the plurality of symbol sequences displayed on the display surface of the main display device 41, so that the high-frequency winning mode can be generated. A display state is included in which a combination of reach symbols in which a combination of jackpot symbols is likely to be established is displayed, and in that state, a variation display of symbols is displayed in the remaining symbol rows. In addition, with the reach symbol combination displayed as described above, the symbol variation display is performed in the remaining symbol sequences, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background image or the sub display devices 43 and 44. In a case where a reach effect is performed or a combination of reach symbols is displayed in a reduced or non-displayed state, the display area of the main display device 41 and the display surfaces of the sub display devices 43 and 44 are substantially the same. The character that performs the reach effect by displaying the character or the like as a moving image is included. The reach production is more likely to occur in game times corresponding to any jackpot result than in game times corresponding to a miss result, and the game times corresponding to jackpot results have a lower reach rate. It is set so as to be easily generated.

  In the reach effect lottery process, the reach lottery table stored in advance in the distribution ROM 74 is read into the distribution RAM 75. The reach lottery table is prepared in a one-to-one correspondence with the combination of the variation command and the type command. Then, a value is obtained from a reach lottery counter provided so as to be periodically updated in the distribution-side RAM 75, and reach effect lottery result information corresponding to the obtained value is read this time. Identify from.

  If a negative determination is made in step S405, or if the process of step S406 is executed, a stop symbol determination process is executed (step S407). In the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of the current game round is either a normal jackpot result or a 15R probability variable jackpot result, it corresponds to a stop result in which the same symbol combination is established on one effective line L1 to L5. Information is determined as information of the current stop result. In this case, the same odd symbol combination is selected for the 15R probability variation jackpot result, while the same even symbol combination can be selected for both the normal jackpot result and the 15R probability variation jackpot result. Note that the effective lines L1 to L5 where the same symbol combination is stopped and displayed are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

  In the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of the current game round is an explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, it is a stop result in which the combination of the same symbols is not established on all the effective lines L1 to L5, and one effective line L1 Information corresponding to the stop result in which a specific symbol combination (“3 · 4 · 1”) is established on L5 is determined as information on the current stop result. In this case, the effective lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

  In the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of the current game round is an out-of-game result, the presence or absence of the reach effect is specified from the contents of the combination of the variation command and the type command. And when reach production occurs, it is a stop result in which the combination of the same symbol and the combination of the specific symbol are not established on all the effective lines L1 to L5, and on one or two effective lines L1 to L5 Information corresponding to a stop result in which a combination of reach symbols is established is determined as information on the current stop result. On the other hand, when the reach effect does not occur, it is a stop result in which the combination of the same symbols and the specific symbol combination are not established on all the effective lines L1 to L5, and the reach is achieved on all the effective lines L1 to L5. Information corresponding to the stop result in which the symbol combination is not established is determined as information on the current stop result.

  Thereafter, control pattern table setting processing is executed (step S408). In the setting process of the control pattern table, as a result of the notice lottery process (step S404), the presence / absence of the reach effect is generated, and when the reach effect occurs, the result of the reach effect lottery process (step S406) A control pattern table corresponding to the combination of the results of step S407) is read from the distribution-side ROM 74 and stored in the distribution-side RAM 75.

  Thereafter, the process for determining the variable display time is executed (step S409). In this processing, information on the fluctuation display time of the current game time is specified from the contents of the fluctuation command received this time from the main MPU 62, and the information on the specified fluctuation display time is provided in the distribution-side RAM 75. Set to the variable time counter. The variation time counter is a counter for specifying in the distribution side MPU 73 the timing at which the symbol variation display on the main display device 41 is terminated and the symbol fixed display is started in the current game round. The value set in the variable time counter is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is started in the distribution side MPU 73, that is, every 4 msec.

  In this situation, the execution control of the effect is performed according to the control pattern table set in step S408 (step S410: YES), and the value of the variation time counter in the distribution side RAM 75 set in step S409 is If it is “0” (step S411: YES), information on the fixed display time (specifically 0.5 sec) is set in the fixed time counter provided in the distribution side RAM 75 (step S412). The value set in the fixed time counter is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is started in the distribution side MPU 73, that is, every 4 msec. Thereafter, a confirmed display start command is transmitted to the effect CPU 82 (step S413). Thereby, in the CPU 82 for production, each symbol displayed on standby in the main display device 41 is confirmed and displayed as it is, and the state of the confirmed display is confirmed over a fixed display time (specifically, 0.5 sec). The display of the main display device 41 is controlled so as to be maintained.

  In the table setting process, in addition to the above processes, other processes are executed in step S414. In other processing, for example, when an opening command is received from the main MPU 62, a control pattern table for executing an effect for the opening / closing execution mode is read, and an ending command is received from the main MPU 62. Performs processing for ending the effect for the opening / closing execution mode. Further, in a situation where neither the effect for the game times nor the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is executed, the control pattern table for executing the demonstration display effect is read.

<Production control device 80>
Next, the production control device 80 will be described. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the effect control device 80.

  The effect control device 80 includes an effect CPU 82, a memory module 83, a work memory 84, an effect LSI 85, a VRAM 86, and a light emission circuit 87 and a sound output circuit 88 that have already been described. A substrate 81 is provided.

  The effect CPU 82 has a function as a main control unit in the effect control device 80, and reads, interprets, and executes a control program and the like. Specifically, the effect CPU 82 is electrically connected to the distribution side MPU 73, and various commands transmitted from the distribution side MPU 73 are input to the effect CPU 82. The production CPU 82 is electrically connected to the memory module 83 and the work memory 84 via the external bus 89, and based on the command received from the distribution side MPU 73, the program and various data stored in the memory module 83 are stored. Is transferred to the work memory 84. The effect CPU 82 is electrically connected to the effect LSI 85 via the external bus 89, and outputs an image signal to each display device 41, 43, 44 based on a command received from the distribution side MPU 73. A drawing instruction for causing the light emitting circuit 87 to output driving data for light emission, and a sound outputting instruction for causing the sound output circuit 88 to output driving data for sound output. In the main display device 41, a two-dimensional image (2D image) or a three-dimensional image (3D image) is displayed, and an image obtained by integrating the two-dimensional image and the three-dimensional image is displayed. Further, in each of the sub display devices 43 and 44, the three-dimensional image is not displayed, and only the two-dimensional image is displayed.

  The work memory 84 is storage means for temporarily storing the control data read and transferred from the memory module 83 and temporarily storing flags and the like. The work memory 84 includes a volatile semiconductor memory that requires external power supply for storage and retention, and in detail, a DRAM is used as the semiconductor memory. However, it is not limited to DRAM, and other RAM such as SRAM may be used. The work memory 84 is faster than the memory module 83 in reading data. Note that the storage capacity is 1 Gbit, but such a storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the effect control device 80 is executed satisfactorily. The work memory 84 is used for both reading and writing when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

  Based on a data transfer instruction from the effect CPU 82 to the memory module 83, control data is transferred from the memory module 83 to the work memory 84. Specifically, all control data such as programs and data used by the effect CPU 82 are read to the work memory 84 when the supply of operating power to the effect CPU 82 is started. Then, the production CPU 82 reads the control data transferred to the work memory 84 into an internal memory area (register group) as necessary, and executes various processes.

  The memory module 83 stores control data including a control program and fixed value data in advance, and stores various image data for displaying images on the display devices 41, 43, and 44 in advance. The memory module 83 includes a non-volatile semiconductor memory that does not require external power supply for storage. Incidentally, although the storage capacity is 4 Gbits, this storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the effect control device 80 is executed satisfactorily. Further, the memory module 83 is used as a non-write and read-only memory (ROM) when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

  Various image data stored in the memory module 83 includes image data for 2D images such as sprite data such as symbols and characters displayed on the display devices 41, 43, and 44, background data, and moving image data. include. The various image data stored in the memory module 83 includes image data for 3D images such as object data such as characters displayed on the main display device 41 and texture data pasted on the object data. It is.

  Here, each sprite data includes at least a combination of bitmap format data that defines the outline and pattern of the character and a color palette table that is referred to when determining the display color at each pixel of the bitmap image. Yes. The background data is stored and held as JPEG format data in a state where still image data is compressed. The moving image data will be described in detail later.

  The object data is a three-dimensional virtual object arranged in a world coordinate system, which is a three-dimensional coordinate system corresponding to a virtual three-dimensional space, and is three-dimensional information composed of a plurality of polygons. A polygon is a polygonal plane defined by vertices of a plurality of three-dimensional coordinates. In order to apply, for example, a surface model to the object data, vertex coordinate information of each polygon is set with reference coordinates preset for each object data as the origin. That is, in each object data, the relative position (that is, direction and size) of each polygon is three-dimensionally defined in a self-contained local coordinate system.

  Texture data is image data that is pasted on each polygon of object data. By pasting texture data on object data, an image corresponding to the object data, for example, a display image including a pattern or a character is generated. The The texture data can be held in any manner, but includes at least a combination of, for example, bitmap format data and color palette data referred to when determining the display color at each pixel of the bitmap image.

  In addition to the control data and the various image data used by the effect CPU 82, the memory module 83 uses light emission data for causing the display light emitting unit 53 to emit light in a predetermined pattern and a predetermined amount from the speaker unit 54. Sound output data for sound output is stored in advance. The data for light emission is data in a state where luminance data corresponding to a time-series lighting pattern is compressed by a predetermined compression technique, and is read from the memory module 83 when light emission control is executed in the effect LSI 85. Decoding processing is performed on the light emission data, and data developed by the decoding processing is used. The sound output data is data in a state where sound data corresponding to a time-series sound output pattern is compressed by a predetermined compression technique, and is read from the memory module 83 when the sound output control is executed in the production LSI 85. Decoding processing is performed on the output sound output data, and data developed by the decoding processing is used.

  The VRAM 86 outputs various data necessary for causing the display light emitting unit 53 to emit light in a predetermined pattern, various data necessary for outputting sound from the speaker unit 54, and image output to the display devices 41, 43, and 44. This is a storage means for temporarily storing various data necessary for this purpose. The VRAM 86 includes a volatile semiconductor memory that requires external power supply for storage and holding, and in detail, an SDRAM is used as the semiconductor memory. However, it is not limited to SDRAM, and other RAM such as DRAM, SRAM or dual port RAM may be used. The VRAM 86 is faster than the memory module 83 in reading data. The storage capacity is 2 Gbits, but such a storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the effect control device 80 is executed well. The VRAM 86 is used for both reading and writing when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

  The effect LSI 85 is based on a drawing instruction from the effect CPU 82, based on a function for drawing on each display device 41, 43, 44 using the image data read to the VRAM 86, and a light emission instruction from the effect CPU 82. Based on the function of performing the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 53 using the data read into the effect LSI 85 and developed by the decoding process, and the sound output instruction from the effect CPU 82, the data is read into the effect LSI 85. It has a function of performing sound output control of the speaker unit 54 using the data that has been output and developed by the decoding process.

  Specifically, the effect LSI 85 includes an I / F 91, a transfer controller 92, a register 93, a pre-transfer control unit 94, a moving picture decoder 95, a 2D control unit 96, a 3D control unit 97, and a first display. A circuit 98, a second display circuit 99, a light emission decoder 101, a light emission control unit 102, a sound decoder 103, and a sound output control unit 104 are provided. These circuits 91 to 104 are connected to each other via an internal bus 105, and the internal bus 105 is connected to an external bus 89 via an I / F 91.

  The transfer controller 92 executes data transfer based on transfer instructions from the advance transfer control unit 94, 2D control unit 96, 3D control unit 97, light emission control unit 102, and sound output control unit 104. Specifically, data transfer from the memory module 83 to the register 93 of the effect LSI 85 and data transfer from the memory module 83 to the VRAM 86 are executed. Also, data reading from the VRAM 86 is executed. Note that the register 93 is faster than the memory module 83 in reading data.

  The pre-transfer control unit 94 is image data required when the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97 create drawing data for one frame based on the drawing list transmitted from the effect CPU 82 and stored in the register 93. However, a transfer instruction is given to the transfer controller 92 so that it is read out to the VRAM 86 before the drawing process is executed. As a result, the image data necessary for executing drawing in the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97 is read in the VRAM 86 in advance.

  The moving picture decoder 95 executes a decoding process on the moving image data transferred to the VRAM 86. Although details will be described later, a plurality of decoded image data (2D still image data) are created by executing decoding processing on the moving image data, and the plurality of decoded image data are developed in the register 93. . The decoded image data developed in the register 93 is used when the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97 execute drawing processing.

  The 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97 execute processing by the control program according to the drawing list transmitted from the effect CPU 82 and stored in the register 93. Note that all the control programs for operating the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97 may be provided by the drawing list. A memory in which the control program is stored in advance is built in the rendering LSI 85, and the control program Further, the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97 may execute a predetermined process depending on the contents of the drawing list. Alternatively, the control program may be read from the memory module 83 in advance.

  When drawing processing is executed in the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97, drawing data for one frame is created in the VRAM 86 by using (or processing) the image data read out to the VRAM 86. The drawing data for one frame is data necessary for displaying an image at one update timing in a configuration in which an image on the display surface of each display device 41, 43, 44 is updated at a predetermined update timing. I mean. As will be described in detail later, the VRAM 86 is provided with two frame regions for the main display device 41 and the sub display devices 43 and 44 as regions for creating drawing data for one frame. Each frame area is set to a capacity capable of storing drawing data for one frame in the corresponding display device 41, 43, 44. Specifically, each frame region includes a large number of unit areas corresponding to dots (pixels) of the display devices 41, 43, and 44 at a predetermined magnification. Each unit area has a storage capacity capable of storing data for specifying which color to display. More specifically, a full color method is employed, and 256 colors can be set for each of R (red), G (green), and B (blue) in each dot. Corresponding to this, in each unit area, 1 byte (8 bits) is assigned to each RGB color. That is, each unit area has a storage capacity of at least 3 bytes. Note that the present invention is not limited to the full-color method, and for example, in a configuration that can display only 256 colors in each dot, the storage capacity required to store color information in each unit area may be 1 byte.

  Incidentally, the 3D control unit 97 includes a geometry calculation unit and a rendering unit. Based on the drawing list stored in the register 93, the geometry calculation unit arranges the object data specified as the arrangement target in the world coordinate system. The geometry calculation unit executes various coordinate conversion processes when and after the object data is arranged in the world coordinate system. Then, the object is clipped so as to finally correspond to the three-dimensional space corresponding to the screen coordinates of the display surface. The rendering unit creates two-dimensional data by projecting each object data onto a predetermined two-dimensional plane based on the drawing list stored in the register 93, and pastes the texture data to create two-dimensional data. Drawing data for one frame is created.

  Since two frame regions are provided for each of the main display device 41 and the sub display devices 43 and 44, for example, the drawing data created in one frame region for the main display device 41 is used. In a situation where drawing on the main display device 41 is being executed, drawing data to be used in the future is created in the other frame area of the main display device 41. That is, the double buffer method is adopted as the frame area.

  The first display circuit 98 generates an image signal corresponding to each dot of the main display device 41 based on the drawing data created in one frame region to be output among the two frame regions corresponding to the main display device 41. And the image signal is output to the main display device 41. Specifically, the drawing data is transferred from the frame area to be output to the first display circuit 98. The transferred drawing data is converted into gradation data by adjusting the resolution by a scaler (not shown) so as to correspond to the resolution of the main display device 41. Based on the gradation data, an image signal corresponding to each dot of the main display device 41 is generated and output.

  The second display circuit 99 is configured to display each of the sub display devices 43 and 44 based on the drawing data created in one frame region to be output among the two frame regions corresponding to the sub display devices 43 and 44. An image signal corresponding to the dot is generated, and the image signal is output to each of the sub display devices 43 and 44. Specifically, drawing data is transferred from the frame area to be output to the second display circuit 99. The transferred image data is converted into gradation data by adjusting the resolution by a scaler (not shown) so as to correspond to the resolution of the sub display devices 43 and 44. Based on the tone data, an image signal corresponding to each dot of the sub display devices 43 and 44 is generated and output.

  The light emission decoder 101 is based on the light emission instruction from the effect CPU 82 until the light emission data necessary for executing the light emission control at a predetermined timing in the light emission control unit 102 is the timing for executing the light emission control. The transfer controller 92 is instructed to transfer as read into the VRAM 86. The light emission decoder 101 reads out the light emission data transferred in advance to the VRAM 86 and executes decoding processing on the light emission data to create expanded luminance data, and the generated luminance data after expansion. Is stored in the register 93. Accordingly, the luminance data after the development of the light emission data is stored in the register 93 until the predetermined timing is reached.

  The light emission control unit 102 outputs the luminance data developed in the register 93 to the light emission circuit 87 based on the light emission instruction from the effect CPU 82. As a result, a signal according to the luminance data is output from the light emission circuit 87, and the display light emitting unit 53 enters a light emitting state in a manner according to the luminance data.

  Based on the sound output instruction from the production CPU 82, the sound decoder 103 executes sound output control for sound output data required when the sound output control unit 104 executes sound output control at a predetermined timing. A transfer instruction is issued to the transfer controller 92 so that it is read to the VRAM 86 before the timing comes. Further, the sound decoder 103 reads out the sound output data transferred in advance to the VRAM 86 and executes decoding processing on the sound output data to generate expanded sound data. The generated expanded sound data Is stored in the register 93. Thus, the sound data after the development of the sound output data is stored in the register 93 until the predetermined timing is reached.

  The sound output control unit 104 outputs the sound data developed in the register 93 to the sound output circuit 88 based on the sound output instruction from the effect CPU 82. Thereby, a signal according to the sound data is output from the sound output circuit 88, and a sound is output from the speaker unit 54 in a manner according to the sound data.

<Processing Configuration of Production CPU 82>
Next, processing executed by the effect CPU 82 will be described. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process that is repeatedly started by the effect CPU 82 at a predetermined cycle, specifically, at a cycle of 20 msec.

  When the first display circuit 98 outputs an image signal for one frame to the main display device 41, the first display circuit 98 starts outputting the image signal from a dot at the upper left corner of the display surface, and includes the horizontal dot including the dot at one end. Image signals are sequentially output to the dots arranged on the line, and image signals are output from the left to the right dot in order from the top for each horizontal line. Then, an image signal is finally output for the dots in the lower right corner of the display surface. In addition, when the second display circuit 99 outputs an image signal for one frame to the sub display devices 43 and 44, output of the image signal is started from the dot at the upper left corner of each display surface, and the dot is temporarily displayed. The image signal is sequentially output to the dots arranged on the horizontal line included in the image, and the image signal is output from the left to the right dot in order from the top for each horizontal line. Then, an image signal is finally output for the dots in the lower right corner of the display surface. In this case, the rendering LSI 85 outputs a V interrupt signal to the rendering CPU 82 at the timing when the image signal is output to the last dot for each of the display devices 41, 43, 44, and updates the image of one frame. Is made to be recognized by the effect CPU 82. The output cycle of this V interrupt signal is 20 msec, which is the same as the update cycle of an image for one frame. In this regard, the V interrupt processing can be regarded as being started in synchronization with reception of the V interrupt signal. However, even if the V interrupt signal is not received, the V interrupt process is newly started when 20 msec has elapsed since the previous V interrupt process was started.

  In the V interrupt processing, first, command analysis processing is executed (step S501). Specifically, the contents of the command stored in the command buffer provided in the work memory 84 are analyzed. Here, when the staging CPU 82 receives the strobe signal from the distribution side MPU 73, the effect CPU 82 executes the command interruption process regardless of the process being executed at that time. In the command interruption process, the command received from the distribution side MPU 73 is transferred to the command buffer of the work memory 84.

  Thereafter, on the condition that the result of the command analysis process corresponds to the result of receiving the new command (step S502: YES), the command response process is executed (step S503). In the command handling process, an execution target table for executing a program corresponding to the received command is read from the memory module 83. As an execution target table, a table for executing display control of each display device 41, 43, 44, a table for executing light emission control of the display light emitting unit 53, and sound output control of the speaker unit 54 are executed. And a table for exist. In the execution target table for display control, when a moving image corresponding to the received command is displayed on the display surface of each display device 41, 43, 44, an image for one frame at each update timing of the image is displayed. The contents of the necessary processing are defined. In the execution target table for light emission control, when the display light emission unit 53 performs light emission according to the light emission pattern corresponding to the received command, the content of processing necessary for causing light emission at each light emission control timing is determined. ing. The execution target table for sound output control is necessary to output sound at each sound output control timing when the speaker unit 54 executes sound output by a sound output pattern corresponding to the received command. The details of processing are defined.

  The commands received by the production CPU 82 from the distribution side MPU 73 include a command at the start of fluctuation, a command at the start of the notice production, a command at the start of normal reach, a command at the start of super reach, a confirmation display start command, a notification start command, and There are notification release commands and the like. When these commands are received, the execution target table necessary for executing the effects or notifications corresponding to the commands on the display devices 41, 43, 44, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54 is read out.

  If a negative determination is made in step S502 or if the process of step S503 is executed, the task process for light emission control (step S504), the task process for sound output control (step S505), and the task process for display control (steps) S506) is executed.

  In the task process for light emission control, an effect is provided to realize the light emission mode corresponding to the current instruction timing by referring to the control data of the current processing time in the execution target table set as the target of light emission control. Various data necessary for issuing a light emission instruction to the LSI 85 are set. Specifically, as the various data, if this time is the timing to instruct execution of the decoding process of the light emission data, the address information of the area where the light emission data is stored in the memory module 83, and the register 93 There are address information of the area for transferring the light emission data, information for instructing the light emission decoder 101 to decode the light emission data, and the like. If this time is the timing for instructing the change of the light emission mode of the display light emitting unit 53, the various data are areas in which the data to be used among the light emission data developed in the register 93 is stored. Address information etc. exists.

  In the task processing for sound output control, the sound output mode corresponding to the current instruction timing is realized by referring to the control data of the current processing times in the execution target table set as the target of sound output control. Therefore, various data necessary for giving a sound output instruction to the effect LSI 85 are set. Specifically, as the various data, when this time is the timing for instructing execution of the decoding process of the sound output data, the address information of the area where the sound output data is stored in the memory module 83, the register 93 Address information of the area to which the sound output data is transferred, information for instructing the sound decoder 103 to decode the sound output data, and the like. In addition, when this time is the timing for instructing the change of the sound output mode of the speaker unit 54, the data to be used is stored in the various data as the sound output data developed in the register 93. Area address information etc. exist.

  In the task process for display control, an image for one frame corresponding to the current instruction timing is displayed by referring to the control data of the current processing time in the execution target table set as a display control use target. Therefore, various data necessary for instructing rendering to the rendering LSI 85 are set. Specifically, as the various data, address information of the area where the image data to be controlled is stored in the memory module 83, information on the frame area to which drawing data should be created using the image data to be controlled, control Information on coordinates when writing target image data, information on scales when writing the image data, information on uniform α values (translucent values) when writing the image data, and the like exist.

  Thereafter, list output processing is executed (step S507). In the list output process, the light emission list for setting the light emission mode corresponding to the instruction timing of the current processing time, the sound output list for setting the sound output mode corresponding to the instruction timing of the current processing time, and the current processing time Each drawing list for displaying an image of one frame corresponding to the instruction timing is created, and the created various lists are transmitted to the effect LSI 85. In this case, in the light emission list, the light emission data obtained in the immediately previous light emission control task process is set as the use target. The light emission decoder 101 of the effect LSI 85 executes the light emission data decoding process according to the light emission list, and the light emission control unit 102 of the effect LSI 85 outputs the light emission data to the light emission circuit 87 according to the light emission list. Also, in the sound output list, the data for sound output obtained by the task processing for the sound output control immediately before is set as the use target. The sound decoder 103 of the effect LSI 85 executes sound output data decoding processing according to the sound output list, and the sound output control unit 104 of the effect LSI 85 performs sound output to the sound output circuit 88 according to the sound output list. Output data. In the drawing list, the image data grasped in the immediately preceding display control task process is set as a drawing target, and the parameter information updated in the task process is set together. The 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97 of the effect LSI 85 create drawing data in the frame area of the VRAM 86 according to the drawing list. The processing in the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97 will be described in detail later.

  The task process for display control in step S506 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, a setting process for starting control is executed (step S601). In the setting process for starting control, based on the display control execution target table that is currently set, a process for setting an individual image for newly starting control (calculation) in the rendering CPU 82 in the current processing time Execute. An individual image is defined by one 2D image defined by still image data such as design image data and back image data, or a combination of object image data and texture image data. This is a 3D image.

  Specifically, for the control start setting process, first, based on the display control execution target table that is currently set, it is determined whether or not there is an individual image that will be the control start target in the current processing round. To do. If it exists, a search is made in the work memory 84 for an empty buffer area for performing various calculations in controlling the individual image, and the individual image that is grasped as a control start target is one-to-one. Reserve a free buffer area to support this. Further, initialization processing is executed for all the reserved empty buffer areas, and parameter information for starting control according to the individual image is set for the initialized empty buffer areas.

  Thereafter, the control update target is grasped (step S602). This control update target is an individual image for which the setting process for starting control has been completed, and an individual image that may be included in an image for one frame after the current processing time.

  Thereafter, a background calculation process is executed (step S603). In the background calculation process, if the image is the backmost image that constitutes the background image or the 2D image of the background character, the coordinates, rotation angle, scale, and uniform α value in the virtual two-dimensional plane are used. In addition, various parameter information necessary for creating a drawing list such as α data designation is calculated and derived. On the other hand, in the background calculation processing, if the image is the backmost image that constitutes the background image or the 3D image of the background character, the coordinates, rotation angle, scale, brightness and darkness in the world coordinate system are used. A process for calculating and deriving various parameters necessary for creating a drawing list, such as information on a light for attaching a light, information on a camera for performing projection, and Z test designation, is executed.

  Thereafter, the effect calculation process is executed (step S604). In the effect calculation process, a process for calculating and deriving the above-mentioned various parameters is executed for individual images to be displayed in various effects such as a reach effect, a notice effect, and a jackpot effect. Moreover, the process which calculates and derives the said various parameters is performed about the separate image used as a display object when performing various alerting | reporting.

  Thereafter, a symbol calculation process is executed (step S605). In the symbol computation process, the current control update target is grasped from symbols subject to variable display in each game round. Further, the various parameter information is derived for the grasped control update target.

  Incidentally, in each process of step S603 to step S605, a process for updating the control start parameter set in step S601 is executed. Further, in each process of step S603 to step S605, animation data set so as to change various parameters of the individual image according to a specific pattern every time the image update timing is reached is used. This animation data is determined according to the type of individual image. The animation data is stored in advance in the memory module 83, and is transferred in advance to the work memory 84 until it is necessary to read it out in the effect CPU 82.

  Thereafter, a drawing instruction target grasping process is executed (step S606). In the drawing instruction target grasping process, among the individual images that have been controlled and updated by the calculation processes in steps S603, S604, and S605, an image for one frame corresponding to the current drawing data creation instruction is obtained. Processing for grasping individual images included is executed. The grasp is performed by executing a predetermined calculation with reference to information on coordinates, rotation angles, and scales of various individual images. The individual image grasped here is set as a drawing target in the drawing list. In this way, the individual images specified in the drawing list are not all the individual images that have been started, but only the individual images to be displayed, so that the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97 can display the individual images. There is no need to select individual images, and even if the individual images are not selected, there is no need to perform drawing processing for individual images that are not to be displayed. Thereby, the processing load of the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97 is reduced. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the individual image to be controlled by the rendering CPU 82 and the individual image to be controlled by the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97 may be the same. In this case, it is not necessary to execute the process of step S606.

  The contents for displaying the 2D image and the 3D image using a drawing list created based on the result of the task process for display control will be described.

  When an image is displayed on the main display device 41, a background image is displayed so that the player can recognize that it is displayed on the back side, and when a predetermined display effect occurs, an effect is displayed in front of the background image. An effect image such as a character for a game is displayed, and in the case of an effect for game play, a symbol image is displayed so that the player can recognize that the effect is displayed in front of the background image and the effect image. . In this case, the background image and the effect image are displayed as a 3D image based on the execution of the drawing process by the 3D control unit 97, and the design image is displayed as a 2D image based on the execution of the drawing process by the 2D control unit 96. Therefore, as a drawing list for displaying an image on the main display device 41, a drawing instruction is given by a 3D drawing list for displaying a 3D image for the background image and the effect image, and a 2D image is displayed for the design image. A drawing instruction is given by a 2D drawing list for display. As a display of images on the main display device 41, a 3D image can be displayed for a background image and an effect image, and a realistic image display can be performed, while a 2D image can be displayed for a design image to reduce the processing load. Is possible. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a 3D image may be displayed for the background image, a 2D image may be displayed for the effect image and the design image, and a 3D image may be displayed for the background image and the design image. The 2D image may be displayed for the effect image, the 2D image may be displayed for the background image and the effect image, and the 3D image may be displayed for the symbol image.

  FIG. 16 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various areas of the register 93 that are used when the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97 execute drawing processing. As shown in FIG. 16, the register 93 is provided with a drawing area 111 for main display as an area used for displaying an image on the main display device 41. In the drawing area 111 for main display, a 2D drawing area 112 in which drawing data for displaying a symbol image as a 2D image on the main display device 41 is created, and a background image and an effect image as a 3D image on the main display device 41 are displayed. And a 3D drawing area 113 in which drawing data for displaying is generated. The main display drawing area 111 is provided with a main first frame area 114 and a main second frame area 115. In each of the main first frame area 114 and the main second frame area 115, the main display device is configured by combining the drawing data created in the 2D drawing area 112 and the drawing data created in the 3D drawing area 113. Drawing data for one frame to be displayed on 41 is created. In this case, in the situation where drawing on the main display device 41 is executed using drawing data created in one of the main first frame area 114 and the main second frame area 115, the other Drawing data to be used in the future is created for the frame area.

  On the other hand, when an image is displayed on the first sub display device 43 and the second sub display device 44, a background image is displayed so that the player can recognize that it is displayed on the back side, and a predetermined display effect is provided. When it occurs, an effect image such as an effect character is displayed in front of the background image. In this case, these background images and effect images are displayed as 2D images. That is, although the 2D image is displayed on the first sub display device 43 and the second sub display device 44, the 3D image is not displayed. Therefore, with respect to the first sub display device 43 and the second sub display device 44, the drawing instruction by the 3D drawing list is not performed, and the drawing instruction by the 2D drawing list is performed. In the display of the images on each of the sub display devices 43 and 44, not only the main display device 41 but also each of the sub display devices 43 and 44 is provided by using only the 2D image without using the 3D image. In the configuration, it is possible to reduce a processing load for displaying an image on each of the sub display devices 43 and 44.

  As shown in FIG. 16, the register 93 is provided with a drawing area 116 for sub display as an area used for displaying images on the first sub display device 43 and the second sub display device 44. The sub display drawing area 116 is provided with a sub first frame area 117 and a sub second frame area 118. In each of the sub first frame area 117 and the sub second frame area 118, drawing data for displaying the background image and the effect image as the 2D images on the sub display devices 43 and 44 by the 2D control unit 96 is created. Is done. Although details will be described later, in each of the sub first frame region 117 and the sub second frame region 118, drawing data for displaying an image for one frame on the first sub display device 43 and second data are displayed. Drawing data corresponding to the total of the drawing data for displaying an image for one frame on the sub display device 44 is created. In this case, drawing on the first sub display device 43 and the second sub display device 44 is performed using the drawing data created in one of the sub first frame region 117 and the sub second frame region 118. In the current situation, drawing data to be used in the future is created for the other frame area.

  As described above, both a 2D image and a 3D image can be simultaneously displayed as an image for one frame on the main display device 41, and a 2D image is displayed as an image for one frame on each of the sub display devices 43 and 44. The image for one frame is updated in each of the main display device 41 and each of the sub display devices 43 and 44 each time the image update timing for one frame is reached, and the image for each frame at the image update timing is updated. In order to update, a combination of at least one 2D drawing list and at least one 3D drawing list is provided from the effect CPU 82 to the effect LSI 85. In other words, the display processing by the 2D control unit 96 for at least one 2D drawing list and the drawing processing by the 3D control unit 97 for at least one 3D drawing list are completed, whereby each display device 41, 43, 44 is completed. The creation of image drawing data for one frame at is completed.

  Next, a 2D drawing list for displaying a 2D image will be described with reference to the explanatory diagrams of FIGS. 17 (a) to 17 (c).

  Header information is set in the 2D drawing list. In the header information, information on the target buffer, which is information indicating in which frame region 114, 115, 117, 118 the drawing data for displaying the image corresponding to the 2D drawing list is drawn is set. Yes. Specifically, information indicating which drawing data for displaying an image on the main display device 41 is to be drawn in the main first frame area 114 or the main second frame area 115 is set. Information indicating whether drawing data for displaying an image on each of the sub display devices 43 and 44 is to be drawn in the sub first frame area 117 or the sub second frame area 118 is set. Various designation information is set in the header information.

  In the 2D drawing list, in addition to the header information, as information corresponding to a plurality of types of image data used for displaying an image for one frame, the frame regions 114, 115, 117, and 118 of each image data are used. The display order priority data information indicating the rendering order, the parameter information of each image data, and the address information corresponding to the address of the area where each image data is stored are set. Specifically, the display order priority data information is set so as to be sequential numerical information, and a combination of parameter information and address information is set in a one-to-one correspondence with each numerical information. .

  The display order priority data is set so as to be a drawing target first from an individual image to be displayed so as to be positioned on the back side of the display surface in an image of one frame. The individual image refers to one still image defined by still image data such as background data and one sprite defined by sprite data such as symbol sprite data. In the 2D drawing list of FIG. 17A, the background data is set as the first drawing target, the sprite data A is set as the second, the sprite data B is set as the third, and so on. Accordingly, the background data is first written in the drawing target frame area, and then the sprite data A is written so as to overlap the background data, and further the sprite data B is written.

  A plurality of types of parameters are set in the parameter information P (0), P (1), P (2),. Specifically, the background data parameter P (0) indicates the position on the virtual two-dimensional plane (frame regions 114, 115, 117, 118) when the background data is written, as shown in FIG. For the coordinate information, the rotation angle information indicating the rotation angle on the virtual two-dimensional plane when writing the background data, and the size set as the initial state of the background data, the magnification for writing in the frame area is Information on the scale to be shown, information on the uniform α value indicating the entire transmission information (or transparency information) in the case of writing the background data, and information on α data designation indicating whether or not the α data is applied and the application target are set. Yes. The types of parameters are the same for sprite data A as shown in FIG.

  The coordinate information is not individually set for all the pixels constituting the image data, but one coordinate information is set for one image data. Specifically, one pixel at the center of the image data is set as a reference pixel for specifying coordinate information. The 2D control unit 96 can recognize that the designated coordinate information is one pixel at the center of the image data, and when the image data is arranged, the one pixel at the center is on the designated coordinates. Like that. Thereby, the information capacity (that is, the data amount) of the coordinate information to be designated for one image data in the effect CPU 82 can be suppressed. Further, since it is not necessary for the rendering LSI 85 to be able to recognize the coordinates of all the pixels of the image data, the program can be simplified.

  Incidentally, the reference pixel is not limited to the central pixel, and may be a corner pixel such as upper left or upper right. Since the sprite data and the still image data are basically defined as a rectangular shape, the reference pixel is easily recognized by the rendering LSI 85 by using the corner pixel as the reference pixel.

  The uniform α value is transmission information applied to all pixels of one image data, and is numerical information derived as a calculation result in the effect CPU 82. The uniform α value is uniformly applied to all the pixels of the image data. On the other hand, the α data is transmission information applied in units of pixels of background data and sprite data, and is stored in advance in the memory module 83 as image data. The alpha data can have different transmission information for each pixel within the range of the same background data or the same sprite data. The α data has a larger data capacity than program data for setting a uniform α value.

  In the address information A (0), A (1), A (2),..., Information corresponding to the address of the area where each image data is stored is set. Here, when each image data is used in the effect LSI 85, the image data is not directly read from the memory module 83 and used, but is provided from the memory module 83 to the VRAM 86 until the use start timing of the image data comes. The image data is read out from the advance transfer area 86a (see FIG. 13) and image data is read out from the advance transfer area 86a and used. In this case, in the 2D drawing list output from the effect CPU 82 to the effect LSI 85, address information is stored in the memory module 83 as address information except for decoded image data created by executing decoding processing on moving image data. The address ID information corresponding to the address of the area where each image data is stored is set. When image data is transferred from the address area of the memory module 83 corresponding to the address ID information to the advance transfer area 86a in the advance transfer control unit 94 of the effect LSI 85, the advance transfer area 86a The information corresponding to the address of the area where the image data has been transferred is overwritten with the address information corresponding to the image data to be read this time in the 2D drawing list.

  On the other hand, since the decoded image data is written in the moving image development area 119 (see FIG. 16) provided in the register 93, reading from the memory module 83 is not required. Therefore, when the decoded image data is set in the 2D drawing list, the address information corresponding to the decoded image data is stored in the area where the decoded image data to be used this time is stored in the moving image development area 119. An address is set. Since the decoded image data is handled as not subject to transfer to the pre-transfer area 86a in the pre-transfer control unit 94, rewriting of the address information corresponding to the decoded image data in the drawing list by the pre-transfer control unit 94 is not executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the address information corresponding to the decoded image data is initially blank, and the address information is stored in the advance transfer area 94 and the decoded image data in the moving image development area 119. The information for specifying the address of the area in which is stored may be set.

  The 2D drawing list in which the address information has been rewritten is subjected to drawing processing in the 2D control unit 96, but the 2D control unit 96 is set as address information in the 2D drawing list during the drawing processing. The image data is read out from the pre-transfer area 86a or the moving image development area 119 corresponding to. Incidentally, moving image data can be set as image data to be used in the 2D drawing list, but when moving image data is set, the moving image data is first read from the memory module 83 to the pre-transfer area 86a. Decoding processing by the moving image decoder 95 of the effect LSI 85 is performed on the moving image data that has been output and read to the advance transfer area 86a. A plurality of decoded image data obtained by the decoding processing is stored in the moving image development area 119 as described above. However, the moving image data itself is excluded from the execution target of the drawing process by the 2D control unit 96.

  Thus, in the 2D drawing list output from the effect CPU 82 to the effect LSI 85, address ID information corresponding to the address of the area in which each image data is stored in the memory module 83 is set as address information. On the other hand, the address information for specifying the transfer destination area of the image data from the memory module 83 is not set. As a result, the amount of information in the 2D drawing list output from the effect CPU 82 can be suppressed. In addition, since it is not necessary for the rendering CPU 82 to set address information for specifying the area of the pre-transfer area 86a to which the image data is transferred in the 2D rendering list, the rendering CPU 82 creates the 2D rendering list. The processing load on the CPU 82 can be reduced.

  When the transfer of the image data from the memory module 83 to the pre-transfer area 86a in the pre-transfer control unit 94 of the effect LSI 85 is completed, the address information of the 2D drawing list is stored in the memory module 83 as the image data to be transferred. Is rewritten into information corresponding to the address of the area to which the image data to be transferred is transferred in the pre-transfer area 86a. As a result, even when information corresponding to the address of the area of the pre-transfer area 86a to which the image data is transferred is not initially set in the 2D drawing list, the 2D control unit 96 executes the drawing process in advance. Information corresponding to the address of the area of the transfer area 86a is set in the 2D drawing list.

  Next, a 3D drawing list for displaying a 3D image will be described with reference to the explanatory diagrams of FIGS. 18A and 18B.

  Header information is set in the 3D drawing list in the same manner as the 2D drawing list. The contents of the header information are the same as in the 2D drawing list. In the 3D drawing list, in addition to the header information, information corresponding to a plurality of types of image data to be arranged in the world coordinate system when creating the current drawing data is stored in the world coordinate system. Information of display order priority data indicating the arrangement order, parameter information of each image data, and address information corresponding to the address of the area in which each image data is stored are set. Specifically, the display order priority data information is set so as to be sequential numerical information, and a combination of parameter information and address information is set in a one-to-one correspondence with each numerical information. .

  In the 3D drawing list of FIG. 18A, the back side image data is set as the first drawing target, the background object A is set as the second, the background object B is set as the third, and so on. Has been. Also, as the order after the background image data, the effect image data is set, for example, the effect object A is set as mth, the effect object B is set as m + 1, and so on. Yes.

  In the parameter information P ′ (0), P ′ (1), P ′ (2),..., P ′ (m), P ′ (m + 1),. ing. Specifically, the parameter information P ′ (0) of the image data for the back side, as shown in FIG. 18B, information on coordinates indicating the position in the world coordinate system when the image data for the back side is set. (X value information, Y value information, Z value information), rotation angle information indicating a rotation angle in the world coordinate system when setting image data for the back surface, and initial image data for the back surface Uniform α indicating the scale information indicating the magnification when setting in the world coordinate system with respect to the scale set as the state and the entire transmission information (or transparent information) when setting the image data for the back side Value information is set.

  Here, the coordinate information is individually set for all vertices of the object data. The coordinate information is set for the object data, but is not set for the texture data. In the texture data, the coordinate value of each pixel is predetermined in association with each vertex of the object data. This coordinate value is a UV coordinate value different from the coordinate value in the world coordinate system, and is stored in the memory module 83 in a state of being attached to a combination of object data and texture data. This UV coordinate value is referred to by the 3D control unit 97 of the effect LSI 85 when texture mapping is performed.

  The parameter information P ′ (0) includes camera information including information on the coordinates and orientation of the virtual camera and image data for the back when the image data for the back is projected on the virtual two-dimensional plane for drawing. Light information including information on the position and orientation of a virtual light source that determines a shadow in the case of rendering is set.

  In the parameter information P ′ (0), Z test designation information indicating whether or not to apply the Z buffer method, which is a kind of technique for performing hidden surface removal, is set. The Z buffer method means that each pixel (or each voxel, each pixel, each polygon) arranged on the Z axis when a large number of objects or two-dimensional images overlap in the depth direction (Z axis direction) in the world coordinate system. This is a depth adjustment processing method that sequentially refers to the distance from the viewpoint and sets numerical information set for the pixel closest to the viewpoint to the corresponding unit area in the frame region.

  In addition to the Z buffer method, the Z sort method is set as a method for performing the hidden surface removal. The Z sort method is a processing method for depth adjustment in which numerical information set for each pixel is sequentially set in a corresponding unit area in the frame region for each pixel arranged on the Z axis. When the Z sort method is applied, the α value set for each pixel is referred to, and the corresponding α value is applied to the numerical information corresponding to the color information of each pixel arranged on the Z axis. In this state, the addition process of the numerical information and the calculation process for fusion are executed. The description of the specific processing configuration of the hidden surface processing by Z sort is omitted, but it is activated when an effect image is displayed.

  In the parameter information P ′ (0), α data designation information indicating whether or not α data is applied and an application target, and fog specification information indicating whether or not fog data is applied and an application target are set. Here, the α value is the transmission information of the corresponding pixel. As a method of setting the α value on the drawing list, there are a method of specifying the uniform α value and a method of specifying α data. The uniform α value is transmission information applied to all pixels of one image data, and is numerical information derived as a calculation result in the rendering CPU 82. The uniform α value is uniformly applied to all the pixels of the image data. On the other hand, the α data is transmission information applied in units of pixels of two-dimensional still image data and texture data, and is stored in advance in the memory module 83 as image data. The alpha data can have different transmission information for each pixel within the range of the same still image data or the same texture data. The α data has a larger data capacity than program data for setting a uniform α value.

  The fog is information for adjusting the degree of brightness with respect to a position in a predetermined direction, specifically, the Z-axis direction in the world coordinate system. Fog is used to express fog or inside a cave. Here, a single fog may be applied to the entire image for one frame. In this case, fog is applied to the image for one frame in a certain manner. Alternatively, a plurality of fogs may be applied to the entire image for one frame. In this case, when a fog similar to that of other objects is applied to an object arranged on the far side in the Z-axis direction, another fog is set for the object in a situation where the material is not too dark due to being too dark. It may be configured. Thereby, the effect by setting fog can be acquired, without impairing the said texture.

  In the address information A ′ (0), A ′ (1), A ′ (2),. Is set. In this case, in the 3D drawing list output from the effect CPU 82 to the effect LSI 85, address ID information corresponding to the address of the area where each image data is stored in the memory module 83 is set as address information. This corresponds to the address of the area where the image data is transferred in the pre-transfer area 86a when the transfer of the image data to the pre-transfer area 86a of the VRAM 86 is completed in the pre-transfer control unit 94 of the effect LSI 85. The address information is rewritten in the information, and when the decoded image data is set in the 3D drawing list, the address information is the address of the area where the decoded image data is stored in the moving image development area 119. The information corresponding to is set from the beginning and the address information Rewriting process by pre-transfer control unit 94 for the point that is not executed, the same as the 2D for drawing list. However, since 3D images require object image data and texture image data to display one type of individual image, object image data and texture image data are set as one drawing target. In addition, address information is set for each of the image data of the object and the image data of the texture.

  Next, 2D drawing processing executed by the 2D control unit 96 will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing a 2D drawing process executed by the 2D control unit 96. Note that the 2D control unit 96 executes 2D drawing processing using a program and data stored in advance in the memory module 83. All of these programs and data are read out to a register provided inside the 2D control unit 96 when the supply of operating power to the effect LSI 85 is started. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the 2D control unit 96 may be provided as a dedicated circuit that does not use the program and data stored in the memory module 83 in advance.

  First, it is determined whether or not there is a 2D drawing list in which the value of the 2D creation completion flag provided in the register 93 of the effect LSI 85 is “0” and the drawing process has not been executed yet. (Step S701). The 2D creation completion flag is a state in which the drawing process for the 2D drawing list corresponding to the image display for one frame is completed, and the drawing created in the 2D drawing area 112 in the drawing area 111 for main display by the drawing process. This is a flag for the 2D control unit 96 to specify that the data is not drawn in the main first frame area 114 or the main second frame area 115 in order to create drawing data for one frame. . When the drawing process for the 2D drawing list corresponding to the image display for one frame is completed, the 2D creation completion flag is set to “1”, and the drawing data created in the 2D drawing area 112 by the drawing process is one frame. The 2D creation completion flag is cleared to “0” when drawing is performed in the main first frame area 114 or the main second frame area 115 in order to create the drawing data for the minute. The case where there is an incomplete 2D drawing list means that there is a 2D drawing list for which drawing processing for all image data has not been completed, and 2D that has not yet been subjected to drawing processing. This applies to the case where a drawing list exists.

  If the value of the 2D creation completion flag is “0” and there is an incomplete 2D drawing list, the drawing target update process is executed (step S702). In the update process of the drawing target, when one new 2D drawing list is to be executed this time, the image data set at the beginning of the display order priority data in the 2D drawing list is drawn this time. Select as the execution target of the process. On the other hand, when this time is in the process of creating one 2D drawing list, the image data set as the next display order priority data with respect to the display order priority data of the image data subjected to the previous drawing process. Is selected as an execution target of the current drawing process.

  After that, for the moving image in which the address of the pre-transfer area 86a to which the image data targeted for the current rendering process is transferred or the decoded image data targeted for the current rendering process is expanded The address of the development area 119 is grasped from the address information in the 2D drawing list (step S703). In this case, when the address obtained from the address information corresponds to the advance transfer area 86a, the transfer controller 92 is instructed to read out the image data from the address in the advance transfer area 86a. On the other hand, when the address obtained from the address information corresponds to the moving image development area 119, the image data is read from the address in the moving image development area 119.

  In addition, a parameter to be applied to the image data that is the execution target of the current drawing process is grasped by performing an operation using the parameter information in the 2D drawing list (step S704). After that, a writing process for drawing the image data that is the execution target of the current drawing process in the drawing target area while applying the parameters grasped in step S704 is executed (step S705). In this writing process, if drawing data for displaying an image on the main display device 41 is created, the writing process is executed in the 2D drawing area 112 of the register 93 and the sub display devices 43 and 44 display the image. If drawing data is to be created, write processing is executed in the frame area on the side where the current drawing data is to be created out of the first sub-frame area 117 and second sub-frame area 118 of the register 93. .

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the execution of the processing in steps S702 to S705 has been completed for all image data specified in one or two 2D drawing lists corresponding to the image display for one frame ( Step S706). When the number of 2D drawing lists corresponding to image display for one frame is one, the last order of image data among a plurality of types of image data to be drawn in the 2D drawing list. Creation completion data is set in association with display order priority data. In addition, when the number of 2D drawing lists corresponding to image display for one frame is two, the order of execution of drawing processing is a plurality of types that are drawing instruction targets in the subsequent 2D drawing list The creation completion data is set in association with the display order priority data for the last order of image data. In step S706, it is determined whether or not creation completion data is set in association with the current display order priority data. When creation completion data has been set (step S706: YES), execution of the processing from step S702 to step S705 is completed for all image data specified in the 2D drawing list corresponding to image display for one frame. Therefore, “1” is set to the 2D creation completion flag of the register 93 (step S707).

  Next, 3D drawing processing executed by the 3D control unit 97 will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing 3D drawing processing executed by the 3D control unit 97. Note that the 3D control unit 97 executes 3D drawing processing using a program and data stored in advance in the memory module 83. All of these programs and data are read out to a register provided in the 3D control unit 97 when the supply of operating power to the effect LSI 85 is started. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the 3D control unit 97 may be provided as a dedicated circuit that does not use the program and data stored in the memory module 83 in advance.

  First, it is determined whether or not there is a 3D drawing list in which the value of the 3D creation completion flag provided in the register 93 of the effect LSI 85 is “0” and the drawing process has not been executed yet. (Step S801). The 3D creation completion flag is a state in which the drawing process for the 3D drawing list corresponding to the image display for one frame is completed, and the drawing created in the 3D drawing area 113 in the main display drawing area 111 by the drawing process. This is a flag for the 3D control unit 97 to specify that the data is not drawn in the main first frame area 114 or the main second frame area 115 in order to create drawing data for one frame. . When the drawing process for the 3D drawing list corresponding to the image display for one frame is completed, the 3D creation completion flag is set to “1”, and the drawing data created in the 3D drawing area 113 by the drawing process is one frame. The 3D creation completion flag is cleared to “0” when drawing is performed in the main first frame area 114 or the main second frame area 115 in order to generate the drawing data for the minute. The case where there is an incomplete 3D drawing list means that there is a 3D drawing list for which drawing processing for all image data has not been completed, and 3D that has not yet been subjected to drawing processing. This applies to the case where a drawing list exists.

  When the value of the 3D creation completion flag is “0” and there is an incomplete 3D drawing list, the processing from step S802 to step S810 is executed. In the processing from step S802 to step S810, it is first determined whether or not creation completion data is set in association with the last display order priority data in one 3D drawing list, and the creation completion data is set. If there is, only that one 3D drawing list is set as an execution target of the processing in steps S802 to S810. On the other hand, if the creation completion data is not set, it is determined whether or not the creation completion data is set in association with the last display order priority data in the 3D drawing list in the next order. Is set, the two 3D drawing lists so far are collectively set as the execution targets of steps S802 to S810. Accordingly, even when a plurality of 3D drawing lists are set as 3D drawing lists for displaying an image for one frame, 3D drawing data can be appropriately created. .

  In step S802, the address of the area of the pre-transfer area 86a or the moving image development area 119 in which the background image data specified as the drawing target in the 3D drawing list is stored is determined from the address information in the 3D drawing list. Grasp (step S802). In this case, when the address obtained from the address information corresponds to the advance transfer area 86a, the transfer controller 92 is instructed to read out the image data from the address in the advance transfer area 86a. On the other hand, when the address obtained from the address information corresponds to the moving image development area 119, the image data is read from the address in the moving image development area 119. Thereafter, background setting processing is executed (step S803).

  In the background setting process, it is determined whether or not the background image data whose address information has been determined in step S802 is already arranged in the world coordinate system. If it is not arranged, a free buffer area to be referred to for placement in the world coordinate system is searched for each image data, and if a free buffer area is secured, initialization processing of that area is executed. Then, world conversion is performed to convert the coordinate value of the local coordinate system for the background image data to the coordinate value of the world coordinate system so that the coordinates, rotation angle, and scale specified in the parameter information in the 3D drawing list are obtained. The process is executed to set the reserved buffer area. If it is arranged, the parameter applied to the target background image data is grasped by executing an operation using the parameter information in the 3D drawing list, and the already reserved buffer area is obtained. Update the various parameters that have been set. In the background setting process, a control end process for erasing the background image data not specified in the current drawing list among the image data already arranged in the world coordinate system is executed.

  Thereafter, the address of the area of the advance transfer area 86a in which the image data for rendering designated as the drawing target in the 3D drawing list and the development area 119 for moving images are grasped from the address information in the 3D drawing list. (Step S804). In this case, when the address obtained from the address information corresponds to the advance transfer area 86a, the transfer controller 92 is instructed to read out the image data from the address in the advance transfer area 86a. On the other hand, when the address obtained from the address information corresponds to the moving image development area 119, the image data is read from the address in the moving image development area 119. Thereafter, a setting process for effect is executed (step S805).

  In the effect setting process, it is determined whether or not the effect image data whose address information has been determined in step S804 has already been arranged in the world coordinate system. If not, the process for starting the arrangement is executed in the same manner as described in the background setting process. In the case of being arranged, various parameter update processing is executed in the same manner as described in the background setting processing. In the effect setting process, a control end process for erasing effect image data not specified in the current drawing list among image data already arranged in the world coordinate system is executed.

  As a result of executing the processing of steps S802 to S805, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 21, the objects to be arranged in the world coordinate system defined by the X axis, the Y axis, and the Z axis are displayed according to the 3D drawing list. The setting of the scene in which the image data PC1 for the rearmost image designated as the image data and the various object data PC2 to PC10 are arranged with the coordinates, the rotation angle, and the scale designated by the 3D drawing list is completed. . FIG. 21 simply shows a state in which image data PC1 for the backmost image and various object data PC2 to PC10 are arranged.

  Thereafter, a conversion process to the camera coordinate system (camera space) is executed (step S806). In the conversion process to the camera coordinate system, the coordinates and orientation of the viewpoint are determined based on the camera information specified by the 3D drawing list, and the world coordinate system is set as the origin based on the coordinates and orientation of the viewpoint. To the camera coordinate system (camera space). As a result, as shown in FIG. 21, the viewpoint PC11 indicated by the camera shape is set, and a coordinate system corresponding to the viewpoint PC11 is set.

  Here, the camera information is set for each individual image (the image data PC1 for the backmost image and the various object data PC2 to PC10), and in fact, there is a camera coordinate system for each individual image. . Thus, by setting the camera coordinate system for each individual image, viewpoint switching can be performed individually, and the degree of freedom in creating drawing data is increased. However, for convenience of explanation, FIG. 21 shows a state in which all the individual images are set to a single viewpoint.

  Thereafter, conversion processing to the visual field coordinate system (visual field space) is executed (step S807). In the conversion process to the visual field coordinate system, each camera coordinate system is converted into a visual field coordinate system corresponding to the visual field (viewing angle) from the viewpoint. Thereby, when each individual image is included in the field of view of the corresponding viewpoint, it is extracted, the individual image close to the viewpoint is enlarged, and the individual image far from the viewpoint is reduced.

  Thereafter, clipping processing is executed (step S808). In the clipping process, each individual image extracted in step S807 is grasped with a corresponding viewpoint as a common origin. In this state, each individual image extracted in step S807 is based on the space corresponding to the screen area PC12 (see FIG. 21) corresponding to the frame areas 114 and 115 corresponding to the main display device 41 to be drawn. Clip.

  Thereafter, a lighting process is executed (step S809). In the lighting process, the type, coordinates, and orientation of the virtual light source are determined based on the light information specified by the 3D drawing list, and shadows, reflections, and the like are performed based on the virtual light source for each object extracted by the clipping process. Calculate.

  Thereafter, each individual image clipped in step S808 and completed with the lighting process is projected onto the screen area PC12 that is a virtual two-dimensional plane (for example, perspective projection or parallel projection), and the data after the projection is projected. By executing the color information setting process, 3D drawing data is created in the 3D drawing area 113 in the register 93 (step S810). In the color information setting process, the appearance of each object is determined by setting the color information in pixel units (that is, polygon units) or vertex units for the projected data. In such color information setting processing, basically, texture mapping processing is performed in which texture data corresponding to each of the projected data is pasted. Further, depending on the situation, processes such as bump mapping and transparency mapping are executed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S801, or if the process of step S810 is executed, “1” is set to the 3D creation completion flag of the register 93 (step S811). Thereafter, by determining whether or not “1” is set in both the 2D creation completion flag and the 3D creation completion flag of the register 93, the 2D control unit for the 2D drawing list corresponding to the image display for one frame It is determined whether or not the drawing process by the 3D control unit 97 for the drawing process by 96 and the 3D drawing list corresponding to the image display for one frame is completed (step S812). That is, it is determined whether or not the creation of drawing data for one frame of image in each of the display devices 41, 43, and 44 is completed.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S812, both the 2D creation completion flag and the 3D creation completion flag are cleared to “0” (step S813). Thereafter, drawing data synthesis processing is executed (step S814). In the drawing data synthesis process, the 3D drawing area 113 is first created in the frame area for which the current drawing data is to be created among the main first frame area 114 and the main second frame area 115 of the register 93. The drawing data created is written, and then the drawing data created in the 2D drawing area 112 is written. In this case, since the completely transparent α value is set in the area in which no image data is set in the 2D drawing area 112, the drawing data written from the 3D drawing area 113 in the frame area to be created is Only the drawing data of the part corresponding to the symbol image in the 2D drawing area 112 is additionally drawn. When drawing the drawing data of the part corresponding to the symbol image, the area where the opaque α value is set is overwritten, and the area where the translucent α value is set is translucent. Blend processing using the α value is performed. By executing the drawing data combining process, the creation of drawing data for displaying an image for one frame on the main display device 41 is completed. As described above, since the sub display devices 43 and 44 directly draw the image data in the frame area to be created in the sub first frame area 117 and the sub second frame area 118, the 2D When the 2D creation completion flag of the register 93 is set to “1” in the drawing process (FIG. 19), creation of drawing data for displaying an image for one frame on each of the sub display devices 43 and 44 is completed. doing.

<Configuration for drawing list handling in production LSI 85>
Next, a configuration relating to handling of a drawing list in the effect LSI 85 will be described. As described above, each of the main display device 41 and each of the sub display devices 43 and 44 is provided with two frame regions 114, 115, 117, and 118, and 1 according to the drawing data created in one frame region. In a situation where an image for a frame is being displayed, drawing data for displaying an image for one frame at the update timing of the next image is created for the other frame region. In addition, image data stored in advance in the memory module 83 is used when creating the drawing data, but the image data used when creating the drawing data is before the drawing data is generated using the image data. The data is transferred to the advance transfer area 86 a of the VRAM 86.

  The timing at which drawing data is created and the timing at which image data is transferred in advance will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 22A shows a pre-transfer period of image data, FIG. 22B shows a creation period of drawing data, and FIG. 22C shows an update timing of images on the display devices 41, 43, and 44. .

  As shown in FIG. 22C, the main display is performed at each of the timing t1, timing t2, timing t3, timing t4, timing t5, timing t6, timing t7, timing t8, and timing t9. Image updating in the device 41, the first sub display device 43, and the second sub display device 44 is started. Further, as shown in FIG. 22B, drawing data is created at each of the timings t1 to t9. These drawing data are drawing data in the frame order corresponding to the next update timing with respect to the frame order corresponding to the current image update timing. For example, at the timing of t1, the image of the kth frame is updated in each of the display devices 41, 43, and 44 as shown in FIG. 22 (c), whereas the k + 1th frame as shown in FIG. 22 (b). Creation of drawing data for displaying the image is started. Since the double buffer method is adopted in each of the display devices 41, 43, and 44 as already described, other situations may occur in the situation where an image is displayed using drawing data created in one frame area. The drawing data corresponding to the update timing of the next image is created for the frame region.

  In the configuration in which each display device 41, 43, and 44 displays an image and creates drawing data as described above, the image data used in creating the drawing data is the drawing data created using the image data. The data is read into the VRAM 86 at a timing before the creation start timing. There are multiple types of such advance transfer modes. One aspect thereof is an aspect in which image data used in creating drawing data is read out using a creation period immediately before a creation period of drawing data created using the image data. Specifically, at the timing of t1, creation of drawing data for displaying an image of the (k + 1) th frame is started as shown in FIG. 22B, whereas as shown in FIG. Then, reading of the image data necessary for creating the drawing data for displaying the image of the (k + 2) th frame to the VRAM 86 is started. Similarly, at the timing t2, creation of drawing data for displaying an image of the (k + 2) th frame is started as shown in FIG. 22 (b), whereas k + 3 as shown in FIG. 22 (a). Reading of image data necessary for creating drawing data for displaying an image of the frame to the VRAM 86 is started, and at the timing of t3, an image of the k + 3 frame is displayed as shown in FIG. The drawing data is started to be created, whereas the image data necessary to create the drawing data for displaying the image of the k + 4th frame is read out to the VRAM 86 as shown in FIG. At the timing of t4, the creation of drawing data for displaying the image of the (k + 4) th frame is started as shown in FIG. ) Reading from VRAM86 of image data necessary for generation of the drawing data for displaying the k + 5 th frame image as shown in is started. According to such an image data reading mode, the data capacity of image data that needs to be reliably read into the VRAM 86 can be limited to two frames.

  Another aspect of the advance transfer is that the readout period of the image data necessary for creating drawing data for one frame is not limited to a period between one image update timing and the next image update timing. One image update timing while image data used when creating data is read into the VRAM 86 at a timing prior to the creation start timing of drawing data created using the image data. In this mode, image data is read out over a period between the first image update timing and the next image update timing. In other words, during the period between one image update timing and the next image update timing, reading of the image data necessary for creating drawing data for displaying the image of the predetermined frame is completed and the predetermined frame This is a mode in which reading of image data necessary for creating drawing data for displaying an image of the next frame in the next order is started. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 22B, creation of drawing data for displaying an image of the k + 5th frame is started at the timing of t5, and an image of the k + 6th frame is displayed at the timing of t6. Drawing data to be displayed is started, drawing data for displaying an image of the k + 7th frame is started at timing t7, and drawing for displaying an image of the k + 8 frame is started at timing t8. The creation of data is started, and the creation of drawing data for displaying the image of the (k + 9) th frame is started at the timing of t9. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. The image data required for creating the drawing data for displaying the image of the k + 6th frame to the k + 9th frame over the middle of the timing. Reading to VRAM86 of data is performed. According to such a mode of reading out image data, the period required for reading out the image data necessary for creating the drawing data for displaying the image of the predetermined frame is one image update timing and the next image update timing. Even when the period is more than the interval, the excess period can be absorbed using the free time of reading that occurs when the period required for reading the image data is shorter than the period between the image update timings. It becomes.

  The instruction CPU 82 instructs the advancement of the image data to the effect LSI 85 using the drawing list as described above. In the drawing list at the stage transmitted from the effect CPU 82, information corresponding to the address of the area of the memory module 83 in which the image data is stored is set in association with the type of image data necessary for creating the drawing data. However, the information corresponding to the address of the transfer destination area of the image data in the VRAM 86 is not set. When image data is transferred to the VRAM 86 by the advance transfer controller 94 of the effect LSI 85, information corresponding to the address of the area of the memory module 83 in which the image data is stored is the image data in the VRAM 86. It is rewritten with information corresponding to the address of the transfer destination area. Then, the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97 of the effect LSI 85 specify the area where the image data is read in the VRAM 86 by using the drawing list after the address information is rewritten, and from the area. Drawing data is created using the read image data.

  An area for storing the drawing list is set in the register 93 of the effect LSI 85 in correspondence with the handling of the drawing list. FIG. 23 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an area in which the drawing list is stored in the register 93 of the effect LSI 85.

  As shown in FIG. 23, the register 93 sequentially stores the drawing list transmitted from the effect CPU 82, and the drawing list stored in the pre-transfer storage area 121 and the drawing list stored in the pre-transfer storage area 121. When the pre-transfer to the VRAM 86 of the image data designated in FIG. 4 is completed, the post-transfer storage area 122 in which the drawing list overwritten with the information corresponding to the address of the transfer destination area is sequentially stored. And are provided. The storage area 121 before transfer is provided with first to twentieth storage areas 121a to 121t before transfer, and the drawing list transmitted from the effect CPU 82 is sequentially stored in the storage areas 121a to 121t. Specifically, when the drawing list is stored up to the m-th storage area and a new drawing list is transmitted from the effect CPU 82, the drawing list is stored in the (m + 1) -th storage area. In addition, when the advance transfer control unit 94 performs advance transfer of image data designated by the drawing list, the advance transfer is sequentially performed from the drawing list previously stored in the storage area 121 for transfer. Specifically, if the drawing list stored in the first storage area 121a before transfer is the target of advance transfer, and the drawing list is the target of execution of pre-transfer, the first storage area before transfer. After clearing “0” 121a, the drawing list stored in the (m + 1) th storage area is shifted to the mth storage area. The number of drawing lists that can be stored in the pre-transfer storage area 121 is not limited to 20, and any drawing list transmitted from the effect CPU 82 can be processed by the effect LSI 85. is there. Incidentally, in order to display an image for one frame on each display device 41, 43, 44, as described above, one or two 2D drawing lists corresponding to the image display for one frame and one frame are displayed. Since one or two 3D drawing lists corresponding to image display are used, a maximum of four storage areas of the first to twentieth storage areas 121a to 121t for transfer are displayed for one frame. Used to store the drawing list corresponding to.

  The post-transfer storage area 122 is provided with first to twentieth storage areas 122a to 122t after transfer, and drawing in which the pre-transfer control unit 94 completes the pre-transfer of the image data and rewrites the address information. The list is sequentially stored in the storage areas 122a to 122t. Specifically, when the advance transfer of the image data for one drawing list in the advance transfer control unit 94 is completed in a state where the drawing list is stored up to the nth storage area, the address information of the drawing list is rewritten. After being performed, it is stored in the (n + 1) th storage area. When the 2D control unit 96 or the 3D control unit 97 creates drawing data, the drawing process is executed sequentially from the drawing list previously stored in the post-transfer storage area 122. Specifically, the drawing process is executed from the drawing list stored in the first storage area 122a after transfer, and the first storage after transfer is performed when the drawing list is the drawing process execution target. After clearing the area 122a to “0”, the drawing list stored in the (n + 1) th storage area is shifted to the nth storage area. Note that the number of drawing lists that can be stored in the post-transfer storage area 122 is not limited to 20, and the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97 can process all the drawing lists that have been pre-transferred. It is optional if it exists. Incidentally, in order to display an image for one frame on each display device 41, 43, 44, as described above, one or two 2D drawing lists corresponding to the image display for one frame and one frame are displayed. Since one or two 3D drawing lists corresponding to image display are used, four storage areas among the first to twentieth storage areas 122a to 122t for transfer are used for image display for one frame. Used to store the corresponding drawing list.

  Note that a storage area group for storing the 2D drawing list and a storage area group for storing the 3D drawing list may be provided separately as the post-transfer storage area 122. In this case, the reading order of the 2D drawing list by the 2D control unit 96 and the reading of the 3D drawing list by the 3D control unit 97 are set in the storage area between the 2D drawing list and the 3D drawing list. It is possible to carry out independently regardless of the case.

  Next, the configuration of the pre-transfer area 86a of the VRAM 86 to which image data is pre-transferred and the handling of the image data read to the pre-transfer area 86a will be described. FIG. 24A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the advance transfer area 86a.

  As shown in FIG. 24A, the advance transfer area 86 a is set as a partial area of the VRAM 86. The advance transfer area 86a has a storage capacity capable of storing and holding a large number of image data at a time. Specifically, 256 data storage areas 123 are provided so that 256 image data can be stored and held at a time. Each data storage area 123 has the same storage capacity, and the storage capacity is a capacity capable of storing image data having the maximum storage capacity. Further, even when there are a plurality of image data whose total storage capacity is smaller than the storage capacity of one data storage area 123 as a read target to the advance transfer area 86a, the plurality of image data One image data is read out from one data storage area 123.

  When the image data is read according to the drawing list, the advance transfer control unit 94 sequentially changes the data storage area 123 that is a target of the image data read destination in a predetermined order. Specifically, the data storage area 123 is set so that the order of 0th to 255th occurs, and the final address in the kth data storage area 123 is the start in the k + 1st data storage area 123. The address and serial number. When the pre-transfer control unit 94 reads one piece of image data into the pre-transfer area 86a, the pre-transfer control unit 94 performs the following order on the data storage area 123 that stores the image data to be read in the previous pre-transfer execution time. The image data to be read this time is stored in the data storage area 123.

  In order to specify the type of the data storage area 123 of the read destination, the register 93 of the effect LSI 85 is provided with an identification information counter 124 as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. The identification information counter 124 has a data capacity of 1 byte, and can set any of the information corresponding to the numbers “0” to “255”. When the pre-transfer control unit 94 stores one piece of image data in the pre-transfer area 86a, the pre-transfer control unit 94 stores the image data in the data storage area 123 corresponding to the information set in the identification information counter 124. After the image data is stored, the value corresponding to the information set in the identification information counter 124 is incremented by 1, and the image data storage target is updated to the data storage area 123 in the next order.

  In the configuration in which 255 data storage areas 123 are provided as described above, the 0th data storage is performed in the next pre-transfer processing when the image data is stored in the 255th data storage area 123. The area 123 is a transfer destination of image data. In this case, the image data that has already been read in the 0th data storage area 123 is erased when new image data is read. However, the number of data storage areas 123 in the pre-transfer area 86a is set so that the image data instructed to be read from the drawing list is not deleted without being used when creating the drawing data. Specifically, an image that is transferred in advance to the advance transfer area 86a for the purpose of using the advance transfer mode as shown in the timing t5 to the timing t9 in FIG. Although the number of data is the largest, the number of data storage areas 123 is larger than the maximum number of image data assumed in this case. More specifically, three frames of image data are read out to the pre-transfer area 86a for later use, but the maximum number of image data assumed as the number of image data of three frames. However, the number of data storage areas 123 is large. As a result, the image data that should have been pre-transferred in the stage of creating the drawing data corresponding to the predetermined drawing list is erased from the pre-transfer area 86a even though the image data has been pre-transferred according to the predetermined drawing list. It is possible to prevent the situation of being stuck.

  In a configuration in which 256 data storage areas 123 are provided in the pre-transfer area 86a, a transfer instruction for image data that is the same as the image data that has already been read out in any of the data storage areas 123 can be issued from the drawing list. . In this case, if the image data is purposely read from the memory module 83 and read to the advance transfer area 86a, the reading efficiency is deteriorated. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10, when the image data subject to the transfer instruction from the drawing list already exists in the data storage area 123, the image data is not read from the memory module 83. It has become.

  However, as described above, the advance transfer control unit 94 refers to the identification information counter 124 of the register 93 to sequentially update the data storage area 123 to be read of image data in a predetermined order. . Therefore, when the image data that is the target of the transfer instruction according to the drawing list already exists in any of the data storage areas 123, the advance transfer control unit 94 uses the image data as the data corresponding to the current identification information counter 124. Copy to storage area 123. In other words, the image data is not read from the memory module 83, but the data is copied between the data storage areas 123 in the advance transfer area 86a. As a result, it is possible to increase the reading efficiency of the image data while enabling the reading of the image data to the data storage area 123 in the order according to the identification information counter 124. Note that if the image data subject to the transfer instruction from the drawing list already exists in the data storage area 123 corresponding to the current identification information counter 124, the state is maintained without copying the image data. However, only the identification information counter 124 is updated.

  In order to enable the pre-transfer control unit 94 to specify whether or not the image data that is the target of the transfer instruction by the drawing list already exists in the data storage area 123, the register 93 of the effect LSI 85 includes A search table 125 is provided. FIG. 25 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the search table 125.

  As shown in FIG. 25, the search table 125 is set so that the identification information set in a one-to-one correspondence with the data storage area 123 of the pre-transfer area 86a is a serial number in accordance with the order of the data storage area 123. The address ID is set in correspondence with each piece of identification information on a one-to-one basis. The address ID is data that enables the pre-transfer control unit 94 to specify the type of image data stored in the data storage area 123. More specifically, the address ID is information set as the address information of the image data in the drawing list transmitted from the effect CPU 82, and the address ID is an area where the corresponding image data is stored in the memory module 83. Corresponds to the start address. As described above, when the image data instructed in the drawing list is transferred from the memory module 83 to the advance transfer area 86a, the advance transfer control unit 94 reads the image data read from the area in the advance transfer area 86a. The information corresponding to the address is overwritten on the address information of the drawing list. At this time, the address ID corresponding to the start address in the address ID group set so far in the address information of the drawing list is stored in the search table 125. The image data is written in the storage area of the address ID corresponding to the identification information of the data storage area 123 from which the image data has been read. As a result, the address ID of the start address corresponding to the image data stored in the data storage area 123 is set in the search table 125 in association with each data storage area 123. Therefore, the advance transfer control unit 94 refers to the search table 125 to specify whether or not the image data that is the target of the transfer instruction is already read out to the advance transfer area 86a from the drawing list. In addition, when the image data has already been read, the type of the data storage area 123 from which the image data is read can be specified.

  With reference to FIGS. 26 (a) to 26 (d), description will be given of how the address information in the drawing list is rewritten and the address ID in the search table is rewritten. FIG. 26A is an explanatory diagram for explaining a drawing list transmitted from the effect CPU 82 to the effect LSI 85, and FIG. 26B is a diagram before image data is transferred in advance according to the drawing list. FIG. 26C is an explanatory diagram for explaining the search list 125 in the situation, and FIG. 26C is an explanatory diagram for explaining the drawing list after the advance transfer of the image data is completed and the rewriting of the address information is completed. FIG. 26D is an explanatory diagram for explaining the search table 125 in a situation after the advance transfer of the image data according to the drawing list is completed.

  As shown in FIG. 26A, in the drawing list transmitted from the effect CPU 82 to the effect LSI 85, addresses “A253” to “A257” as address information corresponding to image data whose display order priority data is “0”. An ID range is set, an address ID range of “B348” to “B350” is set as address information corresponding to image data whose display order priority data is “1”, and the display order priority data is “ A range of address IDs “C001” to “C003” is set as address information corresponding to the image data “2”. In this case, the image data whose display order priority data is “0” is stored in the memory module 83 in the area of the address range corresponding to the range of address IDs “A253” to “A257”. Is stored in the area of the address range corresponding to the range of the address IDs “B348” to “B350” in the memory module 83, and the image data whose display order priority data is “2”. Is stored in the area of the address range corresponding to the range of address IDs “C001” to “C003” in the memory module 83.

  When the pre-transfer control unit 94 performs pre-transfer of the image data specified in the drawing list of FIG. 26A, first, the pre-transfer target image data is changed to the pre-transfer area 86a by referring to the search table 125. Whether the data has already been read out to any of the data storage areas 123 is specified. Since the start address of the address ID is used for this specification, if the display order priority data is image data of “0”, it is specified whether or not “A253” is set in the search table 125, and the display order is determined. If the priority data is “1” image data, it is specified whether “B348” is set in the search table 125. If the display order priority data is “2” image data, “C001” is searched. It is specified whether it is set in the use table 125.

  In the situation where the identification information corresponding to the data storage area 123 from which the image data is read out is “123” in the search table 125 in the form shown in FIG. 26B, the drawing list shown in FIG. When the image data is transferred in advance, the start address (“A253”) of the address ID set for the image data whose display order priority data is “0” is the identification information “120” in the search table 125. Is set as an address ID corresponding to. Therefore, the pre-transfer control unit 94 does not read out the image data with the display order priority data “0” from the memory module 83 to the pre-transfer area 86a, but the data storage area corresponding to the identification information “120”. The image data stored in 123 is copied to the data storage area 123 corresponding to the identification information “123”. In this case, read efficiency is improved in that it is not necessary to read image data from the memory module 83. In addition, the information of the address ID corresponding to the identification information “123” in the search table 125 is rewritten to the start address of the address ID of the image data as shown in FIG. By rewriting the address ID information in the search table 125 in this way, it is possible to associate the storage status of the image data in each data storage area 123 with the contents of the search table 125.

  Even if the image data is copied in this way, the image data stored in the data storage area 123 corresponding to the identification information “120” is stored and held as it is, and the identification of “120” in the search table 125 is performed. Information of the address ID corresponding to the information is maintained at “A253”. In this case, the search table 125 includes a plurality of pieces of identification information whose address ID information is “A253”, but whether or not the image data to be pre-transferred has already been read out to the pre-transfer area 86a. Since the identification is performed in order from the identification information with the smallest value, when the image data whose address ID has the start address “A253” becomes the target of advance transfer, the data storage area 123 corresponding to the identification information with the smaller value. The image data from is copied.

  On the other hand, for the image data whose display order priority data is “1” and “2”, the start address of the address ID is not set in the search table 125 shown in FIG. Accordingly, these image data are pre-transferred from the memory module 83 to the pre-transfer area 86a. Then, when the pre-transfer is completed, the rewriting process of the search table 125 is executed, so that the address ID corresponding to the identification information “124” in the search table 125 as shown in FIG. “B348” is set as the information, and “C001” is set as the address ID information corresponding to the identification information “125” in the search table 125.

  When each image data is pre-transferred as described above, the pre-transfer control unit 94 executes rewriting processing of the drawing list identification information. In this case, as shown in FIG. 26C, the address information corresponding to the image data whose display order priority data is “0” includes the identification information corresponding to the type of the data storage area 123 in which the image data is stored. Will be overwritten. Specifically, since the image data with the display order priority data “0” is copied to the data storage area 123 corresponding to the identification information “123”, the address corresponding to the image data with the display order priority data “0”. The information is overwritten with “123”. Also, an image other than the decoded image data set as the next display order priority data with respect to the display order priority data in which the decoded image data created by executing decoding processing on the moving image data is set The identification information corresponding to the type of the data storage area 123 in which the image data is stored is also overwritten on the address information corresponding to the data. It should be noted that the address information corresponding to the decoded image data is set with information for enabling identification of the address of the area where the decoded image data is stored in the moving image development area 119 from the beginning.

  On the other hand, the image data is stored in the address information corresponding to the image data whose display order priority data is “1” or later and the image data corresponding to the immediately preceding display order priority data is not decoded image data. The identification information corresponding to the data storage area 123 is not written, but data indicating “1” as the offset value is written. In the next transfer processing time after the image data is read to the data storage area 123 corresponding to the predetermined identification information, the data storage area 123 corresponding to the identification information after adding 1 to the predetermined identification information is an image. Data transfer destination. Therefore, the address information corresponding to the image data whose display order priority data is image data after “1” and whose image data corresponding to the immediately preceding display order priority data is not decoded image data is “1” as an offset value. Will be written. As a result, the processing load for rewriting the address information can be reduced.

  A processing configuration for enabling advance transfer of image data as described above and rewriting of a drawing list after advance transfer will be described below. First, the drawing list output process executed by the effect CPU 82 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The drawing list output process is executed as a part of step S507 in the V interrupt process (FIG. 14) when the drawing list output timing shown in the display control execution target table is reached. Incidentally, the output mode of the drawing list from the effect CPU 82 to the effect LSI 85 is either the mode shown at the timings t1 to t5 in FIG. 22A or the mode shown at the timings t5 to t9 in FIG. Whether to adopt this mode is determined in the execution target table for display control.

  First, it is determined whether each display device 41, 43, 44 is displaying a demo (step S901). The demonstration display means a start waiting period for starting a demonstration without starting the effect for the game times or the effect for the opening / closing execution mode after the effect for the game times or the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is started. This is a display effect that starts when (for example, 0.1 sec) has elapsed. In the demonstration display, the first demonstration period and the second demonstration period occur alternately. In the first demonstration period, in the situation where the same background image is displayed as in the case where an effect for game times is performed on each of the main display device 41, the first sub display device 43, and the second sub display device 44, An image in which the symbols stopped and displayed on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the main display device 41 are performing a predetermined operation is displayed over a predetermined period. In the second demonstration period, display of an image in which a symbol performs a predetermined operation in a situation in which a predetermined background image is displayed is ended, and a moving image with a manufacturer name, a model name, or a predetermined character is displayed.

  Here, the effect for the game round is a state in which a predetermined background image is displayed on each of the display devices 41, 43, and 44 immediately after the supply of the operating power to the effect CPU 82 is started. This is started from a state in which a predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the display device 41. On the other hand, when the demonstration display is performed without starting the effect for the game times immediately after the supply of the operating power to the performance CPU 82 is started, each display device 41 is displayed in the first demonstration period. , 43 and 44, the predetermined background image is displayed, and an image in which the predetermined symbol that is stopped and displayed on the symbol row Z1 to Z3 of the main display device 41 performs a predetermined operation is displayed. Is done. In addition, regardless of the type of game-playing effect, the main display device 41, the first sub-display device 43, and the second sub-display device 44 are used at the final timing of the game-turning effect. In each case, a predetermined background image is displayed, and on the main display device 41, a symbol corresponding to the stop result is stopped and displayed on the symbol row Z1 to Z3. Regardless of whether or not the opening / closing execution mode effect is started after the end of the game turn effect, when the next game time effect is started, the previous game time effect is ended. It starts from the image display state at the timing. When the demonstration display is performed after the end of the game round effect, the predetermined background image is displayed on each of the display devices 41, 43, and 44 in the first demonstration period, and the previous game is displayed. When the rendition effect ends, an image in which the symbols stopped and displayed on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the main display device 41 performs a predetermined operation is displayed. That is, in the first demonstration period of the demonstration display, display using an image displayed when starting the next game round effect is performed. Therefore, in the first demonstration period of the demonstration display, the image data necessary for starting the next game round effect is read into the advance transfer area 86a.

  When the demonstration is being displayed (step S901: YES), the value of the demonstration display counter provided in the work memory 84 is incremented by 1 (step S902). The demonstration display counter is used for the effect CPU 82 to specify that it is time to start the first demonstration period by using all of the image data necessary for starting the effect for the next game. It is a counter. When the value of the counter during demonstration display after the addition of 1 is the start reference value for the first demonstration period (step S903: YES), after clearing the counter display counter value “0” (step S904), the game Data setting is performed so that the image data necessary for starting the next presentation is specified in the current drawing list (step S905). As a result, even in a situation where the demonstration display is continued, the image data necessary for starting the next game stage effect is periodically used and read into the pre-transfer area 86a of the VRAM 86. It becomes.

  Further, even when the demonstration is not being displayed (step S901: NO), the timing before the end in the case where the supply of the operating power to the effect CPU 82 is started or the ending period is executed in the effect for the opening / closing execution mode. If this is the case (step S906: YES), data setting is performed so that the image data necessary for starting the next game effect is specified in the current drawing list (step S905). In addition, when the process of step S905 is executed during the opening / closing execution mode, the image data necessary for starting the next game stage effect is used for creating drawing data of what is set as a target of advance transfer. It is not set as a target.

  By executing the processing of step S901 to step S906, the image data necessary to start the effect for the game times is stored in the VRAM 86 at a timing at which the effect for the next game time can be started. The state is read to the advance transfer area 86a. This will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 28A shows the timing at which an instruction to read out image data necessary for starting a game-playing effect is given by the drawing list, and FIG. 28B shows a timing required to start the game-playing effect. FIG. 28 (c) shows a period during which an effect for game rotation is executed, and FIG. 28 (d) shows an effect for the opening / closing execution mode. FIG. 28E shows the execution period of the demonstration display.

  When the supply of operating power to the presentation CPU 82 is started at the timing t1, as shown in FIG. 28A, image data necessary for starting the presentation for the game times is transferred in advance from the memory module 83. Reading to the area 86a is performed. After that, at the timing of t2, the demonstration display is started as shown in FIG. 28 (e) when the start waiting period elapses without starting the game turn effect from the timing of t1. In the demonstration display, the first demonstration period in which the image display using the image data necessary for starting the next game round effect is started first, so the timing shown in FIG. As shown to a), the image data required in order to start the effect for game times is read.

  Here, 256 data storage areas 123 are provided in the pre-transfer area 86a already described. However, when the image data designated by the drawing list is transferred in advance, the data storage area 123 from which the image data is read out. Will be overwritten. On the other hand, as described above, when the image data for which the advance transfer is designated by the drawing list has already been read out to any data storage area 123 of the advance transfer area 86a, the memory module 83 is used for the image data. The data is not read from the data storage area 123 but is stored in the data storage area 123 as a read destination by copying between the data storage areas 123. In this case, it is not necessary to read out the image data from the memory module 83, so that it is possible to read out the image data to the data storage area 123 as a read destination at an early stage.

  In this case, at the timing of t2, the image data necessary for starting the effect for the game round pre-transferred to the pre-transfer area 86a at the timing of t1 is stored and held. Therefore, at the timing t2, the image data is copied between the data storage areas 123 of the advance transfer area 86a, and the image data is not read from the memory module 83. Further, the image data is copied between the data storage areas 123, and the image data is stored in the data storage area 123 corresponding to the value of the current identification information counter 124. In order to erase the data from the storage area 123, it is necessary to make one round of switching of the read target of the image data in the data storage area 123. That is, as the timing at which the image data necessary for starting the next game effect is erased from the pre-transfer area 86a, there is a margin for one round of switching of the image data read target in the data storage area 123. It will be.

  Thereafter, the first demo period is started again at the timing t3 in a situation where the demonstration display is continued. In this case, as shown in FIG. 28A, the image data necessary for starting the effect for the game round is read at the timing t3. The first demonstration period is restarted when the value of the counter during demonstration display, which is cleared to “0” at the timing when the first demonstration period was started last time and periodically updated thereafter, reaches the start reference value. This start reference value is set so that the first demo period starts within a range in which all the image data necessary for starting the next game round effect is stored in the advance transfer area 86a. Yes. As a result, while the demonstration display is being executed regardless of the duration of the demonstration display, any image data necessary for starting the next game round effect is read into the data storage area 123 of the advance transfer area 86a. It is in the state. With such a configuration, at the timing of t3, the image data necessary for starting the effect for the game times copied between the data storage areas 123 at the timing of t2 is stored and held. ing. Therefore, at the timing of t3, the image data is copied between the data storage areas 123 of the advance transfer area 86a, and the image data is not read from the memory module 83. Further, the image data necessary for starting the effect for the next game round is started by copying the image data necessary for starting the effect for the game round between the data storage areas 123 at the timing of t3. As the timing at which the data is erased from the advance transfer area 86a, there is a margin for one round of switching of the read target of the image data in the data storage area 123.

  Thereafter, when the condition for starting the effect for the game round is established at the timing of t4, the demonstration display is ended as shown in FIG. 28 (e), and the effect for the game round as shown in FIG. 28 (c). Is started. In this case, as shown in FIG. 28A, image data necessary for starting the effect for the game round is read at the timing t4. In the first demonstration period of the demonstration display, as already described, the image data necessary for starting the effect for the next game round has been read out to the pre-transfer area 86a, and during the duration of the demonstration display. Regardless of this, the first demo period is started again so that the state in which the image data is read out to the advance transfer area 86a is maintained. Therefore, at the timing t4, the image data necessary for starting the current game effect is stored and held in the data storage area 123 of the advance transfer area 86a. Therefore, at the timing of t4, the image data is copied between the data storage areas 123 of the advance transfer area 86a, and the image data is not read from the memory module 83.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t5, as shown in FIG. In this case, as already described, regardless of which type of game-playing effect is executed, the main display device 41, the first sub-display device 43, and the second display device are used in the end period of the game-playing effect. A predetermined background image is displayed on each of the sub display devices 44, and a symbol corresponding to the stop result is stopped and displayed on the symbol row Z1 to Z3 on the main display device 41. That is, the image data for displaying the image has been read into the data storage area 123 of the pre-transfer area 86a. Note that the advance transfer of the image data necessary for displaying an image in the end period of the effect for game times to the data storage area 123 is performed according to the advance transfer mode at the timings t5 to t9 in FIG. It has been broken. As a result, even if a certain amount of time is required for the advance transfer of the image data necessary for displaying the image in the end period of the game round effect, the end time period of the game round effect is used. It is possible to transfer the data in advance to the data storage area 123 before the start.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t6, as shown in FIG. In this case, as shown in FIG. 28 (a), the image data necessary for starting the effect for the game round is read at the timing t6. As described above, when an effect for a new game is started after the effect for the game is completed, the display is started from the image display state at the timing when the effect for the previous game is completed. In addition, the current game-game effect is started without the transition to the demonstration display after the previous game-game effect is completed. Therefore, at the timing of t6, the image data necessary for starting the present game round effect has been read into the data storage area 123. Copying is performed, and the image data is not read from the memory module 83.

  After that, at the timing of t7, which is a situation where the effect for the game round is continued, as shown in FIG. 28 (b), the image data necessary to execute the reach effect in the current game round effect, etc. The image data necessary for starting the effect for the game round is deleted from the data storage area 123 by the advance transfer to the data storage area 123. However, since the effect for the game times is being continued, the image data necessary for starting the effect for the game times is used at least until the end of the effect for the game times. Not.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t8, as shown in FIG. In this case, as already described, regardless of which type of game-playing effect is executed, the main display device 41, the first sub-display device 43, and the second display device are used in the end period of the game-playing effect. A predetermined background image is displayed on each of the sub display devices 44, and a symbol corresponding to the stop result is stopped and displayed on the symbol row Z1 to Z3 on the main display device 41. That is, the image data for displaying the image has been read into the data storage area 123 of the pre-transfer area 86a. Note that the advance transfer of the image data necessary for displaying an image in the end period of the effect for game times to the data storage area 123 is performed according to the advance transfer mode at the timings t5 to t9 in FIG. It has been broken. As a result, even if a certain amount of time is required for the advance transfer of the image data necessary for displaying the image in the end period of the game round effect, the end time period of the game round effect is used. It is possible to transfer the data in advance to the data storage area 123 before the start.

  Since the game times this time correspond to the jackpot result, the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is started at the timing t8 as shown in FIG. Thereafter, at the timing t9 when the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is continued, as shown in FIG. The image data necessary for starting the process is deleted from the data storage area 123. However, since the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is being continued, the image data necessary for starting the effect for game play is used at least until the end timing of the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is reached. It will not be a situation.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t10, a predetermined pre-end timing in the case where the ending period is being executed in the effect for the opening / closing execution mode, and therefore, the next game as shown in FIG. 28A at the timing of t10. The image data necessary for starting the presentation effect is read out to the data storage area 123. This image data is stored and held at least until the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is finished and a new effect for game times or a demonstration display is started.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t11, the effect for the opening / closing execution mode ends as shown in FIG. 28 (d), and a new effect for game times is started as shown in FIG. 28 (c). In this case, as shown in FIG. 28A, the image data necessary for starting the effect for the game round is read at the timing t11, but the image data is stored in the data storage area 123 at the timing t10. Therefore, the image data is copied between the data storage areas 123, and the image data is not read from the memory module 83.

  As described above, even if the image data pre-transferred to the data storage area 123 is sequentially deleted along with the pre-transfer of other image data, at the timing of starting the effect for the game turn The image data necessary for starting the production is already read out in the data storage area 123. As a result, even if the configuration requires a certain period of time to read out the image data necessary for starting the effect for the game round from the memory module 83, the effect of the game round for the effect of the readout period of the image data. It is possible to prevent an event that the start of the production is delayed.

  Returning to the description of the drawing list output process (FIG. 27), when a negative determination is made at step S903, when a process at step S905 is executed, or when a negative determination is made at step S906, aggregation of 2D image data is performed. Processing is executed (step S907). In the aggregation processing, all the image data to be set in the 2D drawing list in the current processing round are specified. In this case, when the process of step S905 is executed, the image data that is necessary for starting the effect for the game round and is used in the drawing process of the 2D control unit 96 is collected. It is included in the specific object in processing.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the number of 2D image data collected in step S907 is equal to or greater than a reference number (for example, 10) (step S908). The reference number is arbitrary as long as it is a plurality. If the number of 2D image data collected in step S907 is less than the reference number (step S908: NO), one 2D drawing list is created (step S909). All the 2D image data collected in step S907 is set in the single 2D drawing list. Then, creation completion data is set in association with the display order priority data for the last order image data in the 2D drawing list (step S910). As described above, the 2D control unit 96 determines whether or not creation completion data has been set in the 2D drawing process (FIG. 19), thereby enabling one or two 2D images corresponding to image display for one frame. It is determined that the drawing process has been completed for all the image data specified in the drawing list.

  On the other hand, if the number of 2D image data collected in step S907 is equal to or greater than the reference number (step S908: YES), two 2D drawing lists are created (step S911). In this case, the 2D image data collected in step S907 is set to be distributed in two 2D drawing lists while ensuring the continuity of the writing order. In each of these two 2D drawing lists, the number of image data is less than the reference number. Then, of these two 2D drawing lists, the 2D control unit 96 sets creation completion data in the 2D drawing list to be executed later (step S912). Specifically, the creation completion data is set in association with the display order priority data for the last order image data in the 2D drawing list. As described above, the 2D control unit 96 determines whether or not creation completion data has been set in the 2D drawing process (FIG. 19), thereby enabling one or two 2D images corresponding to image display for one frame. It is determined that the drawing process has been completed for all the image data specified in the drawing list.

  As described above, if the number of 2D image data aggregated in step S907 is less than the reference number, the image data is set in one 2D drawing list. By distributing and setting the image data in the list, the number of image data set in one 2D drawing list can be suppressed to less than the reference number. As a result, even if the number of 2D image data necessary for displaying an image for one frame fluctuates, the data capacity of one 2D drawing list can be reduced to a predetermined capacity or less. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the data capacity of one 2D drawing list transmitted from the effecting CPU 82 to the effecting LSI 85 from becoming extremely large. It is possible to prevent the transmission period from becoming extremely long.

  In the drawing list output process, when the process of step S910 or step S912 is executed, the 3D image data aggregation process is executed (step S913). In the aggregation processing, all the image data to be set in the 3D drawing list in the current processing round are specified. In this case, when the process of step S905 is executed, the image data necessary for starting the effect for the game round and used in the drawing process of the 3D control unit 97 is collected. It is included in the specific object in processing.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the number of 3D image data collected in step S913 is equal to or greater than a reference number (for example, 10) (step S914). The reference number is arbitrary as long as it is a plurality. If the number of 3D image data collected in step S913 is less than the reference number (step S914: NO), one 3D drawing list is created (step S915). All of the 3D image data collected in step S913 is set in the single 3D drawing list. Then, creation completion data is set in association with the display order priority data for the last order image data in the 3D drawing list (step S916). As described above, the 3D control unit 97 determines whether or not creation completion data has been set in the 3D drawing process (FIG. 20), thereby enabling one or two 3D images corresponding to one frame of image display. It is determined that the drawing process has been completed for all the image data specified in the drawing list.

  On the other hand, if the number of 3D image data collected in step S913 is greater than or equal to the reference number (step S914: YES), two 3D drawing lists are created (step S917). In this case, the 3D image data collected in step S913 is set to be distributed in two 3D drawing lists while ensuring the continuity of the writing order. In these two 3D drawing lists, the number of image data is less than the reference number. Then, of these two 3D drawing lists, the 3D control unit 97 sets creation completion data in the 3D drawing list to be executed later (step S918). Specifically, the creation completion data is set in association with the display order priority data for the image data in the last order in the 3D drawing list. As described above, the 3D control unit 97 determines whether or not creation completion data has been set in the 3D drawing process (FIG. 20), thereby enabling one or two 3D images corresponding to one frame of image display. It is determined that the drawing process has been completed for all the image data specified in the drawing list.

  As described above, if the number of 3D image data aggregated in step S913 is less than the reference number, the image data is set in one 3D drawing list. By distributing and setting the image data in the list, the number of image data set in one 3D drawing list can be suppressed to less than the reference number. As a result, even if the number of 3D image data necessary for displaying an image for one frame fluctuates, the data capacity of one 3D drawing list can be reduced to a predetermined capacity or less. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the data capacity of one 3D drawing list transmitted from the effecting CPU 82 to the effecting LSI 85 from becoming extremely large. It is possible to prevent the transmission period from becoming extremely long.

  When the process of step S916 is executed or when the process of step S918 is executed, a drawing list to be output to the effect LSI 85 is grasped (step S919). In this case, at least one 2D drawing list and one 3D drawing list are grasped, and at most two 2D drawing lists and two 3D drawing lists are grasped. Thereafter, a process for outputting one drawing list among the plurality of drawing lists grasped in step S919 to the effect LSI 85 is executed (step S920). If output of all the drawing lists grasped in step S919 to the effect LSI 85 has not been completed (step S921: YES), the process of step S920 is performed until output of all the drawing lists is completed. repeat. Thereby, a drawing list for displaying an image for one frame is output.

  In this case, one 2D drawing list and one 3D drawing list may be alternately output. With this configuration, even if at least one of the 2D drawing list and the 3D drawing list is two as a drawing list for displaying an image for one frame, the rendering LSI 85 has 2D. The drawing list for 3D and the drawing list for 3D are transmitted alternately. By transmitting the drawing list in this way, the 2D drawing list and the 3D drawing list are alternately stored in the storage area 121 before transfer and the storage area 122 after transfer in the register 93. It becomes. Thereby, for example, after the 2D control unit 96 reads the 2D drawing list from the first storage area 122a after transfer in the storage area 122 after transfer, the 3D drawing list is stored in the first storage area 122a after transfer. Is shifted, and the 3D control unit 97 can read out the 3D drawing list. Therefore, the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97 can perform drawing processing simultaneously.

  Next, the pre-transfer process executed by the pre-transfer controller 94 of the effect LSI 85 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Note that the advance transfer control unit 94 executes advance transfer processing periodically (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec) using programs and data stored in advance in the memory module 83. All of these programs and data are read out to a register provided in the advance transfer control unit 94 when supply of operating power to the effect LSI 85 is started. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the advance transfer control unit 94 may be provided as a dedicated circuit that does not use the program and data stored in the memory module 83 in advance.

  In the advance transfer process, first, it is determined whether or not there is a drawing list for which advance transfer has not been completed (step S1001). Specifically, if the pre-transfer process for one drawing list is started, but the pre-transfer process for all the image data set in the one drawing list is not completed, the pre-transfer process is completed. This means that there is a drawing list that has not been transferred. Even if the pre-transfer process for one drawing list has been completed, the pre-transfer process is still in the pre-transfer storage area 121 (see FIG. 23) in the register 93 of the rendering LSI 85. If there is a drawing list that is not an execution target, there is a drawing list that has not been pre-transferred.

  If there is an incomplete drawing list (step S1001: YES), the image data to be pre-transferred in this pre-transfer process is grasped (step S1002). In this case, if the timing is in the middle of the pre-transfer process for one drawing list, the display order priority data is the next to the image data that has been subject to the pre-transfer process in the previous processing time in that drawing list. The image data in this order is grasped as the object of the advance transfer this time. Further, when it is the start timing of the pre-transfer process for the new drawing list, the image data with the display order priority data in the first order in the drawing list is grasped as the target of the current pre-transfer.

  When the pre-transfer target image data grasped in step S1002 is decoded image data created by executing decoding processing on moving image data (step S1003: YES), steps S1004 to S1015 are performed. The process proceeds to step S1016 without executing the process. On the other hand, if the pre-transfer target image data grasped in step S1002 is not decoded image data (step S1003: NO), the value of the identification information counter 124 (see FIG. 24B) of the register 93 is set to 1. Addition is performed (step S1004). If the value of the identification information counter 124 after the addition of 1 exceeds the maximum value of the identification information counter 124 (step S1005: YES), the value of the identification information counter 124 is cleared to “0” (step S1005). S1006).

  When a negative determination is made in step S1005, or when the process of step S1006 is executed, the address information set in the drawing list is referred to in correspondence with the image data to be pre-transferred grasped in step S1002. The start address in the range of the address ID corresponding to the image data is grasped (step S1007). Then, by executing the matching process of the search table 125 (FIG. 25), it is specified whether or not the start address is set corresponding to any identification information of the search table 125 (see FIG. 25). (Step S1008).

  When it is determined in the collation process that the start address is not set in the search table 125 (step S1009: NO), a read setting process from the memory module 83 is executed (step S1010). Specifically, the range of the address ID set in the address information of the drawing list corresponding to the current image data to be transferred in advance is output to the transfer controller 92. Further, the current value of the identification information counter 124 is output to the transfer controller 92 as identification information in the data storage area 123 of the pre-transfer area 86a so that the transfer controller 92 recognizes the transfer destination of the image data to be pre-transferred this time. . As a result, the current pre-transfer target image data is read from the memory module 83, and the read image data is written in the current transfer destination area in the data storage area 123. The processing contents of the transfer controller 92 for transferring the image data will be described later.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the collation process in step S1008 that the start address is set in the search table 125 (step S1009: YES), the copy setting process in the advance transfer area 86a is executed (step S1011). Specifically, the image data stored in the data storage area 123 corresponding to the identification information for which the start address is set in the search table 125 is stored in the data corresponding to the current value of the identification information counter 124. An instruction for copying to the area 123 is given to the transfer controller 92. In this case, identification information corresponding to the copy source data storage area 123 and identification information corresponding to the copy destination data storage area 123 are output to the transfer controller 92. As a result, the image data to be pre-transferred this time is written in the data transfer area 123 to the current transfer destination area without reading the image data from the memory module 83.

  When the process of step S1010 or step S1011 is executed, the rewriting process of the search table 125 is executed (step S1012). Specifically, for the address ID information in the search table 125 corresponding to the data storage area 123 that is the current transfer destination area, the drawing list is associated with the image data to be pre-transferred this time. The start address information in the address ID range set in the address information is overwritten. As a result, the contents of the search table 125 can be matched with the contents of the type of image data actually stored in each data storage area 123.

  Thereafter, on the condition that the image data to be preliminarily transferred this time is moving image data (step S1013: YES), the moving image data is instructed to be decoded to the moving image decoder 95 of the effecting LSI 85 (step S1013: YES). Step S1014). In this decoding instruction, information for enabling the moving picture decoder 95 to specify the area in which the moving image data to be subjected to the current decoding instruction is stored in the data storage area 123, and the moving picture data in the register 93. The moving picture decoder 95 is provided with information for enabling the moving picture decoder 95 to specify an area for storing the decoded image data obtained by decoding the moving picture data in the development area 119. Thereby, the moving image decoder 95 performs decoding processing on the moving image data that is the object of the decoding instruction, and the decoded image data created by the decoding processing is placed in the area designated in the moving image development area 119. Written.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1013, or if the process of step S1014 is executed, an address information rewrite process is executed (step S1015). FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing address information rewriting processing.

  In the rewriting process of the address information, the image data that is the subject of advance transfer this time is the image data set in correspondence with the first display order priority data in the drawing list, and the decoded image as the previous display order priority data. It is determined whether the data is any of the set image data (step S1101). If an affirmative determination is made in step S1101, the identification information corresponding to the type of the data storage area 123 in which the image data is currently stored is added to the address information corresponding to the image data that is the subject of the previous transfer in the drawing list. Is overwritten (step S1102).

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1101, the data indicating that the offset value for the identification information of the data storage area 123 to which the image data corresponding to the immediately preceding display order priority data has been transferred in advance is “1”, In the drawing list, it is written in the address information corresponding to the image data to be pre-transferred this time. In this way, it is possible to reduce the processing load for rewriting the address information by writing the data indicating that the offset value is “1” instead of writing the identification information. . On the other hand, for image data set in correspondence with the first display order priority data in the drawing list, since no image data has been set before that, the identification information is overwritten on the address information as described above. Since the decoded image data is stored in the moving image development area 119 in the register 93, the address information of the decoded image data is set to the address of the corresponding area in the moving image development area 119. Therefore, since the address information cannot be specified by the offset value for the image data in which the decoded image data is set in the immediately preceding display order priority data, the identification information is overwritten on the address information as described above.

  Returning to the description of the pre-transfer process (FIG. 29), when an affirmative determination is made in step S1003, or after the address information rewriting process is executed in step S1015, one drawing list is processed in the current processing round. On the condition that the advance transfer is completed (step S1016: YES), the advance transfer completion process is executed (step S1017). In the advance transfer completion process, the drawing list for which advance transfer has been completed this time is stored in the storage areas 122a to 122t (see FIG. 23) to be stored this time in the post-transfer storage area 122 in the register 93. As a result, the drawing list is subsequently subjected to drawing processing by the 2D control unit 96 or drawing processing by the 3D control unit 97. Further, in the advance transfer completion process, when there is a drawing list for which the pre-transfer is not completed in the storage area 121 for the transfer before the transfer in the register 93, a new drawing list is created from the first storage area 121a before the transfer. And a process for shifting the drawing list between the first to twentieth storage areas 121a to 121t in the storage area 121 for before transfer.

<Effects of Configuration Regarding Handling of Drawing List in Effect LSI 85>
By transferring the image data stored in advance in the memory module 83 to the pre-transfer area 86a of the VRAM 86, the image data is read directly from the memory module 83 when the image data is used in the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97. Instead of reading from the advance transfer area 86a. In this case, if the predetermined image data is the target of the transfer instruction to the pre-transfer area 86a, if the predetermined image data is not stored in the pre-transfer area 86a, the pre-transfer area is read from the memory module 83. If predetermined image data is read to 86a and the predetermined image data is already stored in the pre-transfer area 86a, the predetermined image data is not transferred from the memory module 83. This makes it possible to prevent further transfer of the predetermined image data from the memory module 83 even though the predetermined image data is already stored in the advance transfer area 86a. It becomes possible to increase the efficiency of reading image data from the module 83.

  When a transfer instruction is issued for image data that has already been read in any data storage area 123 of the pre-transfer area 86a, the image data is copied between the data storage areas 123 of the pre-transfer area 86a. The As a result, the image data can be stored in the data storage area 123 designated as the transfer instruction while further reading of the image data from the memory module 83 is not required.

  A search table 125 in which data corresponding to the type of image data stored in each data storage area 123 of the pre-transfer area 86a is set is provided. By referring to the search table 125, a transfer instruction is provided. It is specified whether or not the image data that is the target of the storage is stored in any of the data storage areas 123 of the advance transfer area 86a. As a result, it is possible to efficiently specify whether or not the image data that is the target of the transfer instruction has already been read out to the advance transfer area 86a.

  When image data is transferred to one of the data storage areas 123 in the advance transfer area 86a, the correspondence between the data storage area 123 that is the transfer destination and the type of image data is reflected. The contents of the search table 125 are updated. As a result, the contents of the search table 125 can be made to correspond to the latest storage state of the advance transfer area 86a.

  In the drawing list, an address ID for specifying an area where the image data is stored in the memory module 83 is set as information corresponding to the image data to be used. The memory module 83 is set in the advance transfer control unit 94. When the image data is transferred to the pre-transfer area 86a, the memory module 83 identifies the area where the image data is stored using the address ID. In this case, information set as the address ID is set in the search table 125 as information for specifying the type of image data stored in the data storage area 123. As a result, the address ID provided in the drawing list is used to specify whether or not the image data subject to the transfer instruction is stored in the pre-transfer area 86a using the search table 125. Can be used as is. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration when performing the identification.

  In the drawing list provided from the CPU 82 for rendering, in a configuration in which a plurality of address IDs corresponding to the areas stored in the memory module 83 are set in association with one image data to be used, the data The information set in the search table 125 as information for specifying the type of image data stored in the storage area 123 is only the address ID corresponding to the start address. As a result, it is possible to suppress the amount of information for specifying the type of image data stored in the data storage area 123 in the search table 125, and whether the image data is stored in the advance transfer area 86a. It is possible to reduce the processing load when referring to the search table 125 to specify whether or not.

  The image data necessary for starting the effect for the game round is periodically read out to the advance transfer area 86a during the demonstration display, and at the timing before the opening / closing execution mode ends, the advance transfer area 86a. To be read. Thereby, even when the image data pre-transferred to the data storage area 123 of the pre-transfer area 86a is sequentially erased with the pre-transfer of other image data, the timing for starting the effect for the game round is started. In FIG. 2, the image data necessary for starting the game round effect has already been read into the data storage area 123. As a result, even if the configuration requires a certain period of time to read out the image data necessary for starting the effect for the game round from the memory module 83, the effect of the game round for the effect of the readout period of the image data. It is possible to prevent an event that the start of the production is delayed.

  When the image data is transferred from the memory module 83 to the pre-transfer area 86a of the VRAM 86 in accordance with the address ID set in the drawing list provided from the rendering CPU 82, the pre-transfer control unit 94 displays the image in the pre-transfer area 86a. Identification information for specifying an area in which data is stored is set in the drawing list. Thereby, since it is not necessary to set both the address ID and the identification information in the drawing list from the beginning, it is possible to suppress the amount of information in the drawing list transmitted from the effect CPU 82. Further, when the image data is actually transferred to the pre-transfer area 86a, the identification information corresponding to the area of the pre-transfer area 86a to which the image data is transferred is set in the drawing list. Reliability can be increased.

  When the image data is transferred to the pre-transfer area 86a in accordance with the drawing list address ID provided from the rendering CPU 82, the identification information corresponding to the area of the pre-transfer area 86a to which the image data has been transferred is displayed. It is set as address information of the drawing list so as to overwrite the address ID. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of information in the drawing list provided to the 2D control unit 96 or the 3D control unit 97 after the transfer of image data is completed.

  When the transfer of the image data is completed, the identification information overwritten on the address information in the drawing list has a smaller amount of information than the address ID set in the drawing list from the beginning. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load when the advance transfer control unit 94 overwrites the identification information on the address information.

  The register 93 stores a pre-transfer storage area 121 for storing the drawing list provided from the rendering CPU 82, and a post-transfer storage area 122 for storing the drawing list for which identification information has been set by the pre-transfer controller 94. And are provided separately. As a result, the area in which the drawing list provided from the CPU 82 for rendering and the drawing list in which the pre-transfer of the image data is completed and the identification information is set is clearly distinguished. It becomes possible to distinguish clearly.

  Decoded image data created by executing decoding processing on moving image data is stored in a moving image development area 119 in the register 93. In this case, the decoded image data is excluded from the object of the advance transfer to the advance transfer area 86a by the advance transfer control unit 94 and the setting process of the identification information to the address information corresponding to the decoded image data is not performed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the pre-transfer control unit 94 from performing wasteful information setting for the address information of the drawing list.

  In address information corresponding to image data whose display order priority data is “1” or later in the drawing list and the image data corresponding to the immediately preceding display order priority data is not decoded image data, the offset value is “1”. ”Is written. As a result, the processing load for rewriting the address information can be reduced.

  In the configuration in which the image data is stored over a plurality of areas in the VRAM 86, when the transfer of the image data to the VRAM 86 is completed, identification information corresponding to the plurality of areas is set in the address information of the drawing list. In this case, since the plurality of areas in the VRAM 86 are specified as a group of storage areas using the identification information, the advance transfer control unit 94 is compared with a configuration in which all addresses corresponding to the plurality of areas are set. The amount of information set in the address information of the drawing list can be suppressed.

  In order to display an image at one update timing, a plurality of drawing lists are provided from the effect CPU 82 to the effect LSI 85. As a result, it is possible to prevent the amount of information in one drawing list provided from the rendering CPU 82 from becoming extremely large, and various information is mixed in one drawing list. It is possible to prevent the processing load on the effect LSI 85 from increasing.

  Information necessary for causing the 2D control unit 96 to execute 2D drawing processing is provided from the rendering CPU 82 as a 2D drawing list, and information necessary for causing the 3D control unit 97 to execute 3D drawing processing is for 3D. The rendering CPU 82 provides the drawing list. This makes it possible to identify whether the image data to be used corresponds to 2D drawing processing or 3D drawing processing for each drawing list. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load when the type of image data is specified in the effect LSI 85.

  If the number of 2D image data to be used at one update timing is equal to or larger than the reference number, the 2D image data is set in a distributed manner in a plurality of 2D drawing lists. When the number of 3D image data to be used is equal to or more than the reference number at one update timing, the 3D image data is set in a distributed manner in a plurality of 3D drawing lists. Thereby, the information amount of one drawing list provided from the rendering CPU 82 can be suppressed to a certain amount of information, and the transmission period of one drawing list is prevented from becoming extremely long. Is possible.

  Even when a plurality of 2D drawing lists or a plurality of 3D drawing lists are provided to display an image at one update timing, the plurality of 2D drawing lists or the plurality of 3D drawing lists are one. The creation completion data for enabling the effecting LSI 85 to specify that it is used at the update timing is set in the 2D drawing list in the last order or the 3D drawing list in the last order. As a result, it is possible for the effecting LSI 85 to recognize that the plurality of 2D drawing lists or the plurality of 3D drawing lists are for displaying an image at one update timing.

  The function of pre-transferring image data according to the drawing list provided from the rendering CPU 82 is assigned to the pre-transfer control unit 94, and the function of creating drawing data according to the drawing list is the 2D control unit 96 or 3D control unit 97. Assigned to. As a result, it is possible to distribute the processing load as compared with a configuration in which these processes are collectively executed in one control unit.

  The 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97 execute the drawing process using the drawing list in which the advance transfer of the image data is completed in the advance transfer control unit 94. This makes it possible to distribute the functions of each process to a plurality of control means without providing a plurality of the same drawing list from the rendering CPU 82.

<Configuration related to transfer controller 92>
Next, a configuration for transferring data in the transfer controller 92 of the effect LSI 85 will be described.

  As described above, the image data is pre-transferred from the memory module 83 to the pre-transfer area 86a of the VRAM 86 based on the control of the pre-transfer control unit 94, and the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97 transfer the VRAM 86 in advance when creating the drawing data. The image data is read from the area 86a, and the moving picture decoder 95 reads the moving image data from the pre-transfer area 86a of the VRAM 86 at the time of the moving image data decoding process. In addition to reading the image data, the light emission decoder 101 preliminarily transfers the light emission data from the memory module 83 to the VRAM 86 and reads the preliminarily transmitted light emission data from the VRAM 86 when the light emission data is decoded. In addition, the sound decoder 103 pre-transfers the sound output data from the memory module 83 to the VRAM 86 and reads the pre-transferred sound output data from the VRAM 86 when the sound output data is decoded. The process of reading these various data is executed in the transfer controller 92.

  Here, as already described, in the drawing list output from the effect CPU 82 to the effect LSI 85, the address ID corresponding to the physical address of the memory module 83 in which the image data is stored is set as the address information of the image data. The physical address itself is not set. In the memory module 83, data other than image data is set as already described, and there is an area where no data is stored. Then, a part of the area of the memory module 83 is used as an area for storing image data, and the address range of the area storing the image data is accordingly the entire address range of the memory module 83. Narrower range. In such a configuration, the address ID specified as the address information in the drawing list is information for specifying only the area where the image data is stored in the memory module 83. In this case, the number of address IDs that can be used is smaller than the number of physical addresses of the memory module 83. Accordingly, the data capacity for designating one address ID is also the data capacity for designating the physical address. Smaller than. Since the data capacity for designating one address ID is reduced, the data capacity of the address information specified in the drawing list can be reduced, and as a result, the data capacity of the drawing list can be reduced. Is possible.

  Since the advance transfer control unit 94 uses the address ID as information for specifying the address of the area where the image data is stored in the memory module 83, the image data from the memory module 83 to the advance transfer area 86a of the VRAM 86 is used. Is sent to the transfer controller 92, an address ID is provided to the transfer controller 92. As shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 31, the transfer controller 92 is set with a file table 126 that defines the correspondence between the address ID and the physical address. The file table 126 has a one-to-one correspondence with the address IDs (ID (0), ID (1), ID (2),..., ID (n + 2)) in the physical address (AD (0 ), AD (1), AD (2),..., AD (n + 2)) are set. The transfer controller 92 refers to the file table 126 to identify the physical address of the memory module 83 corresponding to the address ID specified by the advance transfer control unit 94, and reads the image data from the area of the identified physical address. I do.

  The address conversion as described above in the transfer controller 92 is performed not only for the memory module 83 but also for the VRAM 86. This will be described below. FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the VRAM 86 and the index area.

  As shown in FIG. 32, the VRAM 86 is partitioned into a plurality of index areas 127a to 127c. Specifically, it is divided into three areas, a first index area 127a, a second index area 127b, and a third index area 127c. The area included in the first index area 127a is an area where physical addresses are continuous in the area of the VRAM 86, and the area included in the second index area 127b is an area where physical addresses are continuous in the area of the VRAM 86. The area that is not included in the first index area 127a and that is included in the third index area 127c is an area in which physical addresses are continuous in the area of the VRAM 86, and the first index area 127a and the second index area 127b. This area is not included in the area. The final address of the area included in the first index area 127a is continuous with the start address of the area included in the second index area 127b, and the final address of the area included in the second index area 127b. The address is continuous with the start address of the area included in the third index area 127c. The first index area 127a is used as an area to which light emission data is transferred in advance, and the second index area 127b is used as an area to which sound output data is transferred in advance. The third index area 127c is used as an area to which image data is transferred in advance. That is, the advance transfer area 86a of the VRAM 86 is the third index area 127c.

  FIG. 33 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the index table 128 that defines the correspondence between the index areas 127 a to 127 c and the physical addresses of the VRAM 86. The index table 128 is set in the transfer controller 92.

  As shown in FIG. 33, identification information is set in each of the first index area 127a, the second index area 127b, and the third index area 127c. The identification information of the first index area 127a is used when the light emission data is read out to the VRAM 86 by the light emission decoder 101 and the transfer controller 92 is designated as the read destination area of the light emission data in the VRAM 86. When the data for light emission is read out from the VRAM 86 in the decoder 101, it is used when the transfer controller 92 is instructed of the area from which the data for light emission is read out in the VRAM 86. The identification information of the second index area 127b is used when the sound decoder 103 reads the sound output data to the VRAM 86 and designates the read destination area of the sound output data in the VRAM 86 to the transfer controller 92. When the sound output data is read from the VRAM 86 by the decoder 103, it is used when the transfer controller 92 is instructed of the area from which the sound output data is read in the VRAM 86. The identification information of the third index area 127c is used when the pre-transfer control unit 94 reads image data to the VRAM 86 and instructs the transfer controller 92 to read out the area of the image data in the VRAM 86, and also performs 2D control. When the image data is read from the VRAM 86 in the unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97, it is used when the transfer controller 92 is instructed to read the area from which the image data is read in the VRAM 86. Further, when the pre-transfer control unit 94 copies image data between the data storage areas 123 in the pre-transfer area 86a of the VRAM 86, it is used when the transfer controller 92 is instructed to store the image data storage source and storage destination areas. Is done.

  Each identification information of the first index area 127a, the second index area 127b, and the third index area 127c is associated with areas of a plurality of continuous physical addresses in the VRAM 86. For example, the identification information of “0” in the first index area 127a is associated with areas of five consecutive physical addresses A (0) to A (4), and “0” in the second index area 127b. Is associated with areas of five consecutive physical addresses A (640) to A (644), and the identification information of “0” in the third index area 127c is A (1920) to A ( 1924) are associated with areas of five consecutive physical addresses. The number of physical addresses associated with each piece of identification information is always 5 and constant. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the number of physical addresses associated with the identification information may be different for each type of the index areas 127a to 127c.

  As described above, when there are a plurality of physical addresses associated with one piece of identification information, when the transfer controller 92 is instructed to read data from the VRAM 86 or read data from the VRAM 86, It is possible to specify an area corresponding to a plurality of physical addresses only by specifying one identification information without specifying a plurality of physical addresses. As a result, it is possible to suppress the data capacity necessary for designating the area.

  While the number of identification information set in the first index area 127a is 128, the number of identification information set in the second index area 127b and the identification set in the third index area 127c The number of information is 256 each. That is, the number of set identification information differs depending on the types of index areas 127a to 127c. Since the number of physical addresses associated with each identification information is the same as described above, the physical address of the VRAM 86 assigned to each index area 127a to 127c according to the type of the index area 127a to 127c. The total number of is different. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of pieces of identification information set in each index area 127a to 127c may be the same, and the physical address of the VRAM 86 assigned to each index area 127a to 127c. The total number may be the same.

  In the configuration in which the index areas 127a to 127c are set as described above, when the transfer controller 92 receives an instruction to read data from the VRAM 86 or an instruction to read data from the VRAM 86, the transfer controller 92 determines which of the types of objects to which the instruction is issued. The index areas 127a to 127c are identified as read targets. Specifically, the transfer controller 92 specifies the first index area 127a as a read target when receiving an instruction from the light emission decoder 101, and the second index area when receiving an instruction from the sound decoder 103. 127b is specified as a read target, and when an instruction is received from any of the pre-transfer control unit 94, the 2D control unit 96, and the 3D control unit 97, the third index area 127c is specified as a read target. Although the configuration for specifying the target receiving the instruction in the transfer controller 92 is arbitrary, for example, information for identifying the side giving the instruction is set in the data for giving the instruction to the transfer controller 92. Configuration is conceivable. Since the side giving the instruction to the transfer controller 92 specifies only the identification information without specifying the type of the index areas 127a to 127c, it is necessary for the side giving the instruction to specify an area for the transfer controller 92. Data capacity can be reduced.

  Hereinafter, transfer execution processing executed in the transfer controller 92 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Note that the transfer controller 92 is provided as a dedicated circuit with a preset circuit for executing the transfer execution process. However, the transfer controller 92 is not limited to this, and the program and data stored in the memory module 83 or the like are stored. The configuration may be provided as a general-purpose circuit that uses the transfer execution process.

  In the transfer execution process, when a data read instruction is received from the memory module 83 (step S1201: YES), if the read instruction is received from the pre-transfer control unit 94 (step S1202: YES), The physical address of the memory module 83 corresponding to the address ID received from the transfer control unit 94 is specified by referring to the file table 126 (step S1203). On the other hand, when a read instruction is received from a device other than the advance transfer control unit 94, the physical address of the memory module 83 is received from the read instruction side.

  Thereafter, the type of the index areas 127a to 127c is specified from the type of the target for which the reading instruction is issued, and the identification information received from the side that issues the reading instruction is specified. Then, the physical address group of the VRAM 86 corresponding to the combination of the type of the index areas 127a to 127c and the identification information is specified from the index table 128 (step S1204).

  Thereafter, a read start process from the memory module 83 is executed (step S1205). In this case, the memory module 83 transmits to the memory module 83 an address signal for specifying the physical address of the area where the data to be read is stored and a data read instruction signal. As a result, the data to be read this time is output from the memory module 83. Then, the output data is written in the area of the VRAM 86 corresponding to the physical address group specified in step S1204.

  When reading of the data to be read this time is completed (step S1206: YES), “1” is set to the corresponding read completion flag provided in the register 93 (step S1207). As a result, the side giving the read instruction specifies that the read-out of the data to be read into the VRAM 86 has been completed. When it is specified that the reading of the data to be read is completed on the side where the read instruction is given, the read completion flag is cleared to “0”.

  In the transfer execution process, when an instruction to read data from the VRAM 86 is received (step S1208: YES), the type of the index areas 127a to 127c is specified from the type of the target to which the reading instruction is given and the reading instruction is issued. Identify the identification information received from the other party. Then, the physical address group of the VRAM 86 corresponding to the combination of the type of the index areas 127a to 127c and the identification information is specified from the index table 128 (step S1209). In addition, the information of the area to be written received from the side instructing the reading is specified (step S1210). In this case, the register 93 is an area to be written. When image data is copied between the data storage areas 123 in the pre-transfer area 86a under the control of the pre-transfer control unit 94, the area to be written is the data storage area 123, that is, the third index area 127c. .

  Thereafter, a read start process from the VRAM 86 is executed (step S1211). In this case, an address signal for specifying the physical address group specified in step S1209 and a data read instruction signal are transmitted to the VRAM 86. As a result, the data to be read this time is output from the VRAM 86. Then, the output data is written in the write target area specified in step S1210.

  When the reading of the current read target data is completed (step S1212: YES), “1” is set to the corresponding read completion flag provided in the register 93 (step S1213). As a result, the side giving the read instruction specifies that the read-out of the data to be read from the VRAM 86 has been completed. When it is specified that the reading of the data to be read is completed on the side where the read instruction is given, the read completion flag is cleared to “0”.

<Effect of Configuration Regarding Transfer Controller 92>
Each area of the VRAM 86 is divided into a plurality of index areas 127a to 127c, and each area included in each of the index areas 127a to 127c is specified using identification information set for each of the index areas 127a to 127c. Is possible. When the control execution unit such as the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97 needs to read data from the VRAM 86, the type of the index areas 127 a to 127 c and the index areas 127 a to 127 c are stored in the transfer controller 92. The transfer controller 92 specifies the area of the VRAM 86 in which the data to be read is stored by designating the identification information set in. As a result, it is possible to reduce the amount of information required for designating an area from which data is read in the control execution unit.

  Further, one identification information in each of the index areas 127a to 127c is information for designating a plurality of areas of the VRAM 86 collectively. As a result, it is possible to reduce the amount of information required for designating the area from which data is to be read, compared to the case where the addresses are designated for each of the plurality of areas and data is read from the plurality of areas.

  A plurality of areas of the VRAM 86 included in one index area 127a to 127c are areas where addresses are continuous. A plurality of areas of the VRAM 86 specified by one identification information are areas where addresses are continuous. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load for specifying the area of the VRAM 86 designated by the type and identification information of the index areas 127a to 127c.

  The correspondence relationship of the area of the VRAM 86 with respect to the combination of the type information of the index areas 127a to 127c and the identification information of the index areas 127a to 127c is set in the index table 128, and the transfer controller 92 refers to the index table 128. Thus, the area of the VRAM 86 corresponding to the combination is specified. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load for specifying the area of the VRAM 86 from which data is to be read in the transfer controller 92.

  A plurality of index areas 127a to 127c are set. As a result, the index areas 127a to 127c can be set in correspondence with the respective purposes. Further, the number of areas of the VRAM 86 included in the index areas 127a to 127c is different. As a result, the sizes of the index areas 127a to 127c can be made suitable for each purpose.

<Configuration for Displaying Images on Multiple Display Devices 41, 43, 44>
Next, a configuration for collectively updating images in the plurality of display devices 41, 43, and 44 when the image update timing comes will be described.

  As described above, the image is updated in all of the main display device 41, the first sub display device 43, and the second sub display device 44 at each update timing. In order to update the image, a rendering list is output from the rendering CPU 82 to the rendering LSI 85. However, the rendering list may not be created individually corresponding to each of the display devices 41, 43, and 44. Instead, the image data corresponding to the main display device 41, the first sub display device 43, and the second sub display device 44 are collectively set in one or two drawing lists. As a result, the number of drawing lists can be reduced as compared with a configuration in which drawing lists are individually created for each of the display devices 41, 43, and 44.

  FIG. 35 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of one drawing list in which image data corresponding to each of the display devices 41, 43, 44 is set in an aggregated manner. As shown in FIG. 35, the first background image data for the main, the first background image data for the first sub, and the first for the second sub, as the image data for the background image that is the target of the drawing instruction. Background image data, second background image data for main, second background image data for first sub, second background image data for second sub, third background image data for main, Third background image data for one sub and third background image data for the second sub are set. The first to third background image data for main are image data for displaying a background image on the main display device 41, and the first to third background image data for the first sub are displayed on the first sub display device 43. This is image data for displaying a background image. The first to third background image data for the second sub are image data for displaying the background image on the second sub display device 44. Further, the image data corresponding to the image displayed so that the first background image data is present on the farthest side in each of the main, first sub, and second sub, and the second background image data Is image data corresponding to an image displayed so as to exist on the near side, and image data corresponding to an image displayed so that the third background image data exists on the near side. .

  As already described, display order priority data indicating the drawing order of image data, parameter information, and address information are set in the drawing list for each piece of image data to be drawn. However, in a configuration in which image data corresponding to two or more display devices 41, 43, 44 is set for one drawing list, the image data specified in the drawing list is any display device 41, 43. , 44 is not set in the drawing list. Instead, the display order priority data, which is data for indicating the drawing order of the image data, is used to specify the types of the display devices 41, 43, and 44 to which each image data is to be drawn.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 35, for image data such as main first to third background image data corresponding to the main display device 41, the value of the display order priority data is the first display target reference value. It is set to less than “100”. For image data such as first to third background image data for the first sub corresponding to the first sub display device 43, the value of the display order priority data is not less than “100” which is the first display target reference value. The second display target reference value is set to less than “200”. Further, for image data such as the first to third background image data for the second sub corresponding to the second sub display device 44, the value of the display order priority data is set to “200” or more which is the second display target reference value. Has been.

  The 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97 of the effecting LSI 85 grasp the value of the display order priority data in relation to the first display target reference value and the second display target reference value, so that the drawing instruction target is displayed in the drawing list. It is possible to grasp which display device 41, 43, 44 corresponds to the image data. As described above, the display order priority data is used to specify the type of the display devices 41, 43, 44 for which each image data is to be rendered, so that the image data corresponds to any display device 41, 43, 44. It is not necessary to set dedicated data indicating whether or not the drawing list is set. As a result, the data structure of the drawing list can be simplified. Incidentally, the maximum number of image data set as a drawing target on the main display device 41 in one drawing list is equal to or less than the first display target reference value (100 or less), and the first number in one drawing list is the first. The maximum number of image data set as a drawing target on the sub display device 43 is less than or equal to the difference between the second display target reference value and the first display target reference value (100 or less).

  The drawing data as described above is created by the drawing list output process (FIG. 27) in the rendering CPU 82. As described above, the information to be referred to for creating the drawing list is the execution target table for display control. Is set to The effect CPU 82 derives various data to be set in the drawing list by referring to the display control execution target table in the display control task process (step S506) in the V interrupt process (FIG. 14).

  FIG. 36A and FIG. 36B are explanatory diagrams for explaining an execution target table for display control. As shown in FIG. 36A, in the execution target table for display control, task content information is set in correspondence with pointer information on a one-to-one basis. The pointer information is information for the effect CPU 82 to specify which task content information should be referred to in each processing time in the display control task process (step S506). When a new display control execution target table becomes a use target, the information of the task content corresponding to the pointer information “0” is referred to, and then the display control task processing (step S506) is performed. Each time a new time is executed, the pointer information to be referred to is updated so that 1 is added, and the task processing for display control is performed by referring to the information of the task contents corresponding to the pointer information after the update. Is executed. In the task content information, information necessary for deriving the type of image data required to display an image for one frame at the corresponding update timing and various parameters applied to the image data is set. ing.

  As already described, since the image is updated in all of the main display device 41, the first sub display device 43, and the second sub display device 44 at each update timing, the task content information corresponding to each pointer information is included. The types of image data necessary for displaying an image for one frame at the corresponding update timing, and the image data for all of the main display device 41, the first sub display device 43, and the second sub display device 44 Information necessary for deriving various parameters to be applied to is set. FIG. 36B is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of background image data set as the content of one task in a predetermined display control execution target table.

  In the task content information, each image data is not set as it is, but information on an address ID corresponding to each image data is set as information on the type of image data. This address ID information is set in the address information of the drawing list. In addition, a combination of display target data, display order data, and other information is set for each piece of image data type information. The other information is information used for deriving various parameters applied to each image data.

  Display target data and display order data are information used to derive display order priority data in the drawing list. More specifically, the display target data is data for the effect CPU 82 to specify whether the display device to be displayed is the main display device 41, the first sub display device 43, or the second sub display device 44. is there. Specifically, “0” of the display target data corresponds to the main display device 41, “1” of the display target data corresponds to the first sub display device 43, and “2” of the display target data. Corresponds to the second sub-display device 44. The display order data is data for the rendering CPU 82 to specify the drawing order in each of the display devices 41, 43, 44 to be displayed. In each display device 41, 43, 44, “0” of the display order data is image data corresponding to an image displayed so as to exist at the innermost side, and “1” of the display order data is “1”. This indicates that the image data corresponds to the image displayed as if it were present on the front side, and the display order data “2” corresponds to the image displayed as if present on the front side. Indicates image data.

  The effect CPU 82 sets the display order data as it is as the display order priority data of the drawing list for the image data whose display target data is “0”. As a result, in the drawing list shown in FIG. 35, values such as “0”, “1”, and “2” are set as display order priority data for the first to third background image data for main use. Further, the rendering CPU 82 adds a value obtained by adding “100” that is the first display target reference value to the value of the display order data as the display order priority data of the drawing list for the image data whose display target data is “1”. Set. Thereby, in the drawing list shown in FIG. 35, values such as “100”, “101”, and “102” are set as display order priority data for the first to third background image data for the first sub. Further, the effect CPU 82 adds a value obtained by adding “200” that is the second display target reference value to the value of the display order data as the display order priority data of the drawing list for the image data whose display target data is “2”. Set. Thereby, in the drawing list shown in FIG. 35, values such as “200”, “201”, and “202” are set as display order priority data corresponding to the first to third background image data for the second sub.

  As described above, in the task content information, display target data for specifying the type of the display devices 41, 43, and 44 to be drawn, and display for specifying the drawing order of the image data in each of the display devices 41, 43, and 44 are displayed. Order data is set. Thereby, in the process of creating the display target table for display control in the design stage of the pachinko machine 10, the designer can select the types of the display devices 41, 43, 44 to be displayed and the image data in the display devices 41, 43, 44. It is only necessary to set each piece of information as it is while grasping the drawing order, and it is not necessary to know the offset value corresponding to each display device 41, 43, 44 in the display order priority data of the drawing list. Therefore, the design work can be facilitated and the design work can be made more efficient.

  In this way, even when display target data and display order data are set instead of setting display order priority data in the design stage, the display device 41, which is a display target in the drawing list, 43 and 44 are distinguished using display order priority data. Accordingly, it is not necessary to set dedicated data indicating which display device 41, 43, or 44 the image data corresponds to in the drawing list, so that the data structure of the drawing list can be simplified. Become.

  Hereinafter, processing contents for setting the display order priority data of the drawing list using the display target data and the display order data will be described. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing a drawing list creation process executed by the effect CPU 82. The drawing list creation process is executed when one drawing list is created in each of steps S909, S911, S915, and S917 in the drawing list output process (FIG. 27).

  First, a writing target pointer update process in the drawing list to be created this time is executed (step S1301). The writing target pointer is information that is referred to in order to specify an area for setting display order priority data, parameter information, and address information in the drawing list to be created this time. When the creation of a new drawing list is started, the pointer to be written is updated so as to have a value corresponding to the area in the first order in the drawing list. Thereafter, the process of step S1301 is executed. Each time the write target pointer value is incremented by one.

  Thereafter, among the image data to be set in the current drawing list, image data in which the display target data set in the contents of the current task in the execution target table for display control is “0”. Whether or not exists is determined (step S1302). Specifically, if the 2D drawing list is to be created, the display target data is “0” in the various image data specified in step S907 of the drawing list output process (FIG. 27). It is determined whether or not the present image data exists. If the 3D drawing list is to be created, the display target data is “0” in the various image data specified in step S913 of the drawing list output process (FIG. 27). It is determined whether image data exists. These processing contents are the same in step S1304 described later.

  When there is image data whose display target data is “0” (step S1302: YES), display order data corresponding to the image data is set as display order priority data (step S1303). Specifically, if there is only one image data whose display target data is “0”, the display order of the image data set in the contents of the current task in the display control execution target table is displayed. Data is set as display order priority data for the area corresponding to the current pointer to be written. If there are a plurality of image data whose display target data is “0”, the image data with the smallest display order data is selected from the image data, and the corresponding image data is selected. The display order data to be set is set as the display order priority data of the area corresponding to the current writing target pointer.

  When there is no image data whose display target data is “0” (step S1302: NO), the execution target table for display control is included in the image data that is the setting target of the current drawing list. In step S1304, it is determined whether there is image data whose display target data set in the content of the current task is “1”. If there is image data whose display target data is “1” (step S1304: YES), the first display target reference value “100” is set for the display order data corresponding to the image data. The added value is set as display order priority data (step S1305). Specifically, if there is only one image data whose display target data is “1”, that image data is displayed in the display order set in the contents of the current task in the display control execution target table. A value obtained by adding “100”, which is the first display target reference value, to the data is set as display order priority data for the area corresponding to the current writing target pointer. If there are a plurality of image data whose display target data is “1”, the image data with the smallest display order data is selected from the image data, and the corresponding image data is selected. A value obtained by adding “100” which is the first display target reference value to the display order data to be set is set as the display order priority data of the area corresponding to the current writing target pointer.

  If there is no image data whose display target data is “1” (step S1304: NO), it means that only image data whose display target data is “2” exists. In this case, a process of setting a value obtained by adding “200”, which is the second display target reference value, to the display order data corresponding to the image data is set as display order priority data (step S1306). Specifically, if there is only one image data whose display target data is “2”, the display order of the current task in the display control execution target table is set for that image data. A value obtained by adding “200” that is the second display target reference value to the data is set as display order priority data of the area corresponding to the current writing target pointer. If there are a plurality of image data whose display target data is “2”, the image data having the smallest display order data is selected from the image data, and the corresponding image data is selected. A value obtained by adding the second display target reference value “200” to the display order data to be set is set as display order priority data for the area corresponding to the current writing target pointer.

  According to the above processing, the display order priority data corresponding to each of the display devices 41, 43, and 44 is obtained in a certain processing mode using the display target data and the display order data set in the task contents. It can be set in the drawing list. Further, the display target data is set to the drawing list in order from the image data having the smallest value, so that the drawing list is set in the order of the main display device 41 → the first sub display device 43 → the second sub display device 44. Is possible.

  In the drawing list creation processing, when any one of steps S1303, S1305, and S1306 is executed, parameter information setting processing is executed (step S1307), and address information setting processing is executed (step S1308). ). In the parameter information setting process, the parameter information derived in the immediately previous display control task process (step S506) for the image data that is the target of setting the display order priority data this time corresponds to the current write target pointer. Set as area parameter information. In the address information setting process, the address ID set in the contents of the current task in the display control execution target table for the image data for which the current display order priority data is to be set is used as the current write target pointer. Is set as address information of the area corresponding to.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether there is another image data to be written (step S1309). Specifically, if a 2D drawing list is to be created, the image data specified in step S907 of the drawing list output process (FIG. 27), and this one 2D drawing list. It is determined whether or not there is image data that is not the execution target of steps S1302 to S1308 among the various image data that is the setting target. Also, if the 3D drawing list is to be created, the various image data specified in step S913 of the drawing list output process (FIG. 27) are set in the current 3D drawing list. It is determined whether or not there is image data that is not the execution target of steps S1302 to S1308 among the various image data that is the target. If there is image data that is not the execution target (step S1309: YES), after executing the write target pointer update process (step S1301), the image data that is not the execution target is step S1302. Step S1308 is executed. As a result, the combination of the display order priority data, the parameter information, and the address information is set to one drawing list for all the image data to be set to the one drawing list this time. .

<Effect of Configuration for Displaying Images on Multiple Display Devices 41, 43, and 44>
In the configuration in which the main display device 41, the first sub display device 43, and the second sub display device 44 are provided, information for displaying an image on the plurality of display devices 41, 43, 44 includes one drawing list ( Hereinafter, the rendering CPU 82 provides the rendering LSI 85 with the rendering list in a state where the rendering list is also referred to as an aggregate rendering list. This makes it possible to reduce the number of drawing lists provided from the effect CPU 82 to the effect LSI 85 as compared to a configuration in which a draw list is provided individually for each of the plurality of display devices 41, 43, 44.

  Information for displaying an image on each of the display devices 41, 43, and 44 at the same update timing is aggregated and set in the aggregate drawing list. In this case, the rendering LSI 85 may handle all information set in the aggregate drawing list as information for displaying an image at one update timing, and corresponds to any update timing among a plurality of different update timings. There is no need to execute processing for determining whether the information is information. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the processing executed using the aggregate drawing list in the effect LSI 85.

  Image data designated as a target to be used using display order priority data for specifying the order of setting image data in the frame regions 114, 115, 117, and 118 by the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97 To which display device 41, 43, 44 corresponds. As a result, there is no need to set dedicated information for specifying the types of display devices 41, 43, and 44 to be set in the aggregate drawing list, so the number of types of information set in the aggregate drawing list is reduced. It becomes possible.

  The image data corresponding to the main display device 41 is set as display order priority data with a value less than the first display target reference value, and the image data corresponding to the first sub display device 43 is set as display order priority data as the first display target reference. A value that is greater than or equal to the value and less than the second display target reference value is set, and the image data corresponding to the second sub display device 44 is set to a value that is greater than or equal to the second display target reference value as display order priority data. As a result, in the configuration in which the type of the display devices 41, 43, 44 to be set is specified using the display order priority data, the image data specified as the use target is assigned to any display device 41, 43, 44. The correspondence is clearly distinguished in the display order priority data. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load for specifying the types of display devices 41, 43, 44 to be set in the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97.

  In the configuration in which the rendering CPU 82 creates a drawing list based on information set in the display control execution target table, the display order priority data is not set as it is in the display control execution target table. In the display target data corresponding to the type of the display device 41, 43, 44 to be set, and the plurality of types of image data to be used in the display device 41, 43, 44, the frame regions 114, 115, 117, The display order data corresponding to the setting order to 118 is set, and the display order priority data is derived using the display target data and the display order data. As a result, when the execution target table for display control is set at the design stage of the pachinko machine 10, the types of the display devices 41, 43, and 44 to be set and the plurality of display devices 41, 43, and 44 to be used. It is only necessary to set the setting order in the type of image data, and it is not necessary to set the final display order priority data. Therefore, the design work can be facilitated.

  For image data corresponding to the first sub display device 43, a value obtained by adding the first display target reference value to the display order data is derived as display order priority data, and an image corresponding to the second sub display device 44 is obtained. As for the data, a value obtained by adding the second display target reference value to the display order data is derived as the display order priority data. Thereby, the processing load for deriving the display order priority data can be reduced.

<Configuration related to display output to each sub display device 43, 44>
Next, a configuration for outputting an image signal to the first sub display device 43 and the second sub display device 44 will be described.

  As described above, the rendering LSI 85 is provided with the second display circuit 99 as a circuit for outputting an image signal to each of the first sub display device 43 and the second sub display device 44. FIG. 38 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration for outputting an image signal to each of the sub display devices 43 and 44. As shown in FIG. 38, the second display circuit 99 is provided with a first output unit 131 and a second output unit 132. The first output unit 131 outputs an image signal to the first sub display device 43, and the second output unit 132 outputs the image signal to the second sub display device 44. When outputting these image signals, among the first sub frame area 117 and the second sub frame area 118 provided in the register 93 of the effect LSI 85, the frame area 117, which is the output target of the current image signal, The drawing data created in 118 is referred to. In this case, only one sub first frame region 117 and one sub second frame region 118 are provided, and the sub buffer first frame region is adopted because the double buffer method is adopted as described above. 117 and the second frame area 118 for sub, the next update timing in the other frame area in the situation where the drawing signal is output to each of the sub display devices 43 and 44 based on the drawing data created in one frame area. Drawing data for displaying an image in is created. That is, an image for one frame on the first sub display device 43 is displayed and an image for one frame on the second sub display device 44 by one drawing data created in one frame region 117, 118. Is displayed.

  FIG. 39 shows a state in which one drawing data is created to display an image for one frame on each of the sub display devices 43 and 44, and each sub display device 43 using the one drawing data. , 44 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a state in which an image for one frame is displayed. In FIG. 39, only one image data is used to display an image for one frame on the first sub display device 43, and an image for one frame is displayed on the second sub display device 44. The case where only one piece of image data is used will be described, but the same applies to the case where a plurality of pieces of image data are used to display images for one frame on each of the sub display devices 43 and 44. .

  The data shown in FIG. 39A is data simply showing the image data 133 for displaying the image for one frame on the first sub display device 43, and the data shown in FIG. This is data that simply shows image data 134 for displaying an image for one frame on the sub display device 44. The image data 133 and 134 are stored in advance in the memory module 83 as described above, and the image data 133 and 134 exist as individual data in the state stored in the memory module 83. These image data 133 and 134 are image data for 2D images, and are set as rectangular data in which a plurality of pixels exist in the vertical and horizontal directions. In the following description, the image data 133 is referred to as first sub image data 133 and the image data 134 is referred to as second sub image data 134.

  FIG. 39 (c) is a diagram simply showing one frame region 117, 118 in which one drawing data for displaying an image for one frame is displayed on each of the sub display devices 43, 44. is there. Each of the frame regions 117 and 118 is set as a rectangular data area in which a plurality of dots exist in the vertical and horizontal directions. In this case, the number of dots in the vertical direction in the frame regions 117 and 118 corresponds to the number of dots in the vertical direction of the sub display devices 43 and 44 in a situation where the sub display devices 43 and 44 are arranged at the initial positions. Yes. Specifically, the number of dots in the vertical direction in the frame regions 117 and 118 is predetermined to the number of dots in the vertical direction of the sub display devices 43 and 44 in a situation where the sub display devices 43 and 44 are arranged at the initial positions. This is the same as the value obtained by integrating the number (specifically, “1”). The first sub display device 43 and the second sub display device 44 are display devices having the same number of dots, and both the first sub display device 43 and the second sub display device 44 are arranged at the initial position. , The sub-display devices 43 and 44 have the same number of dots in the vertical direction, and the sub-display devices 43 and 44 have the same number of dots in the horizontal direction.

  On the other hand, the number of dots in the horizontal direction in the frame regions 117 and 118 is equal to the number of dots in the horizontal direction of the first sub display device 43 and the second sub display device when the sub display devices 43 and 44 are arranged at the initial positions. This corresponds to the sum of 44 horizontal dot numbers. Specifically, the number of dots in the horizontal direction in the frame regions 117 and 118 is equal to the number of dots in the horizontal direction of the first sub display device 43 and the second number in the situation where the sub display devices 43 and 44 are arranged at the initial positions. This is equal to a value obtained by adding the predetermined number (specifically, “1”) to the sum of the number of dots in the horizontal direction of the sub display device 44.

  By setting the number of dots in the frame regions 117 and 118 as described above, drawing data for displaying an image for one frame on the first sub display device 43 and one frame for the second sub display device 44 are displayed. Both drawing data for displaying an image can be created in one frame region 117, 118.

  In detail about the setting mode of the first sub image data 133 and the second sub image data 134 in the frame regions 117 and 118, the first sub image data 133 has a plurality of dots in the vertical and horizontal directions as described above. Therefore, in the first sub image data 133, a plurality of vertical lines composed of a plurality of dots arranged in the vertical direction are juxtaposed in the horizontal direction as shown in FIG. Similarly, since the second sub image data 134 has a plurality of dots in the vertical and horizontal directions as described above, the second sub image data 134 is arranged in the vertical direction as shown in FIG. A plurality of vertical lines composed of a plurality of dots are juxtaposed in the horizontal direction. As shown in FIG. 39 (c), since the frame regions 117 and 118 have a plurality of dots in each of the vertical and horizontal directions as described above, a vertical line composed of a plurality of dots arranged in the vertical direction is in the horizontal direction. It will be arranged in parallel.

  In this configuration, the data of each vertical line of the first sub image data 133 is set by being distributed in the odd vertical lines set in the horizontal direction in the frame regions 117 and 118. In this case, the data of each vertical line in the first sub image data 133 does not break the arrangement order in the horizontal direction in the first sub image data 133, and the odd number of each in the horizontal direction in the frame regions 117 and 118. The vertical line is set. Further, the data of each vertical line of the second sub image data 134 is set by being distributed in the even vertical lines set in the horizontal direction in the frame regions 117 and 118. In this case, the data of each vertical line in the second sub image data 134 does not break the arrangement order in the horizontal direction in the second sub image data 134, and each even number in the horizontal direction in the frame regions 117 and 118. The vertical line is set.

  Image signals corresponding to data set in odd-numbered vertical lines in the frame regions 117 and 118 are output to the corresponding dots in the first sub display device 43 by the first output unit 131 of the second display circuit 99. The Further, the image signal corresponding to the data set in the even-numbered vertical lines in the frame regions 117 and 118 is received by the second output unit 132 of the second display circuit 99 in the corresponding dot in the second sub display device 44. Is output. As a result, the data corresponding to the image signal output to the first sub display device 43 becomes data as shown in FIG. 39D, and the data corresponding to the image signal output to the second sub display device 44 is as shown in FIG. The data is as shown in 39 (e).

  The output of the image signal to the first sub display device 43 and the second sub display device 44 in the second display circuit 99 is synchronized with the clock signal input to the second display circuit 99 from the clock circuit provided in the effect LSI 85. To be done. Specifically, the second display circuit 99 corresponds to an image corresponding to one dot existing in the odd-numbered vertical lines in the horizontal direction in the frame regions 117 and 118 with respect to one pulse signal received as a clock signal. A signal is output to the first sub display device 43, and an image signal corresponding to one dot arranged in a predetermined horizontal direction with respect to the one dot is output to the second sub display device 44. More specifically, the image signal corresponding to one dot existing at the upper left corner in the frame regions 117 and 118 in FIG. 39C at the output timing of the first image signal for the drawing data created in the frame regions 117 and 118. Is output to the first sub display device 43 and an image signal corresponding to one dot arranged in parallel to the right with respect to the one dot is output to the second sub display device 44. At the output timing of the next image signal, it corresponds to the odd-numbered dot in the horizontal direction among the two dots arranged in the right direction with respect to the two dots that are the output target of the image signal at the first output timing. The image signal is output to the first sub display device 43 and the image signal corresponding to the even-numbered dots is output to the second sub display device 44. Thereafter, after the output of the image signal for one line in the horizontal direction is completed, the image signal is to be output in an order of 2 dots in order from the left side for one line in the horizontal direction one stage below.

  The manner in which the image signal is output to each of the sub display devices 43 and 44 will be described while showing the relationship with the timing at which the image signal is output from the first display circuit 98 to the main display device 41. FIG. 40 is a time chart showing how image signals are output to the respective display devices 41, 43, 44. FIG. 40A shows the first display circuit 98 and the second display circuit 99 from the clock circuit of the effect LSI 85. FIG. 40B shows a period during which an image signal is output from the first display circuit 98 to the main display device 41, and FIG. 40C shows the second display circuit 99. FIG. 40D shows a period in which an image signal is output from the second display circuit 99 to the second sub display device 44. FIG.

  At timing t1, the output of the pulse signal to the first display circuit 98 and the second display circuit 99 is started as a clock signal as shown in FIG. In this case, at the timing t1, the output of the image signal corresponding to one dot of the frame regions 114 and 115 from the first display circuit 98 to the main display device 41 is started as shown in FIG. At the same time, as shown in FIG. 40C, the output of the image signal corresponding to one dot of the frame regions 117 and 118 from the first output unit 131 of the second display circuit 99 to the first sub display device 43 is started. The

  Thereafter, the output of the image signal corresponding to one dot of the frame regions 114 and 115 from the first display circuit 98 to the main display device 41 is continued at the timing t2, which is a state shown in FIG. Thus, the output of the image signal corresponding to one dot of the frame regions 117 and 118 from the first output unit 131 of the second display circuit 99 to the first sub display device 43 is completed. Then, at the timing of t2, as shown in FIG. 40D, an image corresponding to one dot in the frame regions 117 and 118 from the second output unit 132 of the second display circuit 99 to the second sub display device 44. The signal output is started.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t3, as shown in FIG. 40A, the output of the signal for one pulse in the clock signal is completed. In this case, at the timing t3, the output of the image signal corresponding to one dot of the frame regions 114 and 115 from the first display circuit 98 to the main display device 41 is completed as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 40D, the output of the image signal corresponding to one dot of the frame regions 117 and 118 from the second output unit 132 of the second display circuit 99 to the second sub display device 44 is completed.

  Thereafter, the same signal output as the timings t1 to t3 is repeated at the timings t4 to t6, the timings t7 to t9, and the timings t10 to t12. Then, by outputting each image signal in synchronization with the output of the pulse signal in the clock signal as described above, the main display is performed using one drawing data created in one frame region 114, 115. While the image of one frame is updated in the device 41, the first sub display device 43 and the second sub display device 44 are used by using one drawing data created in one frame region 117, 118. In each of these, an image for one frame is updated.

  When one dot in the frame regions 114 and 115 corresponds to one dot in the main display device 41, an image signal output corresponding to one dot in the frame regions 114 and 115 with respect to one dot in the main display device 41 is output. When one dot of the frame area 114, 115 corresponds to a plurality of dots of the main display device 41 in the output period of one pulse of the clock signal, the frame regions 114, 115 corresponding to the plurality of dots of the main display device 41 The output of the image signal corresponding to one dot is performed in the output period of one pulse of the clock signal. Further, when one dot in the frame areas 117 and 118 corresponds to one dot in the first sub display device 43, an image corresponding to one dot in the frame areas 117 and 118 with respect to one dot in the first sub display device 43. When the signal is output in an output period that is half of one pulse of the clock signal and one dot in the frame region 117, 118 corresponds to a plurality of dots in the first sub display device 43, the first sub display device 43 An image signal corresponding to one dot in the frame regions 117 and 118 for a plurality of dots is output in an output period that is half of one pulse of the clock signal. In addition, when one dot in the frame regions 117 and 118 corresponds to one dot in the second sub display device 44, an image corresponding to one dot in the frame regions 117 and 118 with respect to one dot in the second sub display device 44. When the signal is output in an output period that is half of one pulse of the clock signal and one dot in the frame region 117, 118 corresponds to a plurality of dots in the second sub display device 44, the second sub display device 44 is used. An image signal corresponding to one dot in the frame regions 117 and 118 for a plurality of dots is output in an output period that is half of one pulse of the clock signal.

  As described above, drawing data for displaying an image for one frame on the first sub display device 43 and drawing data for displaying an image for one frame on the second sub display device 44 are one frame region. The number of frame areas 117 and 118 is smaller than that in which the drawing data corresponding to each of the sub display devices 43 and 44 is created in a separate frame area by being aggregated for 117 and 118. It becomes possible to suppress.

  In response to the input of one pulse of the clock signal, an image signal corresponding to one dot in the frame regions 117 and 118 is output to the first sub display device 43 and also corresponds to another one dot in the frame regions 117 and 118. The image signal is output to the second sub display device 44. Thereby, the timing for completing the image update for one frame in the first sub display device 43 and the timing for completing the image update for one frame in the second sub display device 44 are set to be substantially the same timing. Is possible. Therefore, the timing for completing the image update for one frame for the other of the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 is greater than the timing for completing the image update for one frame for the other. It is possible to prevent it from shifting.

  The drawing data for displaying the image for one frame on the first sub display device 43 is set to odd-numbered vertical lines in the frame regions 117 and 118, and the image for one frame is displayed on the second sub display device 44. The drawing data to be displayed is set to the even-numbered vertical lines in the frame regions 117 and 118. Thus, when outputting image signals from the frame regions 117 and 118 to the first sub display device 43 and the second sub display device 44, the image signal corresponding to one dot in the frame regions 117 and 118 is output to the first sub display device 43. And the image signal that is adjacent to the one dot only needs to be output to the second sub display device 44, and thus the processing configuration for specifying the type of dot that is the output target of the image signal is simplified. It becomes possible to do.

  Hereinafter, a processing configuration that enables output of the image signal as described above will be described. First, the writing process executed by the 2D control unit 96 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The writing process is executed in step S705 in the 2D drawing process (FIG. 19).

  In the writing process, the display order priority data set in the drawing list is specified for the image data to be written this time, and the value of the specified display order priority data is the first display target reference value “100”. It is determined whether it is less than “” (step S1401). If the value of the display order priority data is less than “100” which is the first display target reference value (step S1401: YES), the image data to be written this time is the drawing data corresponding to the main display device 41. Since this means that the image data is to be created, a process for drawing the image data to be written this time in the 2D drawing area 112 in the main display drawing area 111 of the register 93 is executed ( Step S1402). The 2D drawing area 112 is an area for creating drawing data for 2D images among drawing data for displaying an image for one frame on the main display device 41 as described above.

  On the other hand, when the value of the display order priority data is equal to or greater than “100” that is the first display target reference value (step S1401: NO), the image data that is the current writing target is one of the sub display devices 43, This means that the image data is for creating the drawing data corresponding to 44, and drawing processing to the drawing area 116 for sub display in the register 93 is executed (step S1403). FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the drawing process.

  First, the display order priority data set in the drawing list is specified for the image data to be written this time, and the value of the specified display order priority data is less than “200” which is the second display target reference value. It is determined whether or not there is (step S1501). When the value of the display order priority data is less than the second display target reference value “200” (step S1501: YES), the image data that is the current writing target is the drawing data corresponding to the first sub display device 43. It means that the image data is for creating the image. In this case, first, a setting process for a drawing number counter provided in the register 93 is executed (step S1502). The drawing number counter is a counter for the 2D control unit 96 to specify how many vertical lines are present in the horizontal direction when the vertical line is defined as one unit for the current image data. In step S1502, the direction in which the image data is drawn in the frame areas 117 and 118 is specified based on the rotation angle parameter set for the image data to be written this time, and the vertical line in that direction is specified. Is derived by calculation. Then, a value corresponding to the number of vertical lines derived by the calculation is set in the drawing number counter.

  Thereafter, vertical line data corresponding to the value of the current drawing number counter is extracted from the image data to be written this time (step S1503). Of the odd-numbered vertical lines in the horizontal direction in the frame areas 117 and 118 to be drawn, the coordinate parameters set for the image data to be written this time and the drawing number counter The vertical line corresponding to the current value is specified, and the vertical line data extracted in step S1503 is drawn on the specified vertical lines of the frame regions 117 and 118 (step S1504). In this case, depending on the contents of the coordinate parameter, even the vertical line data corresponding to the leftmost position in the image data to be written this time is present in the middle of the frame regions 117 and 118 in the horizontal direction. It may be drawn on the vertical line.

  Thereafter, 1 is subtracted from the value of the drawing number counter (step S1505). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the drawing number counter after the subtraction is “0” (step S1506). If the value of the drawing number counter is not “0”, the processing in steps S1503 and S1504 is performed on the vertical line data corresponding to the new value of the drawing number counter. Then, by repeating the processing of step S1503 and step S1504, drawing of the image data to be written this time in the frame regions 117 and 118 is completed.

  When the value of the display order priority data is equal to or greater than “200” that is the second display target reference value (step S1501: YES), the image data that is the current writing target is the drawing data corresponding to the second sub display device 44. It means that the image data is for creating the image. In this case, similarly to step S1502, a setting process for the drawing number counter provided in the register 93 is executed (step S1507). Specifically, based on the rotation angle parameter set for the image data to be written this time, the direction in which the image data is drawn in the frame regions 117 and 118 is specified, and in that direction The number of vertical lines is derived by calculation. Then, a value corresponding to the number of vertical lines derived by the calculation is set in the drawing number counter.

  Thereafter, vertical line data corresponding to the value of the current drawing number counter is extracted from the image data to be written this time (step S1508). Of the even-numbered vertical lines in the horizontal direction in the frame regions 117 and 118 to be drawn, the parameters of the coordinates set for the image data to be written this time and the drawing number counter The vertical line corresponding to the current value is specified, and the vertical line data extracted in step S1508 is drawn on the vertical lines of the specified frame regions 117 and 118 (step S1509). In this case, depending on the contents of the coordinate parameter, even the vertical line data corresponding to the leftmost position in the image data to be written this time is present in the middle of the frame regions 117 and 118 in the horizontal direction. It may be drawn on the vertical line.

  Thereafter, the value of the drawing number counter is decremented by 1 (step S1510). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the drawing number counter after the subtraction is “0” (step S1511). If the value of the drawing number counter is not “0”, the processes in steps S1508 and S1509 are executed for the vertical line data corresponding to the new value of the drawing number counter. Then, by repeating the processing of step S1508 and step S1509, drawing of the image data to be written this time in the frame regions 117 and 118 is completed.

  Next, signal output processing executed by the second display circuit 99 of the effect LSI 85 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Note that the second display circuit 99 is provided as a dedicated circuit in which a circuit for executing signal output processing is set in advance. It is good also as a structure provided as a general purpose circuit which performs a signal output process using data. The same applies to the first display circuit 98.

  When the output of the pulse signal from the clock circuit is started, the signal output timing is reached (step S1601: YES). When the signal output timing is reached, an abscissa update process is executed (step S1602). In the update processing of the abscissa, when the current processing time is the first image signal output processing time for the drawing data that is the current image signal output target, the dot in the upper left corner in the frame regions 117 and 118 is the image. The coordinate information is set so that the dot is a signal output target. On the other hand, if the current processing time is not the first image signal output processing time, the abscissa information is updated so that the current coordinate information shifts to the right dot by one dot. In this case, the ordinate information of the coordinate information is maintained as it is.

  If the abscissa information exceeds the maximum value of the abscissa as a result of updating the abscissa information so as to be shifted to the right dot by one dot (step S1603: YES), the abscissa information is the frame region. The information on the abscissa is cleared to “0” so as to be information corresponding to the leftmost dot in 117 and 118 (step S1604). Also, the information on the ordinate is updated so that the information on the ordinate becomes information corresponding to the dot one step below the current ordinate dot in the frame regions 117 and 118 (step S1605).

  Thereafter, the image signal set to the coordinate information dot updated as a result of this time is output from the first output unit 131 to the corresponding dot of the first sub display device 43 (step S1606). The output period of the image signal is equal to or shorter than half of the output period of the pulse signal in the clock signal. When the output of the image signal is completed (step S1607: YES), an abscissa update process is executed (step S1608). In the update processing of the abscissa, the abscissa information of the current coordinate information is updated so as to be shifted to the right dot by one dot. In this case, the ordinate information of the coordinate information is maintained as it is. Thereafter, the image signal set to the dot of the coordinate information as a result of updating this time is output from the second output unit 132 to the corresponding dot of the second sub display device 44 (step S1609). The output period of the image signal is equal to or shorter than half of the output period of the pulse signal in the clock signal. When the output of the image signal is completed (step S1610: YES), the current processing time of the signal output process is ended.

  By executing the signal output processing as described above, each time one pulse signal is input to the second display circuit 99 as a clock signal as shown in the time chart of FIG. An image signal is output to the first sub display device 43 and an image signal is output to the second sub display device 44.

  Here, as described above, the main display device 41 cannot be displaced, whereas the sub display devices 43 and 44 are provided so as to be displaceable. Specifically, the first sub display device 43 is basically disposed at the initial position as shown in FIG. 5 and, during the performance execution period in which the first sub display device 43 is moved, FIG. Are arranged at positions for display effects such as a first juxtaposed position and a second juxtaposed position as shown in FIG. In addition, the second sub display device 44 is basically disposed at the initial position as shown in FIG. 5, and as shown in FIG. 6A during an effect execution period in which the second sub display device 44 is moved. Such as a first juxtaposed position and a second juxtaposed position as shown in FIG. 6B.

  FIG. 44 shows an example of an execution target table for display control in a displacement effect period in which an effect of displacing the first sub display device 43 and the second sub display device 44 is executed. In the displacement effect period shown in FIG. 44, the main display device 41, the first sub display device 43, and the first sub display device 43 are first placed in a state where both the first sub display device 43 and the second sub display device 44 are initially arranged. Each of the two sub display devices 44 displays an image. In this case, the first sub display device 43 and the second sub display device 44 display an image corresponding to the arrangement at the initial position.

  Thereafter, the main display device 41 and the first sub display 44 are held in a state where the second sub display device 44 is held at the initial position and the first sub display device 43 is displaced or disposed at a display effect position. Each of the display device 43 and the second sub display device 44 displays an image. In this case, an image for display effect is displayed on the first sub display device 43, whereas an image corresponding to the arrangement at the initial position is displayed on the second sub display device 44.

  Thereafter, in a situation where the first sub display device 43 is disposed at the initial position and the second sub display device 44 is displaced or disposed at a position for display effects, Each of the display device 43 and the second sub display device 44 displays an image. In this case, the first sub display device 43 displays an image corresponding to the arrangement at the initial position, whereas the second sub display device 44 displays a display effect image.

  After that, the main display device 41, the first sub display device 43, and the first sub display device 43 and the second sub display device 44 are in a state where both the first sub display device 43 and the second sub display device 44 are displaced or arranged at a position for display effects. Each of the two sub display devices 44 displays an image. In this case, an image for display effects is displayed on both the first sub display device 43 and the second sub display device 44.

  In the configuration in which the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 are displaceable as described above, even if the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are disposed at any position, The frame areas 117 and 118 of the sub-display drawing area 116 in the register 93 correspond to the drawing data corresponding to the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 by the predetermined processing already described at each update timing. Drawing data is aggregated and created. In addition, by using the drawing data created by the aggregation, an image signal is output to each of the first sub display device 43 and the second sub display device 44 by the predetermined processing described above. Accordingly, it is not necessary to switch the processing configuration for creating the drawing data and the processing configuration for outputting the image signal according to the position of each of the sub display devices 43 and 44, so that the processing configuration can be simplified. It becomes possible.

<Effects of Configuration Concerning Display Output to Sub Display Devices 43 and 44>
Drawing data for displaying an image for one frame on the first sub display device 43 (hereinafter also referred to as first drawing data) and drawing data for displaying an image for one frame on the second sub display device 44 (Hereinafter, also referred to as second drawing data) is created for one frame area 117, 118, so that the drawing data corresponding to each of the sub display devices 43, 44 is stored in a separate frame area. Compared to the created configuration, the number of frame regions 117 and 118 can be reduced. This makes it possible to display an image on the plurality of sub display devices 43 and 44 while simplifying the hardware configuration for accessing the frame regions 117 and 118.

  Both the first drawing data and the second drawing data are set in one frame region 117, 118 at the same time. This makes it possible to overlap the period for creating the first drawing data and the period for creating the second drawing data.

  Both the first drawing data and the second drawing data to be used at the same update timing are set in one frame region 117, 118. This eliminates the need to individually use the first drawing data and the second drawing data set in one frame region 117, 118 at different update timings, thereby reducing the processing load on the second display circuit 99. It becomes possible.

  The drawing data for displaying the image for one frame on the first sub display device 43 is set to odd-numbered vertical lines in the frame regions 117 and 118, and the image for one frame is displayed on the second sub display device 44. The drawing data to be displayed is set to the even-numbered vertical lines in the frame regions 117 and 118. Thus, when outputting image signals from the frame regions 117 and 118 to the first sub display device 43 and the second sub display device 44, the image signal corresponding to one dot in the frame regions 117 and 118 is output to the first sub display device 43. And the image signal that is adjacent to the one dot only needs to be output to the second sub display device 44, and thus the processing configuration for specifying the type of dot that is the output target of the image signal is simplified. It becomes possible to do.

  In response to the input of one pulse of the clock signal, an image signal corresponding to one dot in the frame regions 117 and 118 is output to the first sub display device 43 and also corresponds to another one dot in the frame regions 117 and 118. The image signal is output to the second sub display device 44. Thereby, the timing for completing the image update for one frame in the first sub display device 43 and the timing for completing the image update for one frame in the second sub display device 44 are set to be substantially the same timing. Is possible. Therefore, the timing for completing the image update for one frame for the other of the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 is greater than the timing for completing the image update for one frame for the other. It is possible to prevent it from shifting.

<Configuration for displaying right-handed notification images 141 and 143>
Next, a configuration for displaying the right-handed notification images 141 and 143 on the display devices 41, 43, and 44 will be described.

  As already described, in the game area PA, the special prize winning device 32 is provided in the right area when the center frame 42 is used as a reference. Therefore, in order to generate a prize for the special electric prize device 32 in the opening / closing execution mode, it is necessary to perform a launch operation so that the game ball flows down in the right area. In this case, a right-handed notification image indicating that the main display device 41, the first sub display device 43, and the second sub display device 44 should perform a launch operation so that the game ball flows down the right area of the game area PA. Is displayed.

  45 (a) and 45 (b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of right-handed notification images 141, 143 displayed on the respective display devices 41, 43, 44. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 45A and 45B, the main display device 41 extends in the horizontal direction at a midway position in the vertical direction on the display surface of the main display device 41 as the main-side right-handed notification image 141. Then, a band-shaped image 141a is displayed, and an instruction image 141b for instructing right-handing is displayed so as to overlap the band-shaped image 141a from the front. The main-side right-hand notification image 141 is continuously displayed in the opening / closing execution mode, and the display position and display mode of the main display device 41 are constant. As shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 46A, the main-side right-handed notification image 141 is displayed using a main-side right-handed image data group 142 stored in advance in the memory module 83.

  In the opening / closing execution mode, as shown in FIG. 45A, the first sub display device 43 and the second sub display device 44 may be arranged at the first juxtaposed position, and as shown in FIG. 45B. In addition, the first sub display device 43 and the second sub display device 44 may be disposed at the second juxtaposition position. When these sub-display devices 43 and 44 are arranged at the first juxtaposed position or the second juxtaposed position, the main display device 41 has a part of the region where the main-side right-handed notification image 141 is displayed. The sub display devices 43 and 44 face each other from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In this case, the visibility of the right-hand notification image 141 on the main side is reduced by the sub display devices 43 and 44. On the other hand, when the sub display devices 43 and 44 are arranged at positions other than the initial position such as the first juxtaposed position or the second juxtaposed position in the opening / closing execution mode, the first sub display device 43 and the second sub display device 43 In each of the sub display devices 44, a sub right-hand notification image 143 is displayed. When the first sub display device 43 is placed at the initial position in the opening / closing execution mode, the right-side notification image 143 on the sub side is not displayed on the first sub display device 43, and the opening / closing execution is performed. In the mode, when the second sub display device 44 is arranged at the initial position, the right-side notification image 143 on the sub side is not displayed on the second sub display device 44.

  One right-side notification image 143 on the sub side is displayed on a part of the display surface of the first sub display device 43 and one on the display surface of the second sub display device 44. 46A, the sub right-handed image data 144 is stored in advance in the memory module 83. When the sub-side right-handed notification image 143 is displayed on the first sub display device 43, In any case where the sub right-handed notification image 143 is displayed on the second sub display device 44, the right-hand image data 144 on the sub side is used.

  The position at which the sub right-handed notification image 143 is displayed on the first sub display device 43 is the upper right corner in the state of FIG. 45A, and the sub right-handed notification image on the first sub display device 43 is displayed. The display position of the image 143 is fixed at the same position even if the first sub display device 43 is displaced. That is, the upper right corner portion of the first sub display device 43 in the state of FIG. 45A becomes the lower right corner portion in the state of FIG. Since the display position of the right-hand notification image 143 on the side is fixed, the right-hand notification image 143 on the sub side is displayed in the upper right corner of the first sub display device 43 in the state of FIG. At the same time, in the state of FIG. 45 (b), it is displayed at the lower right corner of the first sub display device 43.

  Similarly, the position where the sub right-handed notification image 143 is displayed in the second sub display device 44 is the lower left corner in the state of FIG. The display position of the right-handed notification image 143 is fixed at the same position even if the second sub display device 44 is displaced. That is, the lower left corner portion of the second sub display device 44 in the state of FIG. 45A becomes the upper left corner portion in the state of FIG. 45B, but the sub side in the first sub display device 43 Since the display position of the right-handed notification image 143 is fixed, the sub-right-hand notification image 143 is displayed in the lower left corner of the second sub display device 44 in the state of FIG. In the state of FIG. 45 (b), the image is displayed at the upper left corner of the second sub display device 44.

  As described above, the display position of the sub right-hand notification image 143 in each of the sub display devices 43 and 44 is fixed, so that the display position of the sub right-hand notification image 143 in the sub display devices 43 and 44 is determined. There is no need to switch the information of the coordinates to be attached according to the displacement state of the sub display devices 43 and 44. Thereby, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for displaying the right-side notification image 143 on the sub side.

  Further, when the sub display devices 43 and 44 are arranged at the first juxtaposed position where the sub display devices 43 and 44 are juxtaposed vertically, they are arranged on the upper side as shown in FIG. The sub right-handed notification image 143 is displayed on the upper part of the first sub display device 43 and the lower right-hand notification image 143 on the lower side of the second sub display device 44 disposed on the lower side. Is displayed. When the sub display devices 43 and 44 are arranged at the second juxtaposed position where the sub display devices 43 and 44 are arranged side by side, they are arranged on the left side as shown in FIG. The sub right-handed notification image 143 is displayed at the upper part of the second sub display device 44 and the right-hand notification image 143 of the sub side is displayed at the lower part of the first sub display device 43 arranged on the right side. Is displayed. That is, the upper and lower sides of the display area caused by the first sub display device 43 and the second sub display device 44 being arranged in parallel, regardless of whether the first sub display device 43 and the second sub display device 44 are arranged in either the first juxtaposed position or the second juxtaposed position. The right-side notification image 143 on the sub side is displayed at each of the positions. Thereby, it becomes possible to improve the visibility of the right-handed notification image 143 on the sub-side even in a situation where the sub-side right-handed notification image 143 is arranged at either the first side-by-side position or the second side-by-side position.

  The sub display devices 43 and 44 are driven and controlled so that the state of being arranged at the first juxtaposed position and the state of being arranged at the second juxtaposed position are alternately repeated in the opening / closing execution mode. As a result, the situation in which the sub display devices 43 and 44 are united and the situation in which the sub display devices 43 and 44 are rotated in the clockwise direction and the situation in which the sub display devices 43 and 44 are rotated in the counterclockwise direction are alternately repeated. On the other hand, the right-hand notification image 143 on the sub-side makes it easy for the player to grasp the content of the right-handed instruction even if the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are in any rotational position. It is an image.

  46 (b) and 46 (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents displayed as the sub right-hand notification image 143. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 46 (b) and 46 (c), the right-side notification image 143 on the sub side has an annular outer edge, and the continuous instruction image 143a is displayed in the annular width portion. . The continuous instruction image 143a is composed of two “right-handed” character images and two arrow images so that an arrow image exists on both sides of the character image and a character image exists on both sides of the arrow image. It is arranged in a ring. In this case, one character image and one character image are disposed to face each other with an annular center interposed therebetween, and are arranged so that the upper side of each character image is the outer peripheral side. As a result, even when the sub right-handed notification image 143 is arranged at the rotation position where one character image is directed downward, the other character image is displayed upward. Therefore, regardless of the rotation position of the right-side notification image 143 on the sub side, it is easy for the player to grasp the content of the character image.

  Further, the sub right-handed notification image 143 is fixed in a fixed direction (specifically, with the annular central portion of the right-hand notification image 143 on the sub side as the center of rotation while the display position on each of the sub display devices 43 and 44 is fixed. Is displayed to rotate clockwise (clockwise). This ensures that the timing at which the sub right-handed notification image 143 is displayed at the rotation position at which the player can easily grasp the contents of the character image regardless of the position where the sub display devices 43 and 44 are disposed. Will be.

  In the configuration in which the right-side notification image 143 on the sub side is displayed so as to rotate in a certain direction, the rotation speed is changed according to the displacement state of the sub display devices 43 and 44. The manner in which the rotation speed of the right-side notification image 143 on the sub side is changed according to the displacement state of the sub display devices 43 and 44 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 47A shows a period in which right-handed notification is executed on each display device 41, 43, 44. FIG. 47B shows a main-side right-handed notification image 141 displayed on the main display device 41. 47 (c) shows a period in which the sub right-hand notification image 143 is displayed on the sub display devices 43 and 44, and FIG. 47 (d) shows the sub display devices 43 and 44 in the clockwise direction or Indicates the period of rotation in the counterclockwise direction.

  As shown in FIG. 47 (a) at the timing of t1, it is the timing at which right-handed notification should be started. In this case, at the timing t1, the main display device 41 starts displaying the right-handed notification image 141 on the main side as shown in FIG. Display of the right-hand notification image 143 on the sub side is started on the display devices 43 and 44.

  Here, the right-hand side notification image 143 on the sub-side is displayed so as to rotate in the clockwise direction as already described, and as its rotation speed, the first speed, the second speed higher than the first speed, There is a third speed that is faster than the second speed. The first speed having the lowest speed is a speed that is set when the unitary body of each of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 rotates in the clockwise direction, and the second speed that is an intermediate speed is the sub-display devices 43 and 44. The third speed, which is the highest speed, is set when the integrated body of each of the sub display devices 43 and 44 rotates counterclockwise. It is.

  When the integrated unit of each of the sub display devices 43 and 44 rotates in the clockwise direction, the rotation speed in the clockwise direction of the right-side notification image 143 on the sub side is set to the lowest first speed. When the integrated body of each of the sub display devices 43 and 44 rotates in the same direction as the rotation direction of the right-handed notification image 143, the rotational speed of the right-handed notification image 143 on the sub side can be relatively lowered. . Thereby, it is possible to prevent the rotation of the right-side notification image 143 on the sub side from becoming faster than necessary.

  When the single unit of each of the sub display devices 43 and 44 rotates in the counterclockwise direction, the right rotation notification image 143 on the sub side is set to the third speed with the highest rotation speed in the clockwise direction. When the integrated unit of each of the sub display devices 43 and 44 rotates in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the right-handed notification image 143, the rotational speed of the right-handed notification image 143 on the sub-side can be relatively increased. It becomes. The rotation speed of the right-side notification image 143 on the sub side is faster than the rotation speed when the integrated unit of each of the sub display devices 43 and 44 rotates in the reverse direction. Thereby, even if the integrated body of each of the sub display devices 43 and 44 rotates in the reverse direction, the situation where the player recognizes that the right-handed notification image 143 on the sub side is rotating in the clockwise direction is maintained. It becomes possible to make it.

  At the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 47 (d), the sub display devices 43 and 44 are not rotating. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 47C, the rotation speed of the right-side notification image 143 on the sub side is set to the second speed.

  Thereafter, at the timing t2, as shown in FIG. 47 (d), the integrated unit of the sub display devices 43 and 44 starts to rotate in the clockwise direction. In this case, as shown in FIG. 47 (c), the rotation speed of the right-side notification image 143 on the sub side is changed from the second speed to the first speed. As a result, the rotation speed of the right-hand notification image 143 on the sub-side can be reduced as the integrated unit of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 starts to rotate in the clockwise direction.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 47 (d), the rotation of the integrated unit of the sub display devices 43 and 44 stops at the timing of t3. In this case, as shown in FIG. 47 (c), the rotation speed of the right-side notification image 143 on the sub side returns from the first speed to the second speed.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 47 (d), the integrated unit of the sub display devices 43 and 44 starts to rotate in the counterclockwise direction. In this case, as shown in FIG. 47 (c), the rotation speed of the right-side notification image 143 on the sub side is changed from the second speed to the third speed. As a result, the rotation speed of the right-side notification image 143 on the sub-side can be accelerated as the integrated unit of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 starts to rotate in the counterclockwise direction.

  After that, at the timing of t5, as shown in FIG. In this case, as shown in FIG. 47 (c), the rotation speed of the right-side notification image 143 on the sub side returns from the first speed to the second speed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 47 (a), at the timing of t6, it is time to end the right-handed notification. In this case, the display of the right-hand notification image 141 on the main side on the main display device 41 is ended as shown in FIG. 47B, and the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are displayed as shown in FIG. The display of the right-side notification image 143 on the sub side is terminated.

  Hereinafter, a processing configuration for enabling the display of the right-side notification image 143 on the sub side as described above will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing a setting process for right-handed notification executed by the effect CPU 82. The right-handed notification setting process is executed in the display control task process in step S506 in the V interrupt process (FIG. 14).

  When it is the right-start notification start timing (step S1701: NO, step S1702: YES), processing for starting display of the right-hand notification image 141 on the main side is executed (step S1703). In this processing, the main-side right-handed image data group 142 is started so that the main-side right-hand notification image 141 as shown in FIGS. Is set to be a target of drawing processing, and parameter information to be applied this time to the right-handed image data group 142 on the main side is derived.

  Then, the process for setting the coordinate information about the right-hand side notification image 143 on the sub side is executed (step S1704). In this process, the sub right-handed notification image 143 is displayed at a predetermined corner portion of the first sub display device 43 and the sub side is displayed at a predetermined corner portion of the second sub display device 44. Two pieces of fixed coordinate information corresponding to each of the first sub display device 43 and the second sub display device 44 are derived so that the right-hand notification image 143 is displayed. Further, in this process, in order to display the sub right-handed notification image 143 on the first sub display device 43, the use instruction is set for one sub-side right-handed image data 144 and the second sub display is performed. In order to display the right-handed notification image 143 on the sub-side on the device 44, a use instruction is set for one right-sided image data 144 on the sub-side. In step S1705, parameter information other than the coordinate information applied to the sub right-handed image data 144 used for the first sub display device 43 is derived and used for the second sub display device 44. The parameter information other than the coordinate information applied to the right-side image data 144 on the sub side is derived.

  Drawing data is generated in accordance with the drawing list in which the information derived in steps S1703 to S1705 is set and an image signal is output in accordance with the drawing data. The display of the image 141 is started, and the display of the right-side notification image 143 on the sub side is started on each of the first sub display device 43 and the second sub display device 44.

  When it is the execution period of right-handed notification (step S1701: YES), update processing of the right-handed notification image 141 on the main side is executed (step S1706). In this process, parameter information is derived for causing the main-side right-handed notification image 141 to be displayed in the form of the update timing corresponding to the current update instruction. By displaying the image according to the drawing list in which the parameter information is set, the display content of the main-side right-handed notification image 141 in the main display device 41 is updated.

  Thereafter, similarly to step S1704, processing for setting coordinate information for the right-side notification image 143 on the sub-side is executed (step S1707). In this process, the same coordinate information derived in step S1704 is used for the sub right-handed image data 144 and the second sub display device 44 that are used for the first sub display device 43. Derived for each of the sub-right-handed image data 144. Thereby, the display position of the sub right-hand notification image 143 in the first sub display device 43 is fixed, and the display position of the sub-right notification image 143 in the second sub display device 44 is fixed.

  Thereafter, when it is not the rotation period of the integrated unit of the sub display devices 43 and 44 (step S1708: NO), the rotation speed of the right-side notification image 143 on the sub side displayed on each sub display device 43 and 44 is the second speed. Rotation information for the sub-right-handed image data 144 used for the first sub-display device 43 and the sub-right-handed image used for the second sub-display device 44. Derived as rotation information to be applied to each of the data 144 (step S1709). By displaying the image according to the drawing list in which the rotation information is set, the right-handed notification image 143 on the sub-side seems to rotate at the rotation speed of the second speed in each of the sub-display devices 43 and 44. Is displayed.

  When the rotation period of the integrated unit of the sub display devices 43 and 44 is the clockwise direction (step S1708 and step S1709: YES), the first update process of the rotation information at the time of rotation is executed (step S1708). S1711). In the first update process, rotation information for making the rotation speed of the right-side notification image 143 on the sub-side displayed on each of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 the first speed is the first sub-display device 43. Are derived as rotation information applied to the sub right-handed image data 144 used for the second sub-display device 44 and the sub-right-handed image data 144 used for the second sub display device 44, respectively. By displaying the image according to the drawing list in which the rotation information is set, the right-side notification image 143 on the sub-side seems to rotate at the rotation speed of the first speed in each of the sub-display devices 43 and 44. Is displayed.

  When the rotation period of the integrated unit of the sub display devices 43 and 44 is the counterclockwise direction (step S1708: YES, step S1710: NO), the second update process of the rotation information at the time of rotation is executed. (Step S1712). In the second update process, the rotation information for making the rotation speed of the right-side notification image 143 on the sub-side displayed on each of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 the third speed is the first sub-display device 43. Are derived as rotation information applied to the sub right-handed image data 144 used for the second sub-display device 44 and the sub-right-handed image data 144 used for the second sub display device 44, respectively. By displaying the image according to the drawing list in which the rotation information is set, the right-side notification image 143 on the sub-side seems to rotate at the rotation speed of the third speed in each of the sub-display devices 43 and 44. Is displayed.

  When any one of the processes in step S1709, step S1711, and step S1712 is executed, another parameter setting process is executed (step S1713). In this process, parameter information other than the coordinate information and the rotation information applied to the sub right-handed image data 144 used for the first sub display device 43 is derived, and the second sub display device 44 Parameter information other than the coordinate information and rotation information applied to the sub right-handed image data 144 to be used is derived.

<Effect of configuration for displaying right-handed notification images 141 and 143>
A rotation operation is performed in the first sub display device 43 and the second sub display device 44. As a result, it is possible to give the player an unexpectedness and to improve the interest of the game. In this case, the continuous instruction image 143a is annularly arranged in the right-side notification image 143 on the sub side. This makes it possible for the player to recognize the contents of the notification continuous instruction image 143a even when the sub display devices 43 and 44 are rotating.

  In the sub display devices 43 and 44, the right-side notification image 143 on the sub side is displayed as if it is rotating. This makes it possible for the player to visually recognize the right-handed notification image 143 on the sub-side in the predetermined display direction regardless of the rotation position of the sub-display devices 43 and 44.

  Since the rotation speed of the right-hand notification image 143 on the sub-side is changed according to the operation mode of the rotation operation in the sub display devices 43 and 44, the operation mode of the rotation operation in the sub display devices 43 and 44 is any mode. Even so, it is possible to make the display content of the right-side notification image 143 on the sub-side easy to recognize by the player.

<Configuration for Displaying Rotation Period Image 153>
Next, a configuration for displaying the rotation period image 153 on each display device 41, 43, 44 will be described.

  As described above, the sub display devices 43 and 44 are provided so as to be displaceable. The first sub-display devices 43 and 44 are arranged side by side in the vertical direction, and the sub display devices 43 and 44 are arranged in the horizontal direction. It is possible to rotate between the second juxtaposed positions arranged side by side. In this case, when each of the sub display devices 43 and 44 is rotated from the first juxtaposed position to the second juxtaposed position, the main display device 41, the first sub display device 43, and the second sub display device 44 respectively. A rotation period image 153 is displayed to make it difficult for the player to understand that the integrated unit of each of the sub display devices 43 and 44 is rotating.

  49 (a) to 49 (e) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of effects using the rotation period image 153. FIG. In the situation where both the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 are arranged at the initial position, the movement start timing to the juxtaposed position is reached. As shown, the movements of the sub display devices 43 and 44 toward the first juxtaposed position are started. During this movement period, images having continuity with the main display device 41 are not displayed on each of the first sub display device 43 and the second sub display device 44, and the main display device 41 and the first sub display device are displayed. 43 and the second sub display device 44 respectively display the corresponding movement period images 151. As described above, the movement period images 151 individually displayed on the display devices 41, 43, 44 are displayed, so that the sub display devices 43, 44 move from the initial position toward the first juxtaposed position. It is possible for the player to clearly grasp what is being done. The drive control for displacing the sub display devices 43 and 44 is executed by the distribution side MPU 73 as already described.

  Thereafter, the sub display devices 43 and 44 are simultaneously arranged at the first juxtaposed position, so that the sub display devices 43 and 44 are arranged in the vertical direction as shown in FIG. As a result, a series of display surfaces are formed. The state in which the sub display devices 43 and 44 are arranged at the first juxtaposed position is maintained over the juxtaposed display period. In the side-by-side display period, a side-by-side image 152 such as a predetermined character image is displayed on a series of display surfaces formed by the sub display devices 43 and 44. The juxtaposed period image 152 is displayed across both the sub display devices 43 and 44 so as to straddle the boundary between the first sub display device 43 and the second sub display device 44. In the area of the main display device 41 that does not face the sub display devices 43 and 44, a parallel period image 152 that is different from the parallel period image 152 displayed on the sub display devices 43 and 44 is displayed. Is done.

  Thereafter, as the side-by-side display period elapses, the integrated unit of each of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 rotates in the clockwise direction while maintaining a state in which a series of display surfaces is formed, and these united units are simultaneously arranged in the second side-by-side direction. Placed in position. In this rotation period, as shown in FIGS. 49C and 49D, the rotation period image 153 is displayed on each of the main display device 41, the first sub display device 43, and the second sub display device 44. The The rotation period image 153 is displayed across both the main display device 41 and the first sub display device 43 so as to straddle the boundary between the main display device 41 and the first sub display device 43, and The image is displayed across both the main display device 41 and the second sub display device 44 across the boundary between the display device 41 and the second sub display device 44. The rotation period image 153 is displayed across both the sub display devices 43 and 44 so as to straddle the boundary between the first sub display device 43 and the second sub display device 44. Further, the display mode of the rotation period image 153 displayed over each of the main display device 41, the first sub display device 43, and the second sub display device 44 is the rotation of an integral of the sub display devices 43, 44. The display mode is irrelevant to the position. Specifically, the outer edge portion of the integrated body of the sub display devices 43 and 44 that creates a boundary with a predetermined area of the main display device 41 changes with the rotation of the integrated body. The display content of the image portion displayed over both the predetermined area and the sub display devices 43 and 44 at the timing is transferred to both the predetermined area and the sub display devices 43 and 44 at the previous timing in the rotation period. The rotation period image 153 is displayed so that the display content has continuity with the image portion that has been displayed over the entire image. As a result, the display area of the main display device 41 that does not face the sub display devices 43 and 44 and the display surface of the sub display devices 43 and 44 form one display surface, and the one display surface is fixed. A rotation period image 153 that can be recognized by the player as being a flat surface is displayed on the one display surface. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp that the integrated body of the sub display devices 43 and 44 is rotating.

  Thereafter, when the rotation period elapses, the sub display devices 43 and 44 become a separation period in which they are separated in the horizontal direction as shown in FIG. In the separation period, the main display device 41 and the first sub display device 43 are not displayed on the first sub display device 43 and the second sub display device 44, respectively. The separation period images 154 corresponding to each of the second sub display devices 44 are displayed individually. In this way, by displaying the separation period images 154 individually corresponding to the respective display devices 41, 43, 44, each of the sub display devices 43, 44 is directed from the second juxtaposed position toward the separation time position. It becomes possible for the player to grasp that the player is moving.

  Here, as already described, during the rotation period, the rotation period image 153 that makes it difficult for the player to grasp that the integrated object of each of the sub display devices 43 and 44 is rotating is displayed on each display device 41. , 43 and 44, respectively. In this case, the player recognizes that the integrated object of each of the sub display devices 43 and 44 is actually disposed in the first juxtaposed position even though the integral object is disposed in the second juxtaposed position. Situation can occur. In such a situation, if each of the sub display devices 43 and 44 starts to move toward the position at the time of separation, it seems that the player feels unexpected in the operation. And it becomes possible to raise the attention degree to an image display by giving such unexpectedness.

  Hereinafter, a processing configuration for performing image display as described above in each of the movement period, the parallel display period, the rotation period, and the separation period will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the rotational movement display setting process executed by the effect CPU 82. The rotational movement display setting process is executed in the task process for display control in step S506 in the V interrupt process (FIG. 14).

  When it is the movement period to the juxtaposed position (step S1801: YES), the use setting of various image data for displaying the movement period image 151 on each of the display devices 41, 43, 44 is performed, and these various kinds are set. Various parameter information to be applied to the image data is derived (steps S1802 to S1804). Drawing data is created in accordance with the drawing list in which the information derived here is set and an image signal is output in accordance with the drawing data, whereby the moving period image 151 is displayed on each display device 41, 43, 44. Is done.

  When it is the side-by-side display period (step S1805: YES), various image data are set to be used for displaying the side-by-side display period image 152 on each of the display devices 41, 43, and 44, and the various images are displayed. Various parameter information to be applied to the data is derived (steps S1806 to S1808). Drawing data is generated in accordance with the drawing list in which the information derived here is set and an image signal is output in accordance with the drawing data, whereby each display device 41, 43, 44 has a parallel display period image 152. Is displayed.

  If it is the rotation period (step S1809: YES), one display surface (hereinafter, referred to as a display surface) formed by a region of the main display device 41 that does not face the sub display devices 43 and 44 and the display surface of the sub display devices 43 and 44. (Also referred to as an aggregate display screen), the use setting of various image data for displaying the rotation period image 153 is performed, and various parameter information applied to the various image data is derived (step S1810 to step S1810). S1812). Drawing data is generated in accordance with the drawing list in which the information derived here is set and an image signal is output in accordance with the drawing data, whereby the rotation period image 153 is displayed on each display device 41, 43, 44. Is done.

  Here, a method of creating image data 156 to 158 for displaying the rotation period image 153 at the design stage of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. When creating the image data 156 to 158, first, a plurality of 2D image data 155 for displaying moving images over the entire aggregated display surface in the rotation period is created. The plurality of 2D image data 155 is created in a one-to-one correspondence with each update timing included in the rotation period. Thereafter, from each of the 2D image data 155, image data 156 corresponding to the display range by the main display device 41, the display range by the first sub display device 43, and the display range by the second sub display device 44 at the corresponding update timing. Cut out ~ 158.

  The contents of the image data 156 to 158 for displaying the rotation period image 153 shown in FIG. 49C will be described. The 2D image data 155 for displaying the rotation period image 153 shown in FIG. First, it is created (see FIG. 51A). When the data range corresponding to the display range by the main display device 41 is cut out from the 2D image data 155, the portions displayed on the sub display devices 43 and 44 are blank data as shown in FIG. 51 (b). For the portion, image data 156 for displaying the rotation period image 153 is obtained. In the blank data, data for setting blank color information such as black is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the 2D image data 155 may be used as the image data 156 for the main display device 41 as it is. In this case, even if a failure occurs in the drive mechanism of the sub display devices 43 and 44 and at least one of the sub display devices 43 and 44 is not arranged in the juxtaposed position, the sub display devices 43 and 44 An image to be originally displayed is displayed on the main display device 41.

  When the data range corresponding to the display range by the first sub display device 43 is cut out from the 2D image data 155, an image for displaying the rotation period image 153 on the first sub display device 43 as shown in FIG. Data 157 is obtained. Further, when a data range corresponding to the display range by the second sub display device 44 is cut out from the 2D image data 155, the rotation period image 153 is displayed on the second sub display device 44 as shown in FIG. Image data 158 is obtained.

  After the various image data 156 to 158 are cut out as described above, the various image data 156 to 158 are changed to data formats corresponding to the display devices 41, 43, and 44 to be used. Specifically, the resolution of the main display device 41 is 800 × 600, whereas the resolutions of the first sub display device 43 and the second sub display device 44 are both 572 × 180. Therefore, the image data 156 corresponding to the main display device 41 is adjusted to the number of pixels corresponding to the resolution of the main display device 41, and the image data 157 and 158 corresponding to the sub display devices 43 and 44 are adjusted to the sub display device 43. , 44 is adjusted to the number of pixels corresponding to the resolution.

  Furthermore, the rotation period image 153 is displayed as a 3D image on the main display device 41, whereas the rotation period image 153 is displayed as a 2D image on the sub display devices 43 and 44. In this case, when the rotation period image 153 is displayed on the main display device 41, the image data 156 is used as texture data to be pasted on the plate-shaped polygon. On the other hand, when the rotation period image 153 is displayed on the sub display devices 43 and 44, the image data 157 and 158 are used as sprite data. Therefore, adjustments are made to correspond to these data formats.

  The creation of the image data 156 to 158 corresponding to the display devices 41, 43, and 44 as described above is performed for each update timing in the rotation period. Therefore, as image data for displaying the rotation period image 153 in the memory module 83, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 51E, the first image data group 161 for the main display device 41, the first sub A second image data group 162 for the display device 43 and a third image data group 163 for the second sub display device 44 are stored. Each of the first to third image data groups 161 to 163 includes image data corresponding to the number of update timings included in the rotation period. The effect LSI 85 reads out and uses the image data corresponding to each update timing from the first to third image data groups 161 to 163 during the rotation period.

  Returning to the description of the rotational movement display setting process (FIG. 50), when it is the separation period (step S1813: YES), various images for displaying the separation period image 154 on each of the display devices 41, 43, and 44, respectively. Data usage settings are made and various parameter information to be applied to the various image data is derived (steps S1814 to S1816). Drawing data is generated in accordance with the drawing list in which the information derived here is set, and an image signal is output in accordance with the drawing data, whereby the separation period image 154 is displayed on each display device 41, 43, 44. Is done.

<Effect of Configuration for Displaying Rotation Period Image 153>
During the rotation period in which the sub display devices 43 and 44 are rotating, a rotation period image 153 is provided to make it difficult for the player to identify that the sub display devices 43 and 44 are rotating. Displayed on the display devices 43 and 44. As a result, it is possible to cause a situation in which the sub display devices 43 and 44 are rotating before the player notices, and to improve the interest of the game.

  The rotation period image 153 is an image having no directivity in the direction along the display surface of the sub display devices 43 and 44. Thereby, in a situation where the sub display devices 43 and 44 are rotating, the sub display devices 43 and 44 are rotating by displaying the rotation period image 153 on the sub display devices 43 and 44. Can be made difficult for the player to identify.

  The rotation period image 153 is displayed so as to be recognized by the player as being displayed on the non-rotating display surface without following the rotation operation of the sub display devices 43 and 44. This makes it difficult for the player to identify that the sub display devices 43 and 44 are rotating.

  In a situation where the sub display devices 43 and 44 are rotating, a part of the display surface of the main display device 41 exists around the display surface of the sub display devices 43 and 44 and a part of the display surface. In this area, an image corresponding to the rotation period image 153 in the sub display devices 43 and 44 is displayed. Accordingly, it is possible to display an image having relevance to the rotation period image 153 displayed on the sub display devices 43 and 44 around the sub display devices 43 and 44 performing the rotation operation. An integrated display effect can be performed on the display device 41 and the sub display devices 43 and 44.

  In particular, in a situation where the sub display devices 43 and 44 are rotating, the display surface of the main display device 41 exists over the entire periphery of the display surface of the sub display devices 43 and 44. This makes it possible for the player to have an illusion that the display surface of the sub display devices 43 and 44 is a partial area on the display surface of the main display device 41, and the sub display devices 43 and 44 rotate. It is easy to display an image that makes it difficult for the player to recognize that the player is present.

  Images having continuity are displayed on the display devices 41, 43, 44 so as to straddle the boundary between the display surface of the main display device 41 and the display surfaces of the sub display devices 43, 44. This makes it difficult for a player who is paying attention to these images to recognize that the sub display devices 43 and 44 are rotating.

  The rotation positions of the sub display devices 43 and 44 are different between the timing when the rotation period starts and the timing when the rotation period ends. In this case, in a situation where the rotation period image 153 that makes it difficult for the player to recognize that the sub display devices 43 and 44 are rotating is displayed, The rotation positions of the sub display devices 43 and 44 are different. Thereby, it is expected that the player recognizes that the rotational position of the sub display devices 43 and 44 has been changed without noticing, and it is possible to give the player an unexpectedness.

  Before and after the rotation period, an image in which the player can easily recognize the rotation position of the sub display devices 43 and 44 is displayed on the sub display devices 43 and 44. During the rotation period, the sub display devices 43 and 44 rotate. The rotation display image 153 is displayed on the sub display devices 43 and 44 so that it is difficult for the player to recognize that the game is being performed. This makes it possible to strongly give the player the impression that the rotational positions of the sub display devices 43 and 44 have been changed without noticing.

<Configuration for Displaying Abnormality Notification Image 176>
Next, a configuration for displaying the abnormality notification image 176 on each display device 41, 43, 44 will be described.

  In this pachinko machine 10, there are a plurality of types of events to be subjected to abnormality notification. FIG. 52 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an event to be subjected to abnormality notification. As shown in FIG. 52, the events to be subjected to abnormality notification include magnet detection, radio wave detection, prize winning port abnormality detection, disconnection abnormality, gaming ball discharge abnormality, movable body abnormality, and full tank abnormality. There are vibration detection, door opening, and frame opening. Magnet detection is an event in which a magnetic force is detected by a magnetic force detection sensor (not shown) provided in the pachinko machine 10. Radio wave detection is an event in which radio waves are detected by a radio wave detection sensor (not shown) provided in the pachinko machine 10. The big prize opening abnormality detection is an event of detecting the entry of a game ball into the special electric prize device 32 in a situation that is not in the opening / closing execution mode. The disconnection abnormality means that the main MPU 62 receives a connection confirmation signal from a winning detection sensor provided at the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34 and the through gate 35. It is an event that has not occurred. The game ball discharge abnormality is an event in which the discharge of the game ball from the payout device 68 is not detected even though the payout device 68 is driven and controlled to pay out the game ball. The movable body abnormality is an event in which the universal power 34a is not opened despite the drive control of the second electrical opening 34a to open the common power 34a. The full tank abnormality is an event in which the lower plate 56a is filled with game balls. The vibration detection is an event in which vibration is detected by a vibration detection sensor (not shown) provided in the pachinko machine 10. The door opening is an event in which the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state. The frame opening is an event in which the front door frame 14 is in an open state.

  When the above event occurs, the display light emitting unit 53 emits light for abnormality notification and an abnormality notification sound is output from the speaker unit 54. In addition, an abnormality notification image 176 is displayed on each display device 41, 43, 44. In the abnormality notification image 176, an image corresponding to the type of event that triggered the execution of the abnormality notification is displayed, and specifically, characters indicating the type of the event are displayed. In this case, as described above, the sub display devices 43 and 44 are provided so as to be displaceable, and the main display device 41 can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10 as the sub display devices 43 and 44 are displaced. The range changes. Accordingly, the display mode of the abnormality notification image 176 differs depending on the position where the sub display devices 43 and 44 are arranged.

  53 (a) to 53 (e) are explanatory diagrams for explaining a display mode of the abnormality notification image 176. FIG. In a situation where both of the sub display devices 43 and 44 are arranged at the initial position, the display surface of the main display device 41 is vertically opposed to the sub display devices 43 and 44 as shown in FIG. Most of the area is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 except for a part of the area. Therefore, in the situation where the sub display devices 43 and 44 are arranged at the initial position, the display range 171 when not operating except for the upper and lower partial areas facing the sub display devices 43 and 44 is notified of abnormality. The display range of the image 176 is displayed.

  The non-operating display range 171 is set to a size capable of simultaneously displaying seven abnormality notification images 176 displayed in a predetermined size. On the other hand, as already described, there are eight or more events to be subjected to abnormality notification. In this case, if eight or more events to be subjected to abnormality notification occur at the same time, the abnormality notification image 176 cannot be displayed for some of the events. Therefore, priority is set for an event to be subjected to abnormality notification as shown in FIG. 52, and an event to be subjected to abnormality notification is selected according to the priority.

  The priority is set to the highest in the first event group corresponding to the fraud that may give a great disadvantage to the game hall. The first event group includes magnet detection, radio wave detection, and special prize opening abnormality detection. Next, the priority of the second event group that may prevent the game from proceeding normally is set high. The second event group includes disconnection abnormality, gaming ball discharge abnormality, movable body abnormality, and full tank abnormality. The priority of the third event group that can occur during maintenance or the like even when the game is being played normally is set to be the lowest. The third event group includes vibration detection, door opening and frame opening.

  Since the display range 171 during non-operation is set to a size capable of simultaneously displaying seven abnormality notification images 176 as described above, all the events included in the first event group and the second event group Even if all the events included in the event occur simultaneously, it is possible to simultaneously display the abnormality notification image 176 corresponding to each of the events. On the other hand, if not only all events included in the first event group and all events included in the second event group but also events included in the third event group occur simultaneously, they are included in the third event group. The abnormality notification image 176 corresponding to the event to be displayed is not displayed. In this case, even if the abnormality notification image 176 corresponding to the event included in the third event group is displayed first, all the events included in the first event group and all included in the second event group are subsequently displayed. When the event of the same occurs, the display of the abnormality notification image 176 corresponding to the event included in the third event group that has been executed is interrupted, and the abnormality notification corresponding to the higher priority event is interrupted. The display of the image 176 is started. As a result, it is possible to prioritize the display of the abnormality notification image 176 corresponding to the higher priority event.

  In addition, after that, in a situation where the events included in the third event group continue, at least one of the higher-priority events is resolved and the display of the abnormality notification image 176 corresponding to the event is terminated The display of the abnormality notification image 176 corresponding to the event included in the third event group is started. Thereby, when there is a margin in the display area of the abnormality notification image 176, it is possible to display the abnormality notification image 176 corresponding to the event occurring at that time.

  In addition, when the predetermined event occurs again in a situation where the state where the predetermined event has occurred is not resolved and the abnormality notification image 176 corresponding to the predetermined event is displayed, the abnormality notification already performed is performed. Only the display of the image 176 is continued, and a plurality of abnormality notification images 176 corresponding to the same event are not displayed. Further, when the abnormality notification image 176 is displayed in the display range 171 at the time of non-operation, the abnormality notification image 176 is displayed so as to overwrite a part of the effect image.

  Next, a case where an effect of displacing the sub display devices 43 and 44 is executed will be described. When an effect of displacing the sub display devices 43 and 44 is executed, each of the sub display devices 43 and 44 has an area between the initial position and the first juxtaposition position (see FIG. 53 (b)), the first common display. A region (see FIG. 53 (c)), a region between the first juxtaposed position and the second juxtaposed position, a region (see FIG. 53 (d)), a second juxtaposed position, It arrange | positions in the area | region between a juxtaposition position and the position at the time of isolation | separation, and the area | region (refer FIG.53 (e)) used as the position at the time of isolation | separation. In this case, if the abnormality notification image 176 is displayed in an area where the main display device 41 can face the sub display devices 43 and 44, the abnormality notification image 176 may be hidden by the sub display devices 43 and 44. On the other hand, if the region in which the abnormality notification image 176 is displayed on the main display device 41 is finely switched according to the positions of the sub display devices 43 and 44, the processing configuration for displaying the abnormality notification image 176 becomes complicated. End up. Therefore, a plurality of display ranges 172 to 174 of the main display device 41 that do not always face the sub display devices 43 and 44 in the execution period of the effect of displacing the sub display devices 43 and 44 are display ranges of the abnormality notification image 176. Specifically, the first display range 172 during operation set in the upper left corner portion of the main display device 41 and the second display range during operation set in the upper right corner portion of the main display device 41. 173 and a third display range 174 during operation set in the lower right corner portion of the main display device 41 are set.

  Each of the first to third display ranges 172 to 174 during operation is set to a size capable of displaying only one abnormality notification image 176 displayed in a predetermined size. That is, during the period in which the effect of displacing the sub display devices 43 and 44 is executed, the number of abnormality notification images 176 that can be displayed simultaneously is three. On the other hand, as already described, there are eight or more events to be subjected to abnormality notification. Accordingly, even in this case, an event to be displayed for the abnormality notification image 176 is selected according to the priority already described, and the abnormality notification image 176 is displayed for the selected event. For example, when four or more events to be subjected to abnormality notification have occurred, three events having a higher priority are selected from the events, and the abnormality notification corresponding to the selected three events is selected. An image 176 is displayed. When any event that is the display target of the abnormality notification image 176 is resolved and the display of the abnormality notification image 176 for the event is terminated, the abnormality notification image 176 is not displayed. The display of the abnormality notification image 176 corresponding to the lower priority event is started.

  Here, as already described, the number of events included in the first event group is three. This number is equal to or less than the number of first to third display ranges 172 to 174 during operation, that is, the number of abnormality notification images 176 that can be displayed in the period in which the effect of displacing the sub display devices 43 and 44 is executed. Yes. Thereby, the abnormality notification image 176 corresponding to the event included in the first event group having the highest priority can be immediately displayed regardless of the timing at which the event occurs.

  In addition, when the predetermined event occurs again in a situation where the state where the predetermined event has occurred is not resolved and the abnormality notification image 176 corresponding to the predetermined event is displayed, the abnormality notification already performed is performed. Only the display of the image 176 is continued, and a plurality of abnormality notification images 176 corresponding to the same event are not displayed. In addition, an effect image is displayed in a region other than the first to third display ranges 172 to 174 during operation of the main display device 41.

  54 (a) to 54 (d) are explanatory diagrams for explaining a display mode of the abnormality notification image 176 during a period in which an effect of displacing the sub display devices 43 and 44 is executed. When the first abnormality which is one of the above events occurs in the situation where the sub display devices 43 and 44 are arranged at the first juxtaposed position as shown in FIG. ), An abnormality notification image 176 indicating that a first abnormality has occurred in the first display range 172 during operation of the main display device 41 is displayed. In addition, the character image “abnormality occurrence” is displayed as the common notification image 175 indicating that an abnormality has occurred in the first sub display device 43 as well. In this case, for example, by confirming that the common notification image 175 is displayed on the first sub display device 43, it can be understood that some event has occurred, and further, the first display range during operation By confirming 172, it is possible to grasp the type of event that is the subject of abnormality notification. The common notification image 175 is displayed so as to overwrite a part of the effect image on the sub display devices 43 and 44.

  In addition, the types and positions of the sub display devices 43 and 44 on which the common notification image 175 is displayed differ depending on the displacement states of the sub display devices 43 and 44. Specifically, the area where the sub display devices 43 and 44 are between the initial position and the first juxtaposed position (see FIG. 53B) and the area where the sub display devices 43 and 44 are the first juxtaposed position (see FIG. 53C). Or in the region between the first juxtaposed position and the second juxtaposed position, the end of the first sub display device 43 opposite to the boundary with the second sub display device 44 A common notification image 175 is displayed at a position closer to the part. In addition, the region where the sub display devices 43 and 44 are in the second juxtaposed position (see FIG. 53D), the region between the second juxtaposed position and the separation position, or the region in which the separation display position is located (see FIG. 53 (e)), the common notification image 175 is displayed at a position near the upper end of the second sub display device 44.

  Thereafter, when a second abnormality that is one of the above events and is different from the first abnormality occurs in a situation where the first abnormality has not been resolved, the main display as shown in FIG. 54 (c) An abnormality notification image 176 indicating that a second abnormality has occurred in the second display range 173 during operation of the device 41 is displayed. Even in this situation, the first sub display device 43 continues to display the common notification image 175 “abnormality occurrence”. In this case, for example, by confirming that the common notification image 175 is displayed on the first sub display device 43, it can be understood that some event has occurred, and further, the first display range during operation By confirming 172 and the second display range 173 at the time of operation, it is possible to grasp the type of event that is the target of abnormality notification.

  Thereafter, when a third abnormality that is one of the above events and is different from the first abnormality and the second abnormality occurs in a situation where both the first abnormality and the second abnormality are not resolved, As shown in 54 (d), an abnormality notification image 176 indicating that a third abnormality has occurred is displayed in the third display range 174 during operation of the main display device 41. Even in this situation, the first sub display device 43 continues to display the common notification image 175 “abnormality occurrence”. In this case, for example, by confirming that the common notification image 175 is displayed on the first sub display device 43, it can be understood that some event has occurred, and further, the first display range during operation By confirming the second display range 173 during operation and the third display range 174 during operation, it is possible to grasp the type of the event that is the target of abnormality notification.

  In the situation shown in FIG. 54D, for example, when the first abnormality event is resolved, the display of the abnormality notification image 176 corresponding to the first abnormality in the first display range 172 during operation is terminated. Even in this case, the display of the abnormality notification image 176 corresponding to the second abnormality in the second display range 173 during operation and the abnormality notification image 176 corresponding to the third abnormality in the third display range 174 during operation are displayed. Display continues. As described above, even when the display of the abnormality notification image 176 is terminated in the first display range 172 during the operation in which the display start order of the abnormality notification image 176 is the front side, there is an abnormality in the first display range 172 side during the operation. Instead of shifting the display target area of the notification image 176, the display of the abnormality notification image 176 is continued as it is in the second display range 173 during operation and the third display range 174 during operation that are already displayed. Thus, it is possible to make it easy to perform a confirmation operation as to whether or not a predetermined event continues.

  Further, the abnormality notification image 176 is displayed in the second display range 173 during operation and the third display range 174 during operation, and the abnormality notification image 176 is displayed in the first display range 172 during operation. If a new event occurs in a situation that is not, an abnormality notification image 176 corresponding to the newly generated event is displayed in the first display range 172 during operation. Even in this case, the abnormality notification image 176 that is continuously displayed is continuously displayed in the display ranges 172 to 174 that have been displayed. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate the confirmation work of whether or not the predetermined event continues.

  In the situation shown in FIG. 54 (d), when an event different from the first abnormal event, the second abnormal event, and the third abnormal event occurs, the priority of the newly generated event is first to first. If it is higher than the priority of any event of the third abnormality, the display range 172 to which the abnormality notification image 176 corresponding to the event having the lowest priority among the first to third abnormality events is displayed. In 174, the already displayed abnormality notification image 176 is deleted, and the display of the abnormality notification image 176 corresponding to the newly generated event is started. Even in this case, the abnormality notification image 176 that is continuously displayed is continuously displayed in the display ranges 172 to 174 that have been displayed. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate the confirmation work of whether or not the predetermined event continues.

  Hereinafter, a processing configuration for enabling the display of the abnormality notification image 176 as described above will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the corresponding process of the notification command executed by the effect CPU 82. The notification command handling process is executed in the command handling process of step S503 in the V interrupt process (FIG. 14).

  When the notification start command is received from the distribution side MPU 73 in the notification command response processing (step S1901: YES), notification type data corresponding to the notification start command is stored in the register of the effect CPU 82 (step S1902). ). Management processing for determining whether or not an event that is a target for performing abnormality notification has occurred is executed by the main MPU 62. When an event to be subjected to abnormality notification occurs, the main side MPU 62 transmits an abnormality occurrence command including information on the type of the event to the distribution side MPU 73. When the distribution side MPU 73 receives the abnormality occurrence command, the distribution side MPU 73 transmits a notification start command including information on the type of event that triggered the transmission of the abnormality occurrence command to the effect CPU 82. By receiving this notification start command, the effect CPU 82 stores the notification type data in the register of the effect CPU 82 as described above. When a plurality of events occur simultaneously in the same period, notification type data corresponding to each of the plurality of events is stored in the register of the effect CPU 82. When a notification start command corresponding to an event of the same type as an event corresponding to the notification type data already stored in the register of the effect CPU 82 is received, a new notification type data corresponding to the event is received. Do not memorize.

  When at least one notification type data is stored in the register of the effect CPU 82, the abnormality notification process is executed in the light emission control task process (step S504) in the V interrupt process (FIG. 14). As a result, when at least one notification type data is stored in the register of the effect CPU 82, the display light emitting unit 53 continues to emit light for abnormality notification. Further, when at least one notification type data is stored in the register of the effect CPU 82, the abnormality notification process is executed in the sound output control task process (step S505) in the V interrupt process (FIG. 14). The As a result, when at least one notification type data is stored in the register of the effect CPU 82, the output of the abnormality notification sound from the speaker unit 54 is continued. Further, when the notification type data is stored in the register of the effect CPU 82, processing for displaying the abnormality notification image 176 on the display devices 41, 43, and 44 is executed. Details of this processing will be described later.

  In the notification command response process, when a notification release command is received from the distribution side MPU 73 (step S1903: YES), the notification type data corresponding to the notification release command is deleted from the register of the effect CPU 82 (step S1904). ). The management process of whether or not the state where the event that is the subject of the abnormality notification has occurred has been resolved is executed by the main MPU 62. When the state where the event that is the subject of abnormality notification has occurred is resolved, the main side MPU 62 transmits an abnormality resolution command including information on the type of the event to the distribution side MPU 73. When the distribution-side MPU 73 receives the abnormality resolution command, the distribution-side MPU 73 transmits a notification release command including information on the type of event that triggered the transmission of the abnormality resolution command to the effect CPU 82. By receiving this notification release command, the effect CPU 82 erases the notification type data corresponding to the notification release command from the register of the effect CPU 82 as described above. Thereby, all the abnormality notifications corresponding to the deleted notification type data are terminated.

  In addition, the method for identifying whether or not the state in which the event that is the target of abnormality notification has occurred in the main MPU 62 has been resolved is based on the detection result of the detection sensor. If the detection result by the detection sensor is a detection result corresponding to the fact that the event has not occurred, the state in which the event that is the subject of the abnormality notification has occurred is resolved. The event that is the target for executing the abnormality notification occurs when the release operation that is set in response to the event that is the target for executing the abnormality notification is performed. It is also possible to specify that the state has been resolved, and when the latter condition is satisfied after the former condition is satisfied, an event that is the target of execution of abnormality notification has occurred. There may be a method of identifying to have been eliminated.

  Next, the notification setting process executed by the effect CPU 82 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The notification setting process is executed in the effect calculation process in step S604 in the display control task process (FIG. 15).

  If it is not the execution period of the effect of displacing the sub display devices 43 and 44 (step S2001: NO), the notification type data is stored in the register of the effect CPU 82 (step S2002: YES), and step S2003. Proceed to In step S2003, it is determined whether or not the number of notification type data stored in the register of the effect CPU 82 is eight or more.

  When the number of notification type data is less than 8 (step S2003: NO), individual notification image data corresponding to each of all notification type data is set as a setting target of the current drawing list. A setting process is executed (step S2004). Thus, individual notification image data corresponding to each of the notification type data stored in the register of the effect CPU 82 is set as an object to be drawn in the drawing list to be output to the effect LSI 85 this time.

  By receiving the drawing list, the effect LSI 85 pre-transfers all of the individual notification image data set in the drawing list to the VRAM 86 and uses the pre-transferred individual notification image data. An abnormality notification image 176 corresponding to each of all the events to be notified is displayed in the display range 171 during non-operation. In this case, regardless of the priority set for the event to be notified, the abnormality notification image 176 is displayed in the non-operating display range 171 according to the order in which the events occurred.

  When the number of notification type data is eight or more (step S2003: YES), seven notification type data are extracted as notification targets in order from the higher priority level already described (step S2005). Then, a setting process is performed so that the individual notification image data corresponding to each of the seven notification type data selected by the lottery becomes the setting target of the current drawing list (step S2006). Thus, individual notification image data corresponding to each of the seven notification type data extracted in step S2005 is set as a drawing target in the drawing list to be output to the effect LSI 85 this time.

  By receiving the drawing list, the effect LSI 85 pre-transfers all of the individual notification image data set in the drawing list to the VRAM 86 and uses the pre-transferred individual notification image data. The abnormality notification image 176 corresponding to each of the seven notification target events extracted in S2005 is displayed in the non-operation display range 171. In this case, regardless of the priority set for the event to be notified, the abnormality notification image 176 is displayed in the non-operating display range 171 according to the order in which the events occurred.

  If it is the execution period of the effect of displacing the sub display devices 43 and 44 (step S2001: YES), step S2008 is performed on condition that the notification type data is stored in the register of the effect CPU 82 (step S2007: YES). Proceed to In step S2008, the setting is made so that the common notification image data for displaying the common notification image 175 on either the first sub display device 43 or the second sub display device 44 becomes the setting target of the current drawing list. Execute the process. In this case, as described above, the drawing list information is set so that the types and positions of the sub display devices 43 and 44 that are the display target of the common notification image 175 are different depending on the positions of the sub display devices 43 and 44.

  Thereafter, when the number of notification type data stored in the register of the effect CPU 82 is less than four (step S2009: NO), individual notification image data corresponding to each of all the notification type data is the current information. A setting process for setting the drawing list as a setting target is executed (step S2010). Thus, individual notification image data corresponding to each of the notification type data stored in the register of the effect CPU 82 is set as an object to be drawn in the drawing list to be output to the effect LSI 85 this time.

  The effect LSI 85 receives the drawing list, and forwards all of the common notification image data and individual notification image data set in the drawing list to the VRAM 86 in advance. Then, the common notification image data 175 is displayed at the position corresponding to the current displacement state in the sub display devices 43 and 44 corresponding to the current displacement state by using the common notification image data transferred in advance. To do. In addition, using the pre-transferred individual notification image data, the abnormality notification images 176 corresponding to all of the current notification target events are displayed in the first to third display ranges 172 to 174 during operation. To be displayed. In this case, even if the type of abnormality notification image 176 to be displayed is decreased or increased, the display ranges 172 to 174 to be displayed of the abnormality notification image 176 whose display is to be continued from the previous timing are changed. Not.

  When the number of notification type data stored in the register of the effect CPU 82 is four or more (step S2009: YES), the three notification type data are notified in order from the higher priority side already described. (Step S2011). Then, a setting process is performed so that the individual notification image data corresponding to each of the three notification type data selected by the lottery becomes the setting target of the current drawing list (step S2012). Thus, individual notification image data corresponding to each of the three notification type data extracted in step S2011 is set as a drawing target in the drawing list to be output to the effect LSI 85 this time.

  The effect LSI 85 receives the drawing list, and forwards all of the common notification image data and individual notification image data set in the drawing list to the VRAM 86 in advance. Then, the common notification image data 175 is displayed at the position corresponding to the current displacement state in the sub display devices 43 and 44 corresponding to the current displacement state by using the common notification image data transferred in advance. To do. Further, using the pre-transferred individual notification image data, the abnormality notification images 176 corresponding to the three notification target events extracted in step S2011 are the first to third display ranges during operation. Displayed at 172 to 174. In this case, even if the type of abnormality notification image 176 to be displayed is decreased or increased, the display ranges 172 to 174 to be displayed of the abnormality notification image 176 whose display is to be continued from the previous timing are changed. Not.

<Effect of Configuration for Displaying Abnormality Notification Image 176>
Even when the sub display devices 43 and 44 are arranged at a predetermined facing position (a position other than the initial position) where the range facing the display surface of the main display device 41 is widened, a notification target event occurs. An abnormality notification image 176 is displayed on the main display device 41. As a result, even if the sub display devices 43 and 44 are not arranged at the predetermined facing positions due to some failure, the abnormality notification image 176 is displayed on the main display device 41, and the abnormality notification image 176 is displayed as a player or It becomes possible to make the manager of the game hall recognize.

  On the display surface of the main display device 41, the abnormality notification image 176 is displayed in an area that does not face the sub display devices 43 and 44 over the entire execution period of the displacement effect. This ensures the visibility of the abnormality notification image 176 displayed on the main display device 41 without performing control such as changing the display position of the abnormality notification image 176 according to the position of the sub display devices 43 and 44. It becomes possible.

  In the configuration in which the area for displaying the abnormality notification image 176 is limited on the display surface of the main display device 41 in the execution period of the displacement effect, the number of abnormality notification images 176 to be displayed in the execution period of the displacement effect is a predetermined number. Limited to Thereby, the size of the abnormality notification image 176 displayed on the display surface of the main display device 41 can be secured to some extent.

  The priority that is the display target of the abnormality notification image 176 is set for the plurality of types of notification target events, and when the number of notification target events exceeding the predetermined number occurs in the execution period of the displacement effect, the priority is high. The abnormality notification image 176 corresponding to the notification target event on the side is preferentially displayed. Thus, even in a configuration in which the number of abnormality notification images 176 to be displayed on the main display device 41 is limited to a predetermined number in the execution period of the displacement effect, it corresponds to a notification target event on the higher priority side. The abnormality notification image 176 can be displayed.

  When a notification target event occurs in the execution period of the displacement effect, the common notification image 175 is displayed on the sub display devices 43 and 44. Thereby, it is possible to emphasize that the notification target event has occurred.

  The common notification image 175 is a common image that does not correspond to the type of notification target event. Thereby, the processing load for displaying the common notification image 175 on the sub display devices 43 and 44 can be reduced.

  Even if the notification target event has occurred a plurality of times, only one common notification image 175 is displayed on the sub display devices 43 and 44. This makes it possible to secure a wide area in which images other than the common notification image 175 are displayed on the sub display devices 43 and 44.

<Configuration for performing image display using special moving image data 185>
Next, a configuration for displaying an image using the special moving image data 185 will be described.

  As described above, moving image data exists as image data. As the moving image data, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 57, the memory module 83 includes a normal moving image data group 181 including a plurality of types of normal moving image data 184 and a special type including a plurality of types of special moving image data 185. A moving image data group 182 and an attached image data group 183 including a plurality of types of attached image data are stored in advance.

  FIG. 58A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the normal moving image data 184. In the normal moving image data 184, file data is set at the first address, and subsequently, compressed data of each frame is set. The compressed data of each frame is accompanied by a frame header. The compressed data includes one frame of I picture data corresponding to the reference data, a plurality of frames of P picture data corresponding to the first difference data, and a plurality of frames of B picture data corresponding to the second difference data. And have.

  The I picture data is data that can create still image data for one frame by the data alone at the time of decoding. P picture data is data that can generate still image data for one frame by performing forward prediction with reference to I picture data or P picture data of one frame or a plurality of frames before decoding. . B picture data is decoded by bi-directional prediction with reference to I picture data or P picture data before one frame or plural frames and I picture data or P picture data after one frame or plural frames. This is data that can create still image data for one frame.

  In the compressed data in the normal moving image data 184, I picture data is set as the data of the first frame. In addition, B picture data is set as data of the second frame,..., M−1 frame. Also, P picture data is set as the data of the mth frame. Further, B picture data is set as data of the (m + 1) th frame,..., The (n−1) th frame. Also, P picture data is set as the nth frame data. Note that the arrangement pattern of the picture data is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary.

  By executing the decoding process on the normal moving image data 184, decoded image data 184a to 184d (hereinafter referred to as normal decoded image data 184a to 184d) for a plurality of update timings from the normal moving image data 184 are registered in the register 93. Is created in the development area 119 for moving images (see FIG. 16). These normal decoded image data 184a to 184d are image data in which the contents of some of the images displayed by the normal decoded image data 184a to 184d are different from each other.

  FIG. 58B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the special moving image data 185. In the special moving image data 185, file data is set at the first address, and subsequently, a plurality of I picture data corresponding to the reference data is set, but no compressed data other than these I picture data is set. By executing the decoding process on the special moving image data 185, decoded image data 185a to 185d (hereinafter referred to as special decoded image data 185a to 185d) corresponding to a plurality of update timings from the special moving image data 185 are registered in the register 93. Is created in the development area 119 for moving images (see FIG. 16). These special decoded image data 185a to 185d are image data in which the contents of at least some of the images displayed by the special decoded image data 185a to 185d are different from each other.

  The amount of data of the special moving image data 185 is set so that the decoded image data corresponding to the minimum number of units that can be set as moving image data can be reproduced. For the decoded image data corresponding to the minimum number of units, specifically, 48 I-picture data are set in the special moving image data 185, and the 48 special decoded image data 185a to 185d are set by the special moving image data 185. Can be played. Note that some of the normal moving image data 184 has a data amount set so that normal decoding image data 184a to 184d corresponding to the minimum number of units that can be set as moving image data can be reproduced. In some cases, the amount of data is set so that the number of normal decoded image data 184a to 184d larger than the minimum number of units that can be set as image data can be created.

  The special decoded image data 185a to 185d is used as texture data. The memory module 83 stores in advance predetermined object data for applying the special decoded image data 185a to 185d as texture data. All of the special decoded image data 185a to 185d are to be applied to the same predetermined object data, and the special decoded image data to be applied to the predetermined object data in the order of the serial numbers of the special decoded image data 185a to 185d. The types of 185a to 185d are sequentially changed. That is, the special decoded image data 185a to 185d are continuously displayed over a plurality of update timings by sequentially changing the display contents of the individual images corresponding to the predetermined object data and the texture data applied to the predetermined object data. Used as sequential texture data for changing. For example, when the individual image corresponding to the predetermined object data is a character image representing something other than a person, a cat, a fish, a dog, or an animal, the types of special decoded image data 185a to 185d applied to the predetermined object data are set. By sequentially changing the special decoded image data 185a to 185d in the order of the serial numbers, the pattern and color of the character image change continuously over a plurality of update timings. For example, when the individual image corresponding to the predetermined object data is a background image, the types of the special decoded image data 185a to 185d applied to the predetermined object data are set in the order of the serial numbers of the special decoded image data 185a to 185d. The background image pattern, the background image color, the type of the individual image included in the background image, the display position of the individual image included in the background image, etc. are continuously updated over a plurality of update timings. Will change.

  Since the special moving image data 185 is set as described above, the sequential texture data can be stored in the memory module 83 as one moving image data. As described above, the moving image data is transferred in advance to the pre-transfer area 86a of the VRAM 86, but the decoded image data created by executing the decoding process by the moving picture decoder 95 is stored in the moving image development area 119 in the register 93. Written. The decoded image data is stored and held in the moving image development area 119 until all of the decoded image data is used. By preparing serial texture data as special video data 185 in such a configuration, the special video data 185 is temporarily stored and held in the pre-transfer area 86a of the VRAM 86 when the serial texture data is used. However, the special decoded image data 185a to 185d functioning as serial number texture data is stored and held in the moving image development area 119 in the register 93, not in the advance transfer area 86a. As a result, the moving image development area 119 can be used as a read area for the special decoded image data 185a to 185d using the sequential texture.

  In addition, the compressed data included in the special moving image data 185 is all I picture data and does not include P picture data and B picture data. That is, the same number of I picture data as the number of special decoded image data 185a to 185d after decoding is set, and one special decoded image data 185a to 185d is created from one I picture data. . Thus, even if the special decoded image data 185a to 185d created by decoding the special moving image data 185 is used as texture data, the special decoded image data 185a to 185d is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the image quality of an image from being deteriorated as compared with the case of using normal texture data.

  The attached image data stored in the attached image data group 183 includes a plurality of normal moving image data 184 included in the normal moving image data group 181 and a plurality of special moving image data 185 included in the special moving image data group 182. Are provided in a one-to-one correspondence. The attached image data displays images corresponding to the decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d based on the moving image data 184 and 185 in a period in which the corresponding moving image data 184 and 185 is decoded. This is still image data used for this purpose. Specifically, the attached image data is set so that the content of the image has continuity with respect to the decoded image data in the first use order in the corresponding plurality of decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d. . For example, the attached image data corresponding to the special moving image data 185 is texture data applied to predetermined object data corresponding to the special decoded image data 185a to 185d created from the special moving image data 185.

  The manner in which the decoding processing of the moving image data 184 and 185 is executed using the period during which the image is displayed using the attached image data will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 59A shows a period in which image display is performed using the attached image data, FIG. 59B shows a decoding period of the moving image data 184 and 185, and FIG. 59C shows decoded image data 184a. 184d and 185a to 185d are used to indicate a period during which image display is performed.

  At the timing of t1, the timing for starting the decoding processing of one moving image data 184 and 185 as shown in FIG. 59 (b) is reached, so that one moving image as shown in FIG. 59 (a). An image display period using attached image data corresponding to the data 184 and 185 is started. Thereafter, the decoding processing of the one moving image data 184 and 185 is completed as shown in FIG. 59 (b) at the timing t2 which is the middle timing in the image display period using the attached image data. As a result, decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d created from the single moving image data 184 and 185 are stored in the moving image development area 119 in the register 93. After that, at the timing of t3, the display of the image using the attached image data is finished as shown in FIG. 59A, and the decoded image data 184a to 184a created by the decoding process as shown in FIG. An image display period using 184d and 185a to 185d is started. This display period ends at the timing t4 when the display of the image using the decoded image data in the last order in the decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d created by the decoding process ends.

  As described above, the attached image data is provided in one-to-one correspondence with the moving image data 184 and 185, and the decoding processing of the moving image data 184 and 185 is performed using the image display period using the attached image data. Is executed. As a result, the decoding processing of the moving image data 184 and 185 is executed in a situation in which a corresponding image is displayed with respect to an image displayed using the decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d thereafter. . Therefore, it is possible to execute the decoding processing of the moving image data 184 and 185 without causing a waiting time for image display while ensuring continuity of image display.

  Hereinafter, a processing configuration for displaying an image using the moving image data 184 and 185 will be described. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the moving image data use setting process executed by the effect CPU 82. Note that the moving image data use setting process is executed in the background calculation process in step S603 or the effect calculation process in step S604 in the task process (FIG. 15).

  When it is not the usage period of the moving image data 184 and 185 (step S2101: NO), it is determined whether or not it is the timing to start decoding processing of one moving image data 184 and 185 (step S2102). When it is the timing to start the decoding process (step S2102: YES), one moving image data 184, 185 to be subjected to the current decoding process is grasped (step S2103), and the moving image data 184, 185 is stored. The corresponding attached image data is grasped (step S2104). Then, the decoding designation information indicating that the decoding process should be executed is set in the current drawing list (step S2105).

  By executing the processing in steps S2103 to S2105, one moving image data 184 and 185 and associated image data corresponding thereto are set as image data to be used in the current drawing list. When the moving image data 184 and 185 are set in the drawing list, the moving image data 184 and 185 are pre-transferred to the pre-transfer area 86a of the VRAM 86 and the pre-transferred moving image data 184 is already described. , 185, the decoding process by the moving picture decoder 95 is executed. However, in the rendering process corresponding to the current rendering list, the moving image data 184 and 185 and the decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d created from the moving image data 184 and 185 are not subject to the rendering process. Instead, the attached image data is the target of the drawing process.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2102, or if the process of step S2105 is executed, various image data other than the moving image data 184 and 185 and the attached image data are grasped as the setting targets for the current drawing list (step S2106). ). Then, the parameter information applied to the various image data set in the current drawing list is updated and grasped as a setting target in the drawing list (step S2107).

  Here, when the moving image data 184 and 185 are set in the drawing list as already described, the advance transfer control unit 94 of the effect LSI 85 makes an affirmative determination in step S1013 in the advance transfer process (FIG. 29), The decoding instruction of the moving image data 184 and 185 is given to the moving picture decoder 95 of the effect LSI 85 (step S1014). In this decoding instruction, the moving picture decoder 95 can specify the area where the moving image data 184 and 185 which are the objects of the current decoding instruction are stored in the data storage area 123 in the pre-transfer area 86a of the VRAM 86. And the moving image decoder 95 can specify the areas for storing the decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d obtained by decoding the moving image data 184 and 185 in the moving image development area 119 in the register 93. Is provided to the moving picture decoder 95.

  FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing a decoding process executed by the moving picture decoder 95. In the decoding process, based on the information provided by the advance transfer control unit 94, the address of the area in the data storage area 123 where the moving image data 184, 185 that is the object of the current decoding instruction is stored is grasped ( Step S2201). Also, based on the information provided by the pre-transfer control unit 94, the decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d obtained by decoding the moving image data 184 and 185 are stored in the moving image development area 119 in the register 93. The address of the area to be executed is grasped (step S2202). Thereafter, the moving image data 184 and 185 are read from the data storage area 123 corresponding to the address grasped in step S2201, and the moving image data 184 and 185 are decoded. Then, the decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d as the decoding results are written in each area of the address grasped in step S2202 (step S2203). As a result, the decoded image data 184 a to 184 d and 185 a to 185 d created from the moving image data 184 and 185 are developed in the moving image development area 119 in the register 93. In this case, in the generated decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d, the decoded image data in the first order is stored in the start address area in the moving image development area 119. The subsequent decoded image data is sequentially stored in an area continuous with the start address area.

  Returning to the description of the moving image data use setting process (FIG. 60), when the moving image data 184 and 185 are in use period (step S2101: YES), decoding corresponding to the value of the frame counter provided in the work memory 84 is performed. The image data is grasped as a setting target for the current drawing list (step S2108). The frame counter sets the number of decoded image data among the plurality of decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d created by executing decoding processing on one moving image data 184 and 185 as the current use target. This counter is used to specify whether or not to produce the image, and is cleared to “0” at the timing of starting display of the image using the decoded image data 184a to 184d, 185a to 185d, and then one decoded image. Each time the data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d are set in the drawing list as usage targets, 1 is added. When the decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d corresponding to the value of the frame counter is set as a use target in the drawing list, the area corresponding to the value of the frame counter in the development area 119 for moving images in the register 93 of the effect LSI 85 Address is set as address information. As a result, the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97 of the effect LSI 85 can specify the area in which the decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d to be used are stored. The decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d are read out from the image and drawn.

  Thereafter, various image data other than the decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d are grasped as setting objects for the current drawing list (step S2109). In addition, the parameter information applied to various image data set in the current drawing list is updated and grasped as a setting target in the drawing list (step S2110). Then, the use instruction information of the decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d indicating that the decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d should be used is set in the current drawing list (step S2111).

  As already described, the pre-transfer control unit 94 performs pre-transfer to the pre-transfer area 86a of the image data set in the drawing list received from the rendering CPU 82, but the decoded image data 184a to 184d are used as the objects to be used in the drawing list. , 185a to 185d are set, the decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d are already stored in the moving image development area 119 in the register 93 at that time, so that they are transferred to the advance transfer area 86a. Do not pre-forward. Specifically, in the advance transfer process (FIG. 29), it is determined in step S1003 whether the current transfer target data is the decoded image data 184a to 184d, 185a to 185d, and the current transfer target data is the decoded image data. When it is determined that they are 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d (step S1003: YES), the process for performing the pre-transfer shown in steps S1004 to S1012 is not executed.

  As already described, the advance transfer control unit 94 rewrites the address information set in the drawing list received from the effect CPU 82 for the image data that has been transferred to the advance transfer area 86a (FIG. 30). However, since the decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d are not subject to advance transfer to the advance transfer area 86a as described above, the address information rewriting process is performed on the decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d. (FIG. 30) is not executed. Specifically, in the advance transfer process (FIG. 29), it is determined in step S1003 whether the current transfer target data is the decoded image data 184a to 184d, 185a to 185d, and the current transfer target data is the decoded image data. When it is determined that they are 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d (step S1003: YES), the address information rewriting process shown in step S1015 is not executed. As described above, for the decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d, in the drawing list transmitted from the effect CPU 82, the address of the area stored in the expansion area 119 for moving images in the register 93 is used as address information. Is set.

<Effect of Configuration for Performing Image Display Using Special Moving Image Data 185>
The special moving image data 185 including the I picture data without including the B picture data and the P picture data which are the difference data is provided, and thus the special moving image data 185 is created by executing a decoding process. The special decoded image data 185a to 185d can have higher image quality than the normal decoded image data 184a to 184d created by executing the decoding process on the normal moving image data 184. That is, according to this configuration, it is possible to handle image data having an image quality comparable to that of normal still image data as moving image data. As a result, it is possible to use image data having an image quality comparable to that of the normal still image data without using an area for reading normal still image data.

  The special moving image data 185 includes a plurality of I picture data. As a result, by executing the decoding process on the special moving image data 185, a plurality of pieces of image data having an image quality comparable to that of normal still image data can be created.

  A plurality of special decoded image data 185a to 185d created by executing the decoding process on the special moving image data 185 is used in accordance with the order of use defined in the special moving image data 185. Thus, when using a plurality of special decoded image data 185a to 185d, it is not necessary to set the use order separately from the special moving image data 185. Therefore, the processing load for setting the use order of the image data can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which the special decoded image data 185a to 185d is stored in the memory module 83 in advance as normal still image data.

  During the period in which the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97 perform the drawing process, the moving image decoder 95 provided separately from the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97 performs the decoding process of the special moving image data 185. Executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the period during which the decoding process is being executed from becoming the image display waiting period while not increasing the processing load on the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97.

  Attached image data is provided in one-to-one correspondence with moving image data 184 and 185, and decoding processing of moving image data 184 and 185 is performed using an image display period using the attached image data. The As a result, the decoding processing of the moving image data 184 and 185 is executed in a situation in which a corresponding image is displayed with respect to an image displayed using the decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d thereafter. . Therefore, it is possible to execute the decoding processing of the moving image data 184 and 185 without causing a waiting time for image display while ensuring continuity of image display.

<Second Embodiment>
In the first embodiment, the 3D image is not displayed on the sub display devices 43 and 44, and only the 2D image is displayed. In the present embodiment, the sub display device is similar to the main display device 41. 43 and 44, both 2D images and 3D images can be displayed. Hereinafter, the different configuration will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 62 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a sub-display drawing area 191 in the present embodiment. Similar to the sub display drawing area 116 in the first embodiment, the sub display drawing area 191 is provided with a sub first frame area 117 and a sub second frame area 118. Further, in the drawing area 191 for sub display, in addition to the frame areas 117 and 118, 2D drawing area 192 for first sub in which drawing data for displaying a 2D image on the first sub display device 43 is created. A first sub 3D drawing area 193 in which drawing data for displaying a 3D image on the first sub display device 43 is created, and drawing data for displaying a 2D image on the second sub display device 44. A second sub 2D drawing area 194 to be created and a second sub 3D drawing area 195 in which drawing data for displaying a 3D image on the second sub display device 44 are created are provided. .

  In each of the sub first frame area 117 and the sub second frame area 118, the drawing data created in the first sub 2D drawing area 192 and the drawing created in the first sub 3D drawing area 193 are displayed. The drawing data for one frame to be displayed on the first sub display device 43 is created by combining the data and the drawing data created in the 2D drawing area 194 for the second sub and the second sub use. The drawing data for one frame to be displayed on the second sub display device 44 is created by combining the drawing data created in the 3D drawing area 195. Similarly to the first embodiment, the drawing data corresponding to the first sub display device 43 is set to be distributed on the odd-numbered vertical lines in the horizontal direction in the frame regions 117 and 118, and the frame regions 117 and 118 are set. The drawing data corresponding to the second sub-display device 44 is distributed and set in the even-numbered vertical lines in the horizontal direction.

  Hereinafter, a processing configuration for creating drawing data in the frame areas 117 and 118 will be described. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing a sub-display drawing data composition process executed by the 3D control unit 97. The drawing data composition process for sub display is executed as a part of the drawing data composition process in step S814 in the 3D drawing process (FIG. 20).

  When drawing data corresponding to the first sub display device 43 is created (step S2301: YES), first, the first sub 3D drawing area 193 is set as an output source area (step S2302). Thereafter, a setting process for a drawing number counter provided in the register 93 is executed (step S2303). When the 3D drawing area 193 for the first sub is set as the output source area, the drawing number counter sets the vertical line as one unit for the drawing data created in the 3D drawing area 193 for the first sub. In this case, the 3D control unit 97 specifies how many vertical lines there are in the horizontal direction. In step S2303, a value corresponding to the number of vertical lines of the drawing data created in the first sub 3D drawing area 193 is set in the drawing number counter.

  Thereafter, in the first sub 3D drawing area 193, vertical line data corresponding to the value of the current drawing number counter is extracted (step S2304). Further, among the odd-numbered vertical lines in the horizontal direction in the frame areas 117 and 118 to be drawn, the vertical line corresponding to the current value of the drawing number counter is specified, and the specified frame areas 117 and 118 The vertical line data extracted in step S2304 is drawn on the vertical line (step S2305).

  Thereafter, the value of the drawing number counter is decremented by 1 (step S2306). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the drawing counter after “1” is “0” (step S2307). If the value of the drawing number counter is not “0”, the processing of step S2304 and step S2305 is executed for the vertical line data corresponding to the new value of the drawing number counter. Then, by repeating the processing of step S2304 and step S2305, drawing of the drawing data created in the first sub 3D drawing area 193 in the frame areas 117 and 118 is completed.

  Thereafter, the 2D drawing area 192 for the first sub is set as an output source area (step S2308). Then, a setting process for the drawing number counter provided in the register 93 is executed (step S2309). When the 2D drawing area 192 for the first sub is set as the output source area, the drawing number counter uses the vertical line as one unit for the drawing data created in the 2D drawing area 192 for the first sub. In this case, the 3D control unit 97 specifies how many vertical lines are present in the horizontal direction. In step S2309, a value corresponding to the number of vertical lines of the drawing data created in the 2D drawing area 192 for the first sub is set in the drawing number counter.

  Thereafter, vertical line data corresponding to the current value of the drawing counter is extracted in the first sub 2D drawing area 192 (step S2310). Further, among the odd-numbered vertical lines in the horizontal direction in the frame areas 117 and 118 to be drawn, the vertical line corresponding to the current value of the drawing number counter is specified, and the specified frame areas 117 and 118 The vertical line data extracted in step S2310 is drawn on the vertical line (step S2311).

  Here, a part of the drawing data already created in the first sub 3D drawing area 193 is drawn on the vertical lines of the frame areas 117 and 118. Therefore, in step S2311, any one of color information overwriting processing, color information blending processing, and color information non-setting is set in accordance with the α data set for the vertical line data extracted in step S2310. Execute. Specifically, when the α data corresponds to the opaqueness, the vertical line data extracted in step S2310 is directly overwritten on the vertical lines to be drawn in the frame regions 117 and 118. If the α data is translucent, the vertical line data extracted in step S2310 and the data set for the vertical lines to be drawn in the frame regions 117 and 118 are made to correspond to the α data value. And blend. If the α data corresponds to complete transmission, the vertical line data extracted in step S2310 is not set. This makes it possible to create drawing data as a result of superimposing the drawing data created in the first sub 3D drawing area 193 and the drawing data created in the first sub 2D drawing area 192. It becomes possible.

  Thereafter, the value of the drawing number counter is decremented by 1 (step S2312). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the drawing number counter after the 1 subtraction is “0” (step S2313). If the value of the drawing number counter is not “0”, the processes of steps S2310 and S2311 are executed for the vertical line data corresponding to the new value of the drawing number counter. Then, by repeating the processing of step S2310 and step S2311, the drawing of the drawing data created in the first sub 2D drawing area 192 in the frame areas 117 and 118 is completed.

  On the other hand, when drawing data corresponding to the second sub display device 44 is created (step S2301: NO), first, the 3D drawing area 195 for the second sub is set as an output source area (step S2314). Thereafter, a setting process for a drawing number counter provided in the register 93 is executed (step S2315). When the 3D drawing area 195 for the second sub is set as the output source area, the drawing number counter sets the vertical line as one unit for the drawing data created in the 3D drawing area 195 for the second sub. In this case, the 3D control unit 97 specifies how many vertical lines are present in the horizontal direction. In step S2315, a value corresponding to the number of vertical lines of drawing data created in the second sub 3D drawing area 195 is set in the drawing number counter.

  Thereafter, vertical line data corresponding to the value of the current drawing number counter is extracted from the second sub 3D drawing area 195 (step S2316). Further, among the even-numbered vertical lines in the horizontal direction in the frame areas 117 and 118 that are the drawing target, the vertical line corresponding to the current value of the drawing number counter is specified, and the specified frame areas 117 and 118 The vertical line data extracted in step S2316 is drawn on the vertical line (step S2317).

  Thereafter, the value of the drawing number counter is decremented by 1 (step S2318). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the drawing number counter after the 1 subtraction is “0” (step S2319). If the value of the drawing number counter is not “0”, the processes of step S2316 and step S2317 are executed for the vertical line data corresponding to the new value of the drawing number counter. Then, by repeating the processing of step S2316 and step S2317, drawing of the drawing data created in the second sub 3D drawing area 195 in the frame areas 117 and 118 is completed.

  Thereafter, the 2D drawing area 194 for the second sub is set as an output source area (step S2320). Then, a setting process for a drawing number counter provided in the register 93 is executed (step S2321). When the 2D drawing area 194 for the second sub is set as the output source area, the drawing number counter sets the vertical line as one unit for the drawing data created in the 2D drawing area 194 for the second sub. In this case, the 3D control unit 97 specifies how many vertical lines are present in the horizontal direction. In step S2321, a value corresponding to the number of vertical lines of the drawing data created in the second sub 2D drawing area 194 is set in the drawing number counter.

  Thereafter, vertical line data corresponding to the value of the current drawing number counter is extracted from the 2D drawing area 194 for the second sub (step S2322). Further, among the even-numbered vertical lines in the horizontal direction in the frame areas 117 and 118 that are the drawing target, the vertical line corresponding to the current value of the drawing number counter is specified, and the specified frame areas 117 and 118 The vertical line data extracted in step S2322 is drawn on the vertical line (step S2323).

  Here, a part of the drawing data already created in the second sub 3D drawing area 195 is drawn on the vertical lines of the frame areas 117 and 118. Therefore, in step S2323, any one of color information overwriting processing, color information blending processing, and color information non-setting is set in accordance with the α data set for the vertical line data extracted in step S2322. Execute. Specifically, when the α data corresponds to the opaque state, the vertical line data extracted in step S2322 is overwritten as it is on the drawing target vertical lines in the frame regions 117 and 118. If the α data is translucent, the vertical line data extracted in step S2322 and the data set for the vertical lines to be drawn in the frame regions 117 and 118 are made to correspond to the α data value. And blend. If the α data corresponds to complete transmission, the vertical line data extracted in step S2322 is not set. This makes it possible to create drawing data as a result of superimposing drawing data created in the second sub 3D drawing area 195 and drawing data created in the second sub 2D drawing area 194. It becomes possible.

  Thereafter, the value of the drawing number counter is decremented by 1 (step S2324). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the drawing number counter after the subtraction is “0” (step S2325). If the value of the drawing number counter is not “0”, the processing of step S2322 and step S2323 is executed for the vertical line data corresponding to the new value of the drawing number counter. Then, by repeating the processing of step S2322 and step S2323, drawing of the drawing data created in the 2D drawing area 194 for the second sub to the frame areas 117 and 118 is completed.

  According to the embodiment described above in detail, even when the 2D image and the 3D image can be simultaneously displayed on the sub display devices 43 and 44, the drawing for displaying the image on the first sub display device 43 is possible. Both the data and the drawing data for displaying the image on the second sub display device 44 can be simultaneously created in one frame region 117,118.

<Third Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the address information rewriting process (FIG. 30 in the first embodiment) in the advance transfer control unit 94 is different from that in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the different configuration will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing address information rewriting processing in the present embodiment. First, the area of the VRAM 86 to which the image data to be transferred this time has been transferred is set as a new index area (step S2401). In this embodiment, the advance transfer area 86 a having the data storage area 123 is not set in the VRAM 86. Therefore, the image data to be transferred is not transferred to the data storage area 123, but is image data that has been set in the current or previous drawing list and has not yet been subjected to drawing processing. The data is transferred to an area different from the area where the data is stored.

  Thereafter, the index table provided in the register 93 is rewritten (step S2402). The index table is a table in which a correspondence relationship between index information for specifying an index area and an address group in an area of the VRAM 86 to which the image data to be transferred this time is transferred is set. In the index table, the correspondence relationship between the index information and the address group of the area of the VRAM 86 is set for the number of image data transferred in advance to the VRAM 86. In the index table rewriting process, the index information for specifying the index area newly set in step S2401 is associated with the address group of the area of the VRAM 86 to which the image data to be transferred this time is transferred. Write to the index table.

  Thereafter, the index information for specifying the newly set index area is overwritten on the address information corresponding to the image data to be transferred this time in the drawing list (step S2403). When drawing the image data, the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97 read the index information corresponding to the image data from the address information of the drawing list, and provide the read index information to the transfer controller 92. The transfer controller 92 grasps the area of the VRAM 86 corresponding to the provided index information from the index table, and provides the 2D control unit 96 or the 3D control unit 97 with the image data read from the area of the VRAM 86.

  According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the relationship between the type of the index area and the area of the VRAM 86 is changed as necessary, so that the aggregation designation of the area of the VRAM 86 using the index area can be flexibly used. Is possible.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, when a plurality of 2D drawing lists or a plurality of 3D drawing relists are provided as a drawing list for displaying an image at one update timing from the effect CPU 82, the advance transfer control unit of the effect LSI 85 In 94, the drawing lists are integrated. The different configuration will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing a drawing list output process in the present embodiment executed by the effect CPU 82.

  First, 2D image data aggregation processing is executed (step S2501). In the aggregation processing, all the image data to be set in the 2D drawing list in the current processing round are specified. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the number of 2D image data collected in step S2501 is equal to or larger than a reference number (for example, 10) (step S2502). If the number of 2D image data collected in step S2501 is less than the reference number (step S2502: NO), one 2D drawing list is created (step S2503). All of the 2D image data collected in step S2501 is set in the single 2D drawing list. Then, creation completion data is set in association with the display order priority data for the last order image data in the 2D drawing list (step S2504). The 2D control unit 96 determines whether or not creation completion data is set in the 2D drawing process (FIG. 19), thereby specifying in one or two 2D drawing lists corresponding to image display for one frame. It is specified that the drawing process has been completed for all the image data being processed.

  On the other hand, if the number of 2D image data collected in step S2501 is greater than or equal to the reference number (step S2502: YES), two 2D drawing lists are created (step S2505). In this case, the 2D image data collected in step S2501 is set to be distributed in two 2D drawing lists while ensuring the continuity of the writing order. In each of these two 2D drawing lists, the number of image data is less than the reference number. Then, of these two 2D drawing lists, the 2D control unit 96 sets integration instruction information in the 2D drawing list that is the execution target of the drawing process first (step S2506). Specifically, the integration instruction information is set in association with the display order priority data for the image data in the last order in the 2D drawing list. The integration instruction information instructs the advance transfer control unit 94 to integrate two consecutive drawing lists that have been subjected to the advance transfer process in the advance transfer control unit 94 of the effect LSI 85 into one drawing list. It is information for. Thereafter, of the two 2D drawing lists, the 2D control unit 96 sets creation completion data in the 2D drawing list to be executed later (step S2507). Specifically, the creation completion data is set in association with the display order priority data for the last order image data in the 2D drawing list.

  In the drawing list output process, when the process of step S2504 or step S2507 is executed, a 3D image data aggregation process is executed (step S2508). In the aggregation processing, all the image data to be set in the 3D drawing list in the current processing round are specified. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the number of 3D image data aggregated in step S2508 is equal to or greater than a reference number (for example, 10) (step S2509). If the number of 3D image data collected in step S2508 is less than the reference number (step S2509: NO), one 3D drawing list is created (step S2510). All the 3D image data collected in step S2508 is set in the single 3D drawing list. Then, creation completion data is set in association with the display order priority data for the image data in the last order in the 3D drawing list (step S2511). The 3D control unit 97 determines whether or not creation completion data is set in the 3D drawing process (FIG. 20), thereby specifying in one or two 3D drawing lists corresponding to image display for one frame. It is specified that the drawing process has been completed for all the image data being processed.

  On the other hand, if the number of 3D image data collected in step S2508 is greater than or equal to the reference number (step S2509: YES), two 3D drawing lists are created (step S2512). In this case, the 3D image data collected in step S2508 is set to be distributed to two 3D drawing lists while ensuring the continuity of the writing order. In these two 3D drawing lists, the number of image data is less than the reference number. Then, of these two 3D drawing lists, the 3D control unit 97 sets the integration instruction information in the 3D drawing list that is the execution target of the drawing process first (step S2513). Specifically, the integration instruction information is set in association with the display order priority data for the image data in the last order in the 3D drawing list. Thereafter, of these two 3D drawing lists, the 3D control unit 97 sets creation completion data in the 3D drawing list to be executed later (step S2514). Specifically, the creation completion data is set in association with the display order priority data for the image data in the last order in the 3D drawing list.

  In the drawing list output process, when the process of step S2511 or step S2514 is executed, other processes are executed (step S2515). In other processes, the processes of steps S919 to S921 of the drawing list output process (FIG. 27) in the first embodiment are executed. In addition, it is good also as a structure by which the process of step S901-step S906 of the drawing list output process (FIG. 27) in the said 1st Embodiment is performed before step S2501.

  FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing a pre-transfer process in the present embodiment executed by the pre-transfer control unit 94.

  First, other processing is executed (step S2601). In other processes, the processes of steps S1001 to S1015 of the advance transfer process (FIG. 29) in the first embodiment are executed. Thereafter, on the condition that the pre-transfer for one drawing list has been completed in the current processing time (step S2602: YES), it is determined whether or not the integration instruction information is set in the current drawing list. (Step S2603). When the integration instruction information is set (step S2603: YES), the drawing list set in the next order in advance for the drawing list that has been pre-transferred this time in the pre-transfer storage area 121 in the register 93 is set in advance. The data is read as a transfer process execution target (step S2604). Thereafter, “1” is set to the integration flag provided in the register 93 (step S2605).

  On the other hand, if the integration instruction information is not set in the current drawing list (step S2603: NO), the integration process is performed on condition that “1” is set in the integration flag of the register 93 (step S2606: YES). Is executed (step S2607). In the integration process, the drawing list for which the integration instruction information has been set and the drawing list for which pre-transfer has been completed this time are integrated as one drawing list. In this case, the image data set in each drawing list is collected into one drawing list while ensuring the continuity of the writing order. Thereafter, the integration flag in the register 93 is cleared to “0” (step S2608).

  If a negative determination is made in step S2606, or if the process of step S2608 is executed, a pre-transfer completion process is executed (step S2609). In the advance transfer completion process, if the drawing list for which the current advance transfer is completed is not the target of the integration process (step S2607), the drawing list is stored in the storage area 122 for transfer in the register 93 for the current storage. Are stored in the storage areas 122a to 122t (see FIG. 23). On the other hand, when the drawing list that has been pre-transferred this time is the target of the integration process (step S2607), one drawing list after the integration process is stored in the storage area 122 for transfer in the register 93 this time. It stores in the target storage areas 122a to 122t (see FIG. 23).

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, when a plurality of 2D drawing lists or a plurality of 3D drawing lists are provided from the effect CPU 82 to the effect LSI 85 in order to display an image at one update timing, In the advance transfer control unit 94 of the LSI 85, the plurality of 2D drawing lists or the plurality of 3D drawing lists are integrated into one drawing list. This eliminates the need to refer to a plurality of 2D drawing lists or a plurality of 3D drawing lists when the 2D control unit 96 or the 3D control unit 97 executes drawing processing according to the drawing list.

  Further, the integration of the drawing list as described above is executed when the pre-transfer control unit 94 completes the image data pre-transfer process for a plurality of 2D drawing lists or a plurality of 3D drawing lists. As a result, it is possible to use the opportunity to transfer image data in advance as an opportunity to integrate a plurality of 2D drawing lists or a plurality of 3D drawing lists.

  Note that the number of drawing lists to be integrated is not limited to two, but three or more 2D drawing lists or three or more 3D drawings to display an image for one frame. If the list is supplied from the effect CPU 82, the number may be three. Further, the 2D drawing list and the 3D drawing list provided from the effect CPU 82 for displaying an image for one frame may be configured to be an execution target of the integration process.

<Other embodiments>
In addition, it is not limited to the description content of embodiment mentioned above, A various deformation | transformation improvement is possible within the range which does not deviate from the meaning of this invention. For example, you may change as follows. Incidentally, the following configuration of another embodiment may be applied individually or in combination to the configuration of the above embodiment.

  (1) When image data that has already been read in the pre-transfer area 86a of the VRAM 86 is newly set as a read target in the drawing list provided from the rendering CPU 82, the image data is data in the pre-transfer area 86a. Instead of a configuration that is limited to a configuration that is copied between the storage areas 123, the identification information corresponding to the data storage area 123 in which the image data has already been stored without the copying being performed is the address information of the drawing list. It is good also as a structure set to. In this case, the image data to be read cannot be stored in the data storage area 123 to which the image data is to be written, but it is not necessary to copy the image data between the data storage areas 123.

  (2) A history area may be provided separately from the pre-transfer area 86a of the VRAM 86, and the image data pre-transferred to the pre-transfer area 86a may be stored in the history area according to the pre-transfer order. In this case, for example, a storage area capable of storing a plurality of image data such as 256 or 512 as a history area is secured. The plurality of storage areas are to be stored in accordance with a predetermined order, and when the image data is stored in the last order storage area, the first order storage area is the image data storage area. The configuration is to be stored. In this configuration, every time image data is newly pre-transferred to the pre-transfer area 86a, the image data is stored in a storage area that is a storage target in the history area. When the image data specified in the drawing list provided from the rendering CPU 82 is to be read out to the pre-transfer area 86a, the image data is first stored in one of the history areas. Specify whether it is not stored in the area. If it is stored in any storage area of the history area, the image data stored in that storage area is read out to the advance transfer area 86a. On the other hand, when the image data is not stored in any storage area of the history area, the image data is read from the memory module 83 to the advance transfer area 86a, and the read image data is the current storage target in the history area. Stored in the storage area. Even with this configuration, the frequency of reading image data from the memory module 83 can be reduced. In addition, since the history area is provided separately from the pre-transfer area 86a in this configuration, only the image data specified as the use target in the drawing list provided to the effect LSI 85 is stored in the pre-transfer area 86a. It can be read out. The history area may be provided in a RAM different from the VRAM 86.

  (3) Instead of the configuration in which only the address ID corresponding to the start address in the address ID group set in the address information of the drawing list provided from the rendering CPU 82 is set in the search table 125, the final address is used. Only the corresponding address ID may be set in the search table 125, or only the address ID corresponding to the intermediate address may be set in the search table 125. Further, an address ID corresponding to the start address and an address ID corresponding to the final address may be set in the search table 125, or the entire address ID group may be set in the search table 125. . This makes it possible to more accurately identify the type of image data stored in the data storage area 123 of the advance transfer area 86a.

  (4) Instead of a configuration in which an address ID is set in the search table 125 as information for specifying the type of image data stored in the data storage area 123, for example, identification information is set in each of the image data. In such a case, the identification information may be set in the search table 125 as information for specifying the type of the image data. In this case, if the identification information has an information amount smaller than that of one address ID, the information amount for specifying the type of the image data can be reduced.

  (5) A resident area is provided in the VRAM 86 in addition to the pre-transfer area 86a, and the image data for starting the change and the image data for notifying abnormality necessary for starting the effect for the game times are the operating power to the effect CPU 82. May be read out to the resident area when the supply is started, and the read state may be maintained while the operating power is supplied. In this case, an image can be displayed using image data read from the resident area even if a start condition for starting an effect for playing a game at an arbitrary timing or a start condition for starting abnormality notification is satisfied. Compared with the case where image data is read from the memory module 83, it is possible to shorten the period required from when the start condition is satisfied until image display is started.

  (6) When the data to be read has already been read out to the RAM, the data is not read from the ROM, and when the data to be read has already been read out to the RAM A configuration in which data is copied between areas of RAM may be applied to data other than image data.

  (7) When the pre-transfer of the image data specified in the drawing list to the pre-transfer area 86a is completed, the identification information corresponding to the data storage area 123 of the transfer destination is overwritten on the address information of the drawing list. The configuration is not limited, and the identification information may be set as information different from the address information in the drawing list. Even in this case, since the information corresponding to the transfer destination area is not set in the drawing list provided from the effect CPU 82, the amount of information in the drawing list can be reduced.

  (8) The pre-transfer control unit 94 specifies whether or not the image data specified in the drawing list has been stored in the transfer destination data storage area 123 in the pre-transfer area 86a, and the stored state. It may be configured that identification information corresponding to the data storage area 123 is set in the drawing list when it has been specified. Thus, setting identification information in the drawing list means that reading of the image data has been completed.

  (9) Instead of the configuration in which the decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d created by executing the decoding process on the moving image data 184 and 185 is stored in the register 93, the data storage in the advance transfer area 86a It is good also as a structure memorize | stored in the area 123. FIG. In this configuration, when one decoded image data 184a to 184d, 185a to 185d is stored in one data storage area 123, the decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d are stored in the data storage area. When the information is stored in 123, the identification information corresponding to the data storage area 123 may be set in the address information of the drawing list. Further, in the configuration in which the identification information is set even in the case of the decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d as described above, the image data whose display order priority data is “1” or later in the drawing list is the previous display order. The address is read out in an area where the address is continuous with respect to the area in which the image data corresponding to the priority data is read out. Accordingly, only the offset value can be set in the address information corresponding to the image data whose display order priority data is “1” or later in the drawing list. As a result, it is possible to reduce the information amount of the address information after the advance transfer of the image data is completed.

  (10) When the advance transfer of image data is completed, the image data whose display order priority data is “1” or later in the drawing list is not limited to a configuration in which an offset value is set as address information. Even in the case of data, identification information that is information for specifying an address of an area from which the image data is read may be set in the address information.

  (11) A drawing for displaying an image having a configuration in which information corresponding to a data transfer destination area is set in the instruction information when the pre-transfer of data designated in the instruction information such as a drawing list is completed. The present invention may be applied to a configuration using instruction information different from the list.

  (12) Three or four or more 2D drawing lists are substituted for the configuration in which a maximum of two 2D drawing lists are provided from the effect CPU 82 to the effect LSI 85 in order to display an image at one update timing. It is good also as a structure where a list can be provided. Further, in order to display an image at one update timing, a maximum of two 3D drawing lists are provided from the presentation CPU 82 to the presentation LSI 85, and three or four or more 3D drawing lists are provided. May be provided.

  (13) Instead of a configuration in which a plurality of drawing lists are always provided from the effect CPU 82 to the effect LSI 85 to display an image at one update timing, one image list is displayed to display an image at one update timing. Only the drawing list may be provided from the effect CPU 82 to the effect LSI 85. For example, in a configuration that does not have a function of displaying a 3D image, only one 2D drawing list is provided. In this case, if the number of 2D image data to be used at one update timing is less than the reference number, only one drawing list is provided, and the 2D image data to be used at one update timing is the reference. If the number is more than the number, a plurality of drawing lists may be provided.

  (14) The present invention is not limited to a configuration in which 2D image data and 3D image data are set to different drawing lists, and the 2D image data and 3D image data are the same drawing list. It is good also as a structure set to. In this case, the number of drawing lists provided from the effect CPU 82 can be reduced. However, in this configuration, 2D image data and 3D image data must be clearly distinguished in the drawing list. Specifically, the 2D image data is set to display order priority data in a predetermined numerical range, and the 3D image data has a specific numerical range that does not overlap with the predetermined numerical range. The display order priority data may be set. As a result, even if the 2D image data and the 3D image data are configured to be aggregated and set in the same drawing list, the 2D image data and the 3D image data are displayed in the drawing list. Can be clearly distinguished.

  In the configuration in which the 2D image data and the 3D image data are aggregated and set in the same drawing list as described above, one of the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97 has the drawing list. Since the drawing process using the drawing list is executed on the other side after the drawing process using is completed, there is no need to provide the same drawing list from the effect CPU 82 to the effect LSI 85.

  (15) The present invention is not limited to a configuration in which the image data corresponding to the main display device 41, the first sub display device 43, and the second sub display device 44 are collected and set in one drawing list. The image data corresponding to the display device may be set in a drawing list different from the image data corresponding to the other display devices. For example, a rendering list in which only image data corresponding to the main display device 41 is set and a rendering list in which image data corresponding to the first sub display device 43 and the second sub display device 44 are set are displayed from the effect CPU 82. A configuration may be provided, or a rendering list corresponding to each of the main display device 41, the first sub display device 43, and the second sub display device 44 may be provided from the effect CPU 82. In this case, since the display devices 41, 43, and 44 to be set are distinguished on a drawing list basis, the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97 specify the display devices 41, 43, and 44 to be set. It becomes easy to do.

  (16) The drawing list provided from the effect CPU 82 may be divided into a plurality of drawing lists in the effect LSI 85, and each of the divided drawing lists may be used in the 2D control unit 96 or the 3D control unit 97. Good. For example, a rendering list in which 2D image data and 3D image data are aggregated for use is provided from the rendering CPU 82 to the rendering LSI 85, and the rendering LSI 85 pre-transfers the image data. The timing may be divided into a drawing list in which 2D image data is set and a drawing list in which 3D image data is set from the one drawing list. Thereby, the drawing list corresponding to each of the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97 is individually provided to the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97 while suppressing the number of drawing lists provided from the rendering CPU 82 to a small number. It becomes possible to do.

  (17) A plurality of the same drawing lists may be provided from the effect CPU 82 to the effect LSI 85. In this case, for example, not only the address ID corresponding to the storage area in the image data memory module 83 but also information corresponding to the storage destination area in the VRAM 86 of the image data is set in the drawing list. One drawing list among the plurality of the same drawing lists may be provided to the pre-transfer control unit 94 and one drawing list may be provided to the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97. According to this configuration, the drawing list in which the advance transfer control unit 94 has not completed the advance transfer of all image data can be set as the execution target of the drawing process in the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97.

  (18) A read completion flag is provided corresponding to each data storage area 123 of the advance transfer area 86a, and when the transfer of image data to the transfer destination data storage area 123 is completed in the advance transfer control unit 94. The read completion flag corresponding to the data storage area 123 may be set to “1”. In this case, the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97 read the image data from the data storage area 123 on the condition that “1” is set in the read completion flag, and read the image data. Alternatively, the read completion flag corresponding to the data storage area 123 may be cleared to “0”. As a result, it is possible to prevent the image data reading process from being executed from the data storage area 123 where the image data reading has not been completed.

  (19) The number of areas of the VRAM 86 that are collectively specified by one identification information of the index areas 127a to 127c may be different for each of the index areas 127a to 127c. As a result, it is possible to designate an area having a size suitable for the type of data to be stored in each of the index areas 127a to 127c with one piece of identification information.

  (20) The present invention is not limited to a configuration in which a plurality of areas of the VRAM 86 are designated by one identification information in the index areas 127a to 127c, but a configuration in which one area of the VRAM 86 is designated by one identification information. Good. Further, there may be an index area in which one area of the VRAM 86 is designated by one identification information and an index area in which a plurality of areas of the VRAM 86 are designated by one identification information.

  (21) One index area 127a to 127c may include a VRAM 86 area where addresses are not continuous, and an area where the addresses are not continuous is included as an area of VRAM 86 specified by one identification information. It is good also as a structure.

  (22) The configuration is not limited to a configuration in which a plurality of types of I picture data are set in the special moving image data 185, and a configuration in which only one type of I picture data is set in the special moving image data 185 may be adopted. . In this case, there is only one type of special decoded image data created by executing decoding processing on the special moving image data 185. Even with this configuration, still image data such as texture data can be read out to an area different from the pre-transfer area 86 a of the VRAM 86.

  In this configuration, the special moving image data 185 may have a plurality of the same type of I picture data. In this case, a plurality of identical special decoded image data are created by executing the decoding process on the special moving image data 185. In this configuration, when the same special decoded image data is used over a plurality of update timings, the same special decoded image data is simply obtained by using the special decoded image data according to the order of use corresponding to the special moving image data 185. It can be used over a plurality of update timings. In addition, when a plurality of the same special decoded image data is created in this way, only one special decoded image data is used, and the remaining special decoded image data is stored after the decoding process. It may be configured to be erased from the existing area.

  (23) A configuration in which a separate storage area is provided in the VRAM 86 or the register 93, and the special decoded image data 185a to 185d created by executing the decoding process on the special moving image data 185 is stored separately in the separate storage area. It is good. In this case, even if the use period of the special decoded image data 185a to 185d is once ended, the special decoded image data 185 is configured to read the special decoded image data 185a to 185d from another storage area at the next use. There is no need to perform the decoding process again for.

  (24) The special moving image data 185 has difference data such as B picture data and P picture data, but the difference data may be set so that the difference becomes “0”. In this case, a plurality of the same special decoded image data is created.

  (25) The texture data stored in advance in the memory module 83 as still image data is all read from the memory module 83 and supplied to the texture of the VRAM 86 when supply of operating power to the effect CPU 82 is started. It is good also as a structure written in an area. In this case, the required storage capacity in the texture area increases as the type of texture data increases. On the other hand, every time the type of texture data to be used changes, the processing load on the rendering LSI 85 increases if the type of texture data read into the texture area is changed. On the other hand, by storing some of the texture data as the special moving image data 185, it is not necessary to replace the texture area, and some of the texture data is expanded for moving images in the register 93 as necessary. Reading to the area 119 becomes possible. Also, when the moving image development area 119 is also used as an area for using texture data, the moving image development area 119 does not read the texture data itself but decodes the special moving image data 185. Since the special decoded image data 185a to 185d created by execution is read out, the handling of the moving image development area 119 in the rendering LSI 85 is changed according to the type of data read out to the moving image development area 119. There is no need.

  In the above configuration, not only the texture data but also the object data may be read from the memory module 83 to the object area of the VRAM 86 when the supply of the operating power to the effect CPU 82 is started. In this case, it is not necessary to read the object data to the VRAM 86 at an appropriate timing.

  (26) Drawing data for displaying an image on the first sub display device 43 (hereinafter also referred to as first drawing data) and drawing data for displaying an image on the second sub display device 44 (hereinafter referred to as second data). (Also referred to as drawing data) is set in one frame area 117, 118, the first drawing data and the second drawing data are distributed in the odd-numbered vertical lines and the even-numbered vertical lines in the horizontal arrangement order. The present invention is not limited to a configuration in which drawing data is set in a distributed manner.

  For example, the first drawing data may be set in the left half of one frame region 117, 118, and the second drawing data may be set in the right half. Further, for example, the first drawing data may be set in the upper half in one frame region 117, 118, and the second drawing data may be set in the lower half. Further, for example, the first drawing data and the second drawing data are set in a distributed manner by dispersing them in odd-numbered horizontal lines and even-numbered horizontal lines in the arrangement order in the vertical direction in one frame region 117, 118. It is good also as a structure. In addition, the first drawing part data constituting a part of the first drawing data and the second drawing part data constituting a part of the second drawing data are not alternately arranged in units of one line, The minimum unit dot of one drawing data and the minimum unit dot of the second drawing data may be alternately arranged in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction.

  (27) The number of dots of the first sub display device 43 and the number of dots of the second sub display device 44 are not limited to the same configuration, and the number of dots of the first sub display device 43 and the second sub display device are not limited. The number of dots of 44 may be different. In this case, the number of dots included in the area reserved for setting the first drawing data in one frame area 117, 118 and the number of dots included in the area reserved for setting the second drawing data. May be different configurations depending on the difference in the number of dots, or the same configuration.

  (28) In a situation where one of the first sub display device 43 and the second sub display device 44 is hidden behind the center frame 42 and cannot be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10, the other display device It is good also as a structure where the situation which becomes visible can arise. In this case, the one display device hidden behind the center frame 42 may be configured such that no image is displayed. Even with this configuration, drawing data for displaying an image on the other display device is set in a part of the region corresponding to the drawing data in one frame region 117,118. In this configuration, the drawing data corresponding to the one display device may not be set, and although the image is not displayed on the one display device, the drawing data corresponding to the one display device is set. It is good also as a structure to be called. In the configuration in which the drawing data corresponding to the one display device is set, regardless of whether or not an image is displayed on the one display device, the one frame region 117 or 118 is displayed. On the other hand, both the first drawing data and the second drawing data are set.

  The one display device hidden behind the center frame 42 may be configured to display the same color. In this case, since the drawing data for causing the same color display to be performed is set as the drawing data corresponding to the one display device, the one display device is hidden behind the center frame 42. The first drawing data and the second drawing data are both set for one frame region 117, 118 regardless of whether or not it is in the situation.

  (29) When each of the sub display devices 43 and 44 is disposed at the initial position, the sub display devices 43 and 44 may be configured to be hidden behind the center frame 42 and invisible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In this case, when the sub display devices 43 and 44 are arranged at the initial positions, no image is displayed on each of the sub display devices 43 and 44, but the first frame regions 117 and 118 have the first It is good also as a structure by which both 1 drawing data and 2nd drawing data are set. Further, when the sub display devices 43 and 44 are arranged at the initial positions, the sub display devices 43 and 44 display the same color, and the same frame region 117 and 118 displays the same color. Both the first drawing data and the second drawing data for performing the above may be set. In this case, the same color information (numerical value information) is set for all the dots in the one frame region 117, 118.

  (30) A configuration in which only the first drawing data is set in one frame area 117, 118 at a predetermined drawing timing, and only the second drawing data is set in the one frame area 117, 118 at another drawing timing. Also good. In this case, a part of one frame region 117, 118 may be a region for setting the first drawing data, and another region may be a region for setting the second drawing data. If the drawing timing is to set one drawing data, the first drawing data is set over the entire frame region 117, 118, and if the drawing timing is to set the second drawing data, the second drawing data is one. The frame area 117, 118 may be set over the entire frame area.

  (31) By inputting one pulse of the clock signal, an image signal corresponding to one dot in the first drawing data is output to the first sub display device 43, and an image signal corresponding to one dot in the second drawing data is output. The configuration is not limited to the configuration that is output to the second sub display device 44, and an image signal corresponding to a plurality of dots in the first drawing data is output to the first sub display device 43 by inputting one pulse of the clock signal. In addition, an image signal corresponding to a plurality of dots in the second drawing data may be output to the second sub display device 44. Further, the number of dots to be output of the image signal by inputting one pulse of the clock signal may be different between the first drawing data and the second drawing data.

  In addition, an image signal corresponding to one dot in the first drawing data is output to the first sub display device 43 by inputting one pulse of the clock signal, and one dot in the second drawing data is input by inputting the next one pulse. The image signal corresponding to may be output to the second sub display device 44. In this case, although it takes a long time to complete the output of the image signals for all the dots in the first drawing data and the second drawing data, the output of the image signal to the first sub display device 43 and the second sub Output of image signals to the display device 44 can be performed alternately.

  (32) The first drawing data and the second drawing data may have different dot numbers. In this case, output of the image signal to the first sub display device 43 and the second sub display in a situation where there is a dot for which output of the image signal has not been completed in both the first drawing data and the second drawing data. The output of the image signal to the device 44 is alternately performed, and after the output of the image signal having the smaller number of dots in the first drawing data and the second drawing data is completed, the image signal having the larger number of dots is output. Only the output may be repeated.

  (33) The target display devices in which the image data to be used are set in one drawing list are all the main display device 41, the first sub display device 43, and the second sub display device 44. There is no limitation, and the configuration in which the objects to be collectively set may be the main display device 41 and the first sub display device 43, or may be the main display device 41 and the second sub display device 44. The first sub display device 43 and the second sub display device 44 may be configured. In a configuration in which four or more display devices are provided, image data corresponding to four or more display devices may be set in a single drawing list.

  (34) The display order priority data is not limited to the configuration in which the display order priority data is also used as information for designating the display devices 41, 43, 44 to be set in the drawing list, and the display devices 41, 43 to be set. , 44 may be configured such that information for specifying the type is set in the drawing list. In this case, for example, the same display order priority data among the image data group corresponding to the main display device 41, the image data group corresponding to the first sub display device 43, and the image data group corresponding to the second sub display device 44. It is also possible to have a configuration in which image data for which is set exists. In this configuration, the use order of the image data is preset according to the type of the display devices 41, 43, 44 such as the main display device 41 → the first sub display device 43 → the second sub display device 44. Even if the same display order priority data exists between the different display devices 41, 43, and 44, the image data can be sequentially used.

  (35) Display target data and display order data are set in the execution target table for display control, and the display order priority data is derived from the display target data and the display order data. Instead, the display order priority data may be set in the display control execution target table. In this case, it is possible to reduce the processing load in that it is not necessary to derive display order priority data from display target data and display order data.

  (36) The display content of the rotation period image 153 is not limited to that in the above embodiment, and is arbitrary. For example, as the rotation period image 153, the main display device 41, the first sub display device 43, and the second sub display The same color display may be performed over the entire display device 44, and the geometric pattern is displayed over the entire main display device 41, the first sub display device 43, and the second sub display device 44. It is good.

  (37) The main display device 41, the first sub display device 43, and the second sub display device 44 display images having vertical and horizontal orientations during the period in which the sub display devices 43 and 44 rotate. It is good also as a structure displayed without making it follow the rotation of the sub display apparatuses 43 and 44 so that a player may recognize that it is displayed on the non-rotation surface. For example, at least one of a character image and a background image is displayed over the main display device 41, the first sub display device 43, and the second sub display device 44, and the image is rotated by the sub display devices 43 and 44. May be configured to continue to be displayed in the same range while maintaining the vertical and horizontal directions. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for a player who is paying attention to the image to recognize that the sub display devices 43 and 44 are rotating.

  (38) When the sub display devices 43 and 44 slide in the horizontal direction or the vertical direction in front of the main display device 41, the main display device 41, the first sub display device 43, and the second sub display device 44 An image may be displayed over the screen, and displayed without following the sliding movement of the sub display devices 43 and 44 so that the player can recognize that the image is displayed on the fixed surface. For example, at least one of a character image and a background image is displayed over the main display device 41, the first sub display device 43, and the second sub display device 44, and the image is a slide operation of the sub display devices 43 and 44. May be configured to continue to be displayed in the same range while maintaining the vertical and horizontal directions. This makes it difficult for the player who is paying attention to the image to recognize that the sub display devices 43 and 44 are slid.

  (39) The image display period that makes it difficult for the player to recognize that the sub display devices 43 and 44 are moving is not limited to the rotation period in which the sub display devices 43 and 44 rotate. For example, after the sub display devices 43 and 44 start sliding from the initial position, the sub display devices 43 and 44 may continue until the sub display devices 43 and 44 are arranged at the separation position. This makes it possible to displace the sub display devices 43 and 44 from the initial position to the separation position without the player noticing, and to give the player an unexpectedness.

  (40) The present invention is not limited to a configuration in which a plurality of displaceable sub-display devices 43 and 44 are provided, and may be a configuration in which only one is provided, or a configuration in which three or more are provided. .

  (41) The sub display devices 43 and 44 may be configured to be able to make one or more turns in a predetermined direction with a direction in which the display surface of the main display device 41 faces as a rotation axis.

  (42) In the configuration in which the second operation port 34 is provided in the right area of the game area PA and the launch operation is performed so that the game ball flows down the right area in the high frequency support mode, the high frequency support mode The right-side notification image 143 on the sub side may be displayed.

  (43) Although the rotation speed of the sub right-hand notification image 143 is changed according to the rotation mode of the sub display devices 43 and 44, the rotation speed of the sub-right notification image 143 is not changed. It is good.

  (44) The abnormality notification image 176 may be displayed even in a region that can face the sub display devices 43 and 44 in the main display device 41 during the execution period of the displacement effect of the sub display devices 43 and 44. . In this case, it is possible to secure a wide area where the abnormality notification image 176 can be displayed.

  (45) When a notification target event occurs in the execution period of the displacement effect of the sub display devices 43 and 44, an abnormality notification corresponding to the notification target event according to the order in which the notification target event occurred regardless of the priority of the notification target event The image 176 may be displayed sequentially. Moreover, instead of the configuration, when a notification target event occurs during the execution period of the displacement effect of the sub display devices 43 and 44, the notification target event is changed according to the priority of the notification target event regardless of the generation order of the notification target events. Corresponding abnormality notification images 176 may be sequentially displayed.

  (46) When a predetermined notification target event occurs in the execution period of the displacement effect of the sub display devices 43 and 44, the abnormality notification image 176 corresponding to the notification target event is displayed on the main display device 41 and The display devices 43 and 44 may be configured to return to the initial positions. This makes it possible to focus attention on the abnormality notification image 176 displayed on the main display device 41.

  (47) When a predetermined notification target event occurs in the execution period of the displacement effect of the sub display devices 43, 44, the abnormality notification image 176 corresponding to the notification target event is not the main display device 41 but the sub display device 43. , 44 may be used. Thereby, the abnormality notification image 176 can be made conspicuous.

  (48) Only a 3D image using 3D image data may be displayed. In this case, all of the image data corresponding to each of the main display device 41, the first sub display device 43, and the second sub display device 44 are arranged in a common world coordinate system, and drawing for the main display device 41 is performed from that state. The data, the drawing data for the first sub display device 43, and the drawing data for the second sub display device 44 may be created individually. As a result, it is not necessary to individually prepare the world coordinate system corresponding to each of the display devices 41, 43, and 44, so that the processing load can be reduced.

  (49) The camera (viewpoint) is configured to be individually set for each image data arranged in the world coordinate system. Instead, a single camera is used for all image data arranged in the world coordinate system. A configuration may be adopted in which cameras are set in common. Further, it may be configured to set color information such as texture mapping before projection.

  (50) Instead of the configuration in which the effect control device 80 is controlled by the distribution control board 71 based on the command transmitted from the main control device 60, the effect control is performed based on the command transmitted from the main control device 60. The apparatus 80 may be configured to control the distribution control board 71. Further, instead of the configuration in which the distribution control board 71 and the effect control device 80 are separately provided, these may be provided as a single control device, and one of these functions is the main control device 60. These functions may be integrated into the main controller 60.

  (51) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, for example, a pachinko machine in which an electric accessory is released a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a game ball in a specific area of a special device The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine that generates a right if a player enters, a pachinko machine equipped with other objects, an arrangement ball machine, a sparrow ball, and other gaming machines.

  Also, a non-ball-type gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels with a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction, starts rotation of the reel by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and a stop switch is operated. If a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the active line visible from the display window after the reel has stopped after a predetermined time has passed, a privilege such as paying out medals is given to the player The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine.

  In addition, the gaming machine main body supported by the outer frame so as to be openable and closable is provided with a storage unit and a capture device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are captured by the capture device. Thus, the present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, which starts rotating the reel.

<Invention Group Extracted from Each Embodiment>
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for easy understanding, the corresponding configuration in each of the above embodiments is appropriately shown in parentheses, but is not limited to the specific configuration shown in parentheses.

<Feature A group>
Feature A1. First storage means (memory module 83) for storing information in advance;
Second storage means (VRAM 86) for storing information read from the first storage means;
A storage specifying unit (a function for executing the processes of steps S1007 and S1008 in the advance transfer control unit 94) for specifying whether or not the predetermined information to be transferred is stored in the second storage unit;
When the storage specifying means specifies that the predetermined information is not stored in the second storage means, the predetermined information is transferred from the first storage means, and the predetermined information is stored in the second storage means. If the storage specifying unit specifies that the predetermined information is transferred, the transfer executing unit that does not transfer the predetermined information from the first storage unit (executes the processes of steps S1009 and S1010 in the advance transfer control unit 94) Function)
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature A1, the information stored in advance in the first storage means is transferred to the second storage means, so that when the information is used, the second storage means is not read directly from the first storage means. Read from. In this case, when the predetermined information is a transfer instruction target, if the predetermined information is not stored in the second storage unit, the predetermined information is read from the first storage unit to the second storage unit, If the predetermined information is already stored in the second storage means, the predetermined information is not transferred from the first storage means. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the predetermined information from being further transferred from the first storage means even though the predetermined information is already stored in the second storage means. It is possible to increase the efficiency of reading information from the.

  Feature A2. The storage specifying unit stores that the predetermined information is stored in the second storage unit, and the storage area of the second storage unit in which the predetermined information is stored is the transfer instruction. In the case where the storage area is different from the storage area specified in step 1, the predetermined information stored in the separate storage area is used to store the predetermined information in the storage area. The gaming machine according to Feature A1, further comprising execution means (function of executing the process of Step S1011 in the advance transfer control unit 94).

  According to the feature A2, when a transfer instruction is issued for the predetermined information that has already been read to the second storage unit, the predetermined information is copied between the storage areas of the second storage unit. Thus, it is possible to store the predetermined information in the storage area designated as the transfer instruction while making it unnecessary to further read the predetermined information from the first storage unit.

  Feature A3. The storage specifying unit uses a search information group (search table 125) in which a correspondence relationship between the type of storage area of the second storage unit and the type of information stored in the storage area is set. The gaming machine according to feature A1 or A2, wherein it is specified whether or not the predetermined information is stored in the second storage means.

  According to the feature A3, since the search information group is provided, it is possible to efficiently specify whether or not the predetermined information that is the target of the transfer instruction has already been read to the second storage unit. It becomes possible.

  Feature A4. When the predetermined information is stored in the storage destination storage area designated by the transfer instruction in the second storage means, the correspondence relationship between the storage destination type and the predetermined information type is new. The game according to Feature A3, further comprising content update means (a function of executing the process of step S1012 in the advance transfer control unit 94) for updating the content of the search information group so as to be set to Machine.

  According to feature A4, when information is transferred to the storage area of the second storage means, the contents of the search information group are updated so that the correspondence between the storage area and the information is reflected. The As a result, the contents of the search information group can be made to correspond to the latest storage state of the second storage means.

Feature A5. In the transfer instruction, identification information (address ID) for specifying an area in which the predetermined information is stored in the first storage means is used as information for causing the transfer execution means to specify the type of the predetermined information. Provided,
The game according to Feature A3 or A4, wherein the information for identification or information included in the information for identification is set in the information group for search as information for identifying the type of the predetermined information Machine.

  According to the feature A5, the information provided by the transfer instruction is set in the search information group. As a result, the information provided in the transfer instruction can be obtained when specifying whether or not the predetermined information that is the target of the transfer instruction is stored in the second storage unit using the search information group. It can be used as it is. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration when performing the identification.

Feature A6. The identification information includes information corresponding to a start address of an area where the predetermined information is stored in the first storage unit,
The gaming machine according to Feature A5, wherein information corresponding to the start address is set in the search information group as information for specifying the type of the predetermined information.

  According to the feature A6, since the information for specifying the type of the predetermined information in the search information group is information corresponding to the start address, all addresses in the area where the predetermined information is stored in the first storage unit Compared to a configuration that includes information corresponding to, the amount of information for specifying the type of predetermined information in the search information group can be reduced, and the predetermined information is stored in the second storage means. It is possible to reduce the processing load when referring to the search information group in order to identify whether or not it is.

Feature A7. The predetermined information is information stored over a plurality of storage areas in the second storage means,
The type information set for specifying the type of the storage area in the search information group is identification information for identifying the plurality of storage areas as a group of storage areas. The gaming machine according to any one of A6 to A6.

  According to the feature A7, since the plurality of storage areas in the second storage unit are specified as a group of storage areas using the identification information, it is possible to suppress the amount of type information in the search information group It becomes.

Feature A8. The second storage means has a plurality of storage areas,
The information is sequentially stored in the plurality of storage areas in accordance with a predetermined order, and in the next storage process execution time after the storage process of information in the last storage area is performed, the first order storage is performed. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A7, wherein information is stored in the area.

  According to the feature A8, since the storage area of the second storage unit loops as an execution target of the storage process, the storage capacity of the second storage unit can be made appropriate. In addition, since the plurality of storage areas of the second storage unit are sequentially subjected to storage processing according to a predetermined order, the processing configuration for specifying the storage area to be executed for storage processing is simplified. It becomes possible.

Feature A9. The first storage means stores arbitrary information (image data for start of variation) used by the control means when a predetermined event that can occur at an arbitrary timing occurs at least in a predetermined situation.
The arbitrary information is stored in the predetermined storage area of the second storage unit so that the arbitrary information is stored in the predetermined storage area of the second storage unit so that the state in which the arbitrary information is stored in the second storage unit is maintained in the predetermined state. Storage maintaining means (a function for executing the processing of steps S903 to S906 in the effect CPU 82) is provided so as to be stored in the storage area that is the execution target of the storage processing in the second storage means. The gaming machine according to Feature A8.

  According to the feature A9, even if the storage area of the second storage unit loops as an execution target of the storage process, arbitrary information is continuously stored in the second storage unit in a predetermined situation. As a result, it is possible to read arbitrary information in the second storage means at the timing when the predetermined event occurs, and from the first storage means to the second storage means at the timing when the predetermined event occurs. Does not require the transfer of any information. In particular, according to this configuration, since it is not necessary to prepare a dedicated storage area for storing arbitrary information in the second storage unit, the degree of freedom in using the storage area of the second storage unit is increased. It is done.

  Feature A10. The storage maintaining unit uses the arbitrary information stored in the predetermined storage area to store the arbitrary information in a storage area that is an execution target of the storage process in the second storage unit. The gaming machine according to Feature A9.

  According to the feature A10, it is not necessary to periodically read the arbitrary information from the first storage unit in order to keep the arbitrary information stored in the second storage unit in a predetermined situation. Therefore, it is possible to keep the arbitrary information stored in the second storage means in a predetermined situation while improving the information reading efficiency.

Feature A11. The second storage means is faster than the speed required for reading information from the first storage means,
The gaming machine includes control means (2D control part 96, 3D control part 97) for executing control using information transferred to the second storage means. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the feature A11, the information is read to the second storage means that is faster than the speed required for reading the information from the first storage means, and control is performed by the control means using the read information. As a result, the time required for reading information in the control means can be shortened. In this case, by providing the configuration described in the feature A1 or the like, it is possible to suitably transfer information to the second storage unit.

  In addition, with respect to any one configuration of the features A1 to A11, the features A1 to A11, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E11, the features F1 to F10, and the features G1 to G10. Any one or more of the features H1 to H6, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J3, and features K1 to K8 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature B group>
Feature B1. First storage means (memory module 83) for storing control information in advance;
Second storage means (VRAM 86) for storing the control information read from the first storage means;
Instruction control means (production CPU 82) for providing instruction information (drawing list);
A transfer execution unit (preliminary transfer control unit 94) for causing the control information specified in the instruction information to be read into the second storage unit;
Control execution means (2D control unit 96, 3D control unit 97) for executing control using the control information according to the instruction information;
With
In the instruction information provided from the instruction control means, storage source information (address ID) for specifying an area where the control information is stored in the first storage means is set,
The transfer execution means executes the transfer process using the storage source information, and when the control information specified in the instruction information is read into the second storage means, (2) Set storage destination information (identification information) for specifying an area from which the control information is read in the storage means in the instruction information;
The control execution means uses the instruction information after the storage destination information is set by the transfer execution means, and reads the control information specified in the instruction information. A gaming machine, wherein the control information is read from a storage area of a storage means.

  According to the feature B1, when the control information is transferred to the second storage unit according to the storage source information set in the instruction information, the area for storing the control information in the second storage unit is specified. The storage destination information is set in the instruction information. Thereby, since it is not necessary to set both the storage source information and the storage destination information in the instruction information from the beginning, the information amount of the instruction information transmitted from the instruction control unit can be suppressed. Further, when the control information is actually transferred to the second storage means, information corresponding to the area of the second storage means to which the control information is transferred is set as the storage destination information in the instruction information. It becomes possible to improve the reliability of the content of the prior information.

  Feature B2. The gaming machine according to claim B1, wherein the transfer execution unit sets the storage destination information so as to overwrite the storage source information of the instruction information.

  According to the feature B2, when the control information is transferred according to the storage information of the instruction information, the storage destination information corresponding to the area of the second storage means to which the control information is transferred is the storage source. The instruction information is set to overwrite the information. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of instruction information provided to the control execution means after the transfer of the control information is completed.

  Feature B3. The gaming machine according to Feature B2, wherein the storage destination information has a smaller amount of information than the storage source information.

  According to the feature B3, it is possible to reduce the processing load when the storage execution information is overwritten on the storage source information in the transfer execution unit.

  Feature B4. A storage area for storing the instruction information provided from the instruction control means (storage area for transfer 121 before transfer), and a storage area for storing the instruction information for which the setting of the storage destination information by the transfer execution means has been completed ( The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B3, wherein the storage area 122) for transfer is distinguished from the storage area 122).

  According to the feature B4, the storage area in which the instruction information provided from the instruction control unit and the instruction information in which the transfer of the control information is completed and the storage destination information is set is clearly distinguished. These instruction information can be clearly distinguished.

Feature B5. As the control information, there is predetermined control information (decoded image data) that is not subject to reading to the second storage means,
When the predetermined control information is set in the instruction information, the transfer execution unit is configured to read the predetermined control information into the second storage unit and information corresponding to the predetermined control information. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B4, wherein both of the processing of setting storage destination information in the instruction information are not executed.

  According to feature B5, since the storage destination information is not set in the instruction information in the transfer execution means for the predetermined control information that is not to be read out to the second storage means, the storage destination information is set in the transfer execution means. In this case, it is possible not to be executed in vain.

Feature B6. The second storage means has a plurality of storage areas,
The information is sequentially stored in the plurality of storage areas according to a predetermined order,
The transfer execution means includes
When the transfer process using the storage source information in which the execution order of the transfer process is a predetermined order is executed in the instruction information, the control information that is the execution target of the transfer process in the second storage unit Means for setting the information corresponding to the read area in the instruction information as the storage destination information (function to execute the process of step S1102 in the advance transfer control unit 94);
In the instruction information, when the transfer process using the storage source information in which the execution order of the transfer process is the next order with respect to the predetermined order is executed, the second storage unit corresponds to the predetermined order Means for setting, in the instruction information, information corresponding to the address difference of the area from which the control information corresponding to the next order with respect to the area from which the control information is read is stored as the storage destination information (Function for executing the process of step S1103 in the advance transfer control unit 94);
A gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B5, characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature B6, in the instruction information, for the control information in which the execution order of the transfer processing is the next order with respect to the predetermined order, information corresponding to the address difference is set as the storage destination information. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the information amount of the storage destination information set in the instruction information.

Feature B7. The predetermined control information is stored across a plurality of storage areas in the second storage means,
When the predetermined control information is read into the plurality of storage areas by executing a transfer process using the storage source information, the transfer execution unit is configured to store the plurality of storage areas in a group. Features B1 to B1, comprising means for setting identification information for identification as a storage area in the instruction information as the storage destination information (a function of executing the process of step S1102 in the advance transfer control unit 94) The gaming machine according to any one of B6.

  According to the feature B7, since the plurality of storage areas in the second storage unit are configured as a group of storage areas using the identification information, the information amount of the storage destination information set in the instruction information is suppressed. Is possible.

  In addition, with respect to any one configuration of the features B1 to B7, the features A1 to A11, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E11, the features F1 to F10, and the features G1 to G10 Any one or more of the features H1 to H6, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J3, and features K1 to K8 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to the invention of the feature A group and the feature B group, the following problems can be solved.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, and the like are known. These gaming machines are provided with a control element such as a CPU and a read-only memory element such as a ROM, and a series of games are executed based on processing performed by the control element in accordance with a program read from the read-only memory element. Is controlled. It is also known that a control element, a read-only memory element, etc. are integrated into one chip.

  A configuration using a control element to perform sound output control and display control is also known. In this case, the operation of the control target device is controlled based on the processing performed by the control element in accordance with the data read from the read-only storage element.

  Here, in the gaming machine such as the above-described example, it is necessary to suitably read out information from the storage means, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature C group>
Feature C1. Display means for displaying an image (main display device 41, first sub display device 43, second sub display device 44);
Image information storage means (memory module 83) for storing image data in advance;
Instruction control means (production CPU 82) for providing instruction information (drawing list) for instructing the content of an image to be displayed on the display means;
Display control means (production LSI 85) for displaying an image on the display means based on using the image data in accordance with the contents instructed in the instruction information;
With
The instruction control means includes a plurality of providing means (functions for executing the processes of steps S907 to S921 in the effect CPU 82) for providing a plurality of the instruction information in order to display an image at one update timing on the display means. A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature C1, a plurality of instruction information may be provided to display an image at one update timing. As a result, the amount of information of one instruction information provided from the instruction control means is extremely increased, or various information is mixed in one instruction information, and the processing load of the display control means increases. It is possible to suitably provide the instruction information while suppressing the occurrence of such an event.

  Feature C2. The gaming machine according to Feature C1, wherein the plurality of providing means sets the image data included in the first type and the image data included in the second type as use targets in the different instruction information, respectively. .

  According to the feature C2, use instruction information of image data is set in different instruction information according to the type of image data. As a result, the display control means only needs to execute processing corresponding to the type of instruction information, and the type of image data that is the target of use in the instruction information corresponds to the type of use. Therefore, it is not necessary to perform it individually by the display control means in units of image data. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load on the display control means.

Feature C3. The display control means includes
First display control means (3D control unit 97) for displaying an image on the display means using data created based on arranging three-dimensional data as the image data in a virtual three-dimensional space;
Second display control means (2D control unit 96) for displaying an image on the display means using two-dimensional data that is not the three-dimensional data;
With
The image data included in the first type is data used by the first display control unit, and the image data included in the second type is data used by the second display control unit. The gaming machine according to Feature C2, characterized by:

  The display control unit executes different processes depending on whether the image is displayed using the image data of the three-dimensional data or the image is displayed using the image data of the two-dimensional data. In this case, according to the feature C3, since the image data of the three-dimensional data and the image data of the two-dimensional data are not set in one instruction information, the display control means Which of the two-dimensional data is supported can be identified in units of instruction information. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load on the display control means.

  Feature C4. The instruction control means causes the display means to display an image at one update timing when the display means uses a predetermined number or more of the image data to display an image at one update timing. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C3, wherein the number of the instruction information to be provided is increased compared to a case where less than a predetermined number of the image data is used.

  According to the feature C4, it is possible to prevent the number of image data set as the use target in one instruction information from becoming extremely large. As a result, the information amount of one piece of instruction information provided from the instruction control unit can be suppressed to some extent, and the transmission period of one piece of instruction information can be prevented from becoming extremely long. .

  Feature C5. The plurality of providing means, when providing a plurality of the instruction information to display an image at one update timing on the display means, use the plurality of instruction information collectively to display an image at one update timing. Information setting means for setting information indicating that the information is to be performed (in the first embodiment, the function of executing the processes of steps S912 and S918 in the CPU 82 for effects, in the CPU 82 for effects in the fourth embodiment) The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C4, which includes a function of executing the processing of S2506 to step S2507 and steps S2513 to S2514.

  According to the feature C5, even when a plurality of instruction information is provided to display an image at one update timing, the display control means indicates that the plurality of instruction information is used in an aggregated manner. Information for enabling identification is set by the instruction control means. As a result, the display control means can recognize that the plurality of pieces of instruction information are for displaying an image at one update timing.

  Feature C6. The display control means, when the first instruction information and the second instruction information are provided as the instruction information for displaying an image at one update timing on the display means, the first instruction information and the second instruction information. The game according to any one of features C1 to C5, further comprising an aggregating unit (a function of executing the process of step S2607 in the advance transfer control unit 94) for aggregating information into one instruction information Machine.

  According to the feature C6, even if a plurality of instruction information is provided to the display control means for displaying an image at one update timing, the display control means aggregates the plurality of instruction information into one instruction information. Is done. This eliminates the need to refer to a plurality of instruction information when the display control means executes display control according to the instruction information.

Feature C7. The display control unit includes a transfer execution unit (preliminary transfer control unit 94) that causes the image data specified in the instruction information to be in a state of being read into the read storage unit (VRAM 86).
The aggregating unit converts the first instruction information and the second instruction information into one instruction information when the first instruction information and the second instruction information are subjected to transfer processing by the transfer execution unit. The gaming machine according to Feature C6, wherein the gaming machines are aggregated.

  According to the feature C7, it is possible to increase the processing speed when the image data is used in the display control unit by previously reading the image data specified in the instruction information into the reading and storing unit. In this case, a plurality of pieces of instruction information for displaying an image at one update timing are aggregated in accordance with the transfer processing target by the transfer execution unit. It can also be used as an opportunity to aggregate information.

Feature C8. The display control means includes a plurality of instruction information storage areas (first to twentieth storage areas 121a to 121t before transfer) for storing the instruction information provided by the instruction control means.
When a plurality of the instruction information is provided to display an image at one update timing in the display means, the plurality of the instruction information are sequentially stored in a plurality of the instruction information storage areas having consecutive addresses. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C7.

  According to the feature C8, since a plurality of instruction information for displaying an image at one update timing is stored in an instruction information storage area having consecutive addresses, the processing configuration for reading the plurality of instruction information is simplified. It becomes possible to do.

  In addition, with respect to any one configuration of the features C1 to C8, the features A1 to A11, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E11, the features F1 to F10, and the features G1 to G10. Any one or more of the features H1 to H6, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J3, and features K1 to K8 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to the invention of the above-mentioned feature C group, the following problems can be solved.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, and the like are known. As these gaming machines, those equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. The gaming machine is equipped with a memory in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the display device using the image data read from the memory. It becomes.

  Here, in the gaming machines such as the above-described examples, a configuration capable of suitably performing display control is required, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. First storage means (memory module 83) for storing information in advance;
Second storage means (VRAM 86) for storing information read from the first storage means;
Control means (effect LSI 85) for executing control using the information read to the second storage means;
With
The second storage means is provided with a plurality of storage areas, and address information is set in each of the plurality of storage areas,
The control means uses a part of the storage area provided in the second storage means and uses aggregate designation information (index No or identification information) for collectively designating the plurality of storage areas. A gaming machine characterized in that information can be read from the plurality of storage areas.

  According to the feature D1, it is possible to read information collectively from a plurality of storage areas corresponding to the aggregation designation information by using the aggregation designation information. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of information required to specify the storage area from which information is to be read, compared to when address information is specified for each of the plurality of storage areas and information is read from the plurality of storage areas. It becomes.

  Feature D2. The gaming machine according to feature D1, wherein corresponding storage information that is designated by aggregation according to the aggregation designation information has corresponding address information continuous.

  According to the feature D2, it is possible to prevent the correspondence between the aggregation designation information and the storage area designated thereby from becoming complicated.

  Feature D3. The control means uses the identification information different from the address information set corresponding to a part of the storage areas of the plurality of storage areas corresponding to the aggregation designation information, and stores the part of the storage The gaming machine according to Feature D1 or D2, wherein information can be read from the area.

  According to the feature D3, even when a plurality of storage areas are specified collectively using the aggregation specification information, information can be read from some of the storage areas. It becomes possible.

Feature D4. The control means includes
Reading means (transfer controller 92) for reading information from the storage area corresponding to the aggregation designation information in the second storage means;
A control execution unit (2D control unit 96, 3D control unit 97) for instructing the reading unit to read out information and executing control using the information read out by the reading unit;
With
The reading means specifies the storage area corresponding to the read instruction from the control execution means, using a correspondence information group (index table 128) in which a correspondence relation between the aggregation designation information and the address information is set. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D3.

  According to the feature D4, since the correspondence information group is used, it is possible to efficiently specify the type of the storage area corresponding to the aggregate designation information in the reading unit.

  Feature D5. The control means includes a changing means (function for executing the processes of steps S2401 to S2403 in the advance transfer control unit 94) capable of changing the relationship between the aggregation designation information and the plurality of storage areas. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D4.

  According to the feature D5, since the relationship between the aggregation designation information and the plurality of storage areas can be changed as necessary, the aggregation designation of the storage area using the aggregation designation information can be flexibly used. It becomes.

  Feature D6. The control means uses a first aggregate designation information (index No. 1) that is a part of the storage area provided in the second storage means and designates a plurality of the storage areas collectively. The information can be read from the plurality of storage areas, and is a part of the storage areas provided in the second storage means for collectively specifying the plurality of storage areas The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D5, wherein the information can be read from the plurality of storage areas using the second aggregation designation information (index No. 2).

  According to the feature D6, the storage area of the second storage unit can be distinguished into a plurality of aggregation areas. As a result, a plurality of aggregation areas can be set according to the purpose.

  Feature D7. The number of the storage areas designated by the first aggregation designation information and the number of the storage areas designated by the second aggregation designation information can be made different from each other. The feature D6 is characterized in that Gaming machine.

  According to the feature D7, in a configuration in which a plurality of aggregation areas can be set according to the purpose, the degree of freedom of setting each aggregation area can be increased.

  Note that for any one of the configurations of the features D1 to D7, the features A1 to A11, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E11, the features F1 to F10, and the features G1 to G10. Any one or more of the features H1 to H6, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J3, and features K1 to K8 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to the invention of the above-mentioned feature D group, the following problems can be solved.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, and the like are known. These gaming machines are provided with a control element such as a CPU and a read-only memory element such as a ROM, and a series of games are executed based on processing performed by the control element in accordance with a program read from the read-only memory element. Is controlled. It is also known that a control element, a read-only memory element, etc. are integrated into one chip.

  A configuration using a control element to perform sound output control and display control is also known. In this case, the operation of the control target device is controlled based on the processing performed by the control element in accordance with the data read from the read-only storage element.

  Here, in the gaming machine such as the above-described example, it is necessary to suitably read out information from the storage means, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1. Display means for displaying an image (main display device 41, first sub display device 43, second sub display device 44);
Image information storage means (memory module 83) for storing image data in advance;
Instruction control means (production CPU 82) for providing instruction information (drawing list) for instructing the content of an image to be displayed on the display means;
Display control means (production LSI 85) for displaying an image on the display means based on using the image data in accordance with the contents instructed in the instruction information;
With
The display control means includes
First control means (preliminary transfer control unit 94) for executing first control necessary for displaying an image on the display means in accordance with predetermined instruction information provided by the instruction control means;
Second control means (2D control section 96, 3D control section 97) for executing second control necessary for displaying an image on the display means in accordance with the predetermined instruction information;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature E1, the control means for executing the first control according to the predetermined instruction information and the control means for executing the second control according to the predetermined instruction information are provided separately for the first control means and the second control means. It has been. This makes it possible to distribute the processing load as compared to a configuration in which both the first control and the second control are executed together in one control means.

  Feature E2. The gaming machine according to claim E1, wherein the second control means executes the second control in accordance with the predetermined instruction information after the first control means becomes the execution target of the first control. .

  According to the feature E2, predetermined instruction information is sequentially used in the first control means and the second control means. As a result, the above excellent effects can be achieved without providing a plurality of the same instruction information from the instruction control means.

Feature E3. Read storage means (VRAM 86) for storing the image data read from the image information storage means,
The first control unit is configured to make the image data set as a use target in the predetermined instruction information read into the read storage unit.
The second control means causes the display means to display an image based on using the image data read to the read storage means in accordance with the contents indicated in the predetermined instruction information. The gaming machine according to feature E1 or E2, characterized by:

  According to the feature E3, the control for reading out the image data according to the predetermined instruction information and reading it out to the storage means is performed by the first control means, and the control for displaying the image by using the image data according to the predetermined instruction information is the second control. In the means. In this case, in the configuration in which the processing load is distributed between the first control unit and the second control unit, it is possible to clearly vary the control contents executed by the first control unit and the second control unit. .

  Feature E4. In the situation where the first control means is executing a process of displaying an image on the display means in accordance with the predetermined instruction information for causing the second control means to display an image at a predetermined update timing. The feature E3 is characterized in that the image data is read into the read storage means in accordance with the predetermined instruction information for displaying an image at an update timing later than the update timing. Game machines.

  According to the characteristic E4, image data to be used thereafter is read out and stored by the control by the first control unit independent from the period during which the process of displaying the image by the second control unit is executed. It becomes possible to transfer to the means in advance.

Feature E5. In the instruction information provided from the instruction control unit, storage source information (address ID) for specifying an area in which the image data is stored in the image information storage unit is set,
The first control unit executes the transfer process using the storage source information, and when the image data specified in the instruction information is read by the read storage unit, the first storage unit The storage location information (identification information) for specifying the area where the image data is read in the means is set in the instruction information,
The second control unit uses the instruction information after the storage destination information is set by the first control unit, and the image data specified in the instruction information is read out. The gaming machine according to Feature E3 or E4, wherein the image data is read from the storage area of the storage means.

  According to the feature E5, when the image data is read and transferred to the storage unit according to the storage source information set in the instruction information, the storage destination information for specifying the area where the image data is stored in the read storage unit is provided. The instruction information is set. Thereby, since it is not necessary to set both the storage source information and the storage destination information in the instruction information from the beginning, the information amount of the instruction information transmitted from the instruction control unit can be suppressed. In addition, when image data is actually transferred to the reading and storing means, information corresponding to the area of the reading and storing means to which the image data has been transferred is set in the instruction information as the storage destination information. It becomes possible to improve the reliability of the.

  Feature E6. The gaming machine according to Feature E5, wherein the first control means sets the storage destination information so as to overwrite the storage source information of the instruction information.

  According to feature E6, when the image data is transferred according to the storage source information of the instruction information, the storage destination information corresponding to the area of the read storage means to which the image data is transferred overwrites the storage source information. Is set in the instruction information. As a result, the amount of instruction information provided to the second control means after the transfer of the control information is completed can be suppressed.

  Feature E7. The gaming machine according to Feature E6, wherein the storage destination information has a smaller amount of information than the storage source information.

  According to the feature E7, it is possible to reduce a processing load when the storage destination information is overwritten on the storage source information in the first control unit.

  Feature E8. A storage area for storing the instruction information provided from the instruction control means (storage area 121 for transfer), and a storage area for storing the instruction information for which the setting of the storage destination information by the first control means has been completed The gaming machine according to any one of features E5 to E7, characterized in that (storage area 122 after transfer) is distinguished.

  According to the feature E8, the storage area in which the instruction information provided from the instruction control unit and the instruction information in which the transfer of the image data is completed and the storage destination information is set is clearly distinguished, These instruction information can be clearly distinguished.

Feature E9. As the image data, there is predetermined image data (decoded image data) that is not a read target to the read storage means,
When the predetermined image data is set as a use target in the instruction information, the first control unit is configured to read the predetermined image data into the read storage unit and information corresponding to the predetermined image data. The gaming machine according to any one of features E5 to E8, wherein both of the processing of setting storage destination information in the instruction information are not executed.

  According to the feature E9, since the storage destination information is not set in the instruction information in the first control means for the predetermined image data that is not to be read out to the read storage means, the storage destination information is set in the first control means. In this case, it is possible not to be executed in vain.

Feature E10. The read storage means has a plurality of storage areas,
The information is sequentially stored in the plurality of storage areas according to a predetermined order,
The first control means includes
When a transfer process using the storage source information in which the execution order of the transfer process is a predetermined order in the instruction information is executed, the image data that is the execution target of the transfer process is read by the read storage unit. Means for setting information corresponding to the issued area in the instruction information as the storage destination information (function to execute the process of step S1102 in the advance transfer control unit 94);
In the instruction information, when the transfer process using the storage source information in which the execution order of the transfer process is the next order to the predetermined order is executed, the read storage unit corresponds to the predetermined order Means (preliminary transfer) that sets information corresponding to the address difference of the area from which the image data has been read corresponding to the next order with respect to the area from which the image data has been read as the storage destination information. A function of executing the process of step S1103 in the control unit 94);
The gaming machine according to any one of features E5 to E9, comprising:

  According to the feature E10, in the instruction information, since the execution order of the transfer processing is the next order with respect to the predetermined order, the information corresponding to the address difference is set as the storage destination information. It is possible to suppress the information amount of the storage destination information set in the instruction information.

Feature E11. The specific image data is configured to be stored across a plurality of storage areas in the read storage unit,
When the specific image data is read into the plurality of storage areas by executing a transfer process using the storage source information, the first control unit stores the plurality of storage areas in a group. Features E5 to E10 comprising means for setting identification information for identification as an area in the instruction information as the storage destination information (function to execute the process of step S1102 in the advance transfer control unit 94) The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the feature E11, since the plurality of storage areas in the read storage unit are specified as a group of storage areas using the identification information, it is possible to suppress the information amount of the storage destination information set in the instruction information. It becomes possible.

  In addition, with respect to any one configuration of the features E1 to E11, the features A1 to A11, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E11, the features F1 to F10, and the features G1 to G10. Any one or more of the features H1 to H6, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J3, and features K1 to K8 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature F group>
Feature F1. Display means for displaying an image (main display device 41, first sub display device 43, second sub display device 44);
Image information storage means (memory module 83) for storing image data in advance;
Display control means (effect LSI 85) for causing the display means to display an image using the image data;
With
The image information storage means stores reference data (I as a reference when creating the decoded image data in the decoding process as moving image data in which a plurality of decoded image data is generated by executing the decoding process. Special moving image data (special moving image data 185) that does not include difference data (B picture data, P picture data) that can provide a difference with respect to the reference data when the decoding process is executed. ) Is stored in the game machine.

  According to the feature F1, since the special moving image data including the reference data without including the difference data is provided, the decoded image data generated by executing the decoding process on the special moving image data is It is possible to achieve higher image quality than decoded image data created by executing decoding processing on the moving image data. That is, according to this configuration, it is possible to handle image data having an image quality comparable to that of normal still image data as moving image data. As a result, it is possible to use image data having an image quality comparable to that of the normal still image data without using an area for reading normal still image data.

  Feature F2. The gaming machine according to Feature F1, wherein the special moving image data includes a plurality of the reference data.

  According to the feature F2, by executing the decoding process on the special moving image data, it is possible to create a plurality of image data having an image quality comparable to that of normal still image data.

  Feature F3. The game according to Feature F2, wherein a plurality of decoded image data created by executing the decoding process on the special moving image data is used in accordance with a use order defined in the special moving image data. Machine.

  According to the feature F3, when using a plurality of decoded image data created from the special moving image data, it is not necessary to set the use order separately from the special moving image data. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load for setting the use order of the image data, compared to a configuration in which the decoded image data is stored in the image information storage unit in advance as normal still image data.

Feature F4. Decoding means (moving image decoder 95) for performing the decoding process on the special moving image data,
The decoding means includes the special moving image in a situation where processing for displaying an image at an update timing prior to an update timing at which an image using the decoded image data is displayed is executed by the display control means. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F3, wherein the decoding process is executed on data.

  According to the feature F4, in a period in which processing for displaying an image using other image data is being executed by the display control means, the special moving image is provided by the decoding means provided separately from the display control means. Image data decoding processing is executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the period during which the decoding process is being executed from becoming an image display waiting period while not increasing the processing load on the display control means.

Feature F5. The image information storage means stores attached image data corresponding to the special moving image data,
The gaming machine includes decoding means (moving picture decoder 95) for executing the decoding process on the special image data.
The decoding unit performs the decoding process on the special moving image data in a situation where a process for displaying an image using the attached image data is performed by the display control unit. The gaming machine according to any one of F1 to F4.

  According to the feature F5, the special moving image data is decoded in the situation where the processing for displaying the image using the attached image data corresponding to the special moving image data is performed. It is possible to execute the decoding process of the special moving image data by using the period during which the process for displaying the image corresponding to is performed.

  Feature F6. The attached image data displays an image corresponding to the immediately preceding update timing with respect to an image displayed using the decoded image data to be used first among the decoded image data created from the special moving image data. The game machine according to Feature F5, characterized in that the game data is image data to be executed.

  According to the feature F6, in the configuration in which the decoding process of the special moving image data is performed using the period in which the process for displaying the image using the attached image data is performed, the display is performed using the attached image data. Therefore, it is possible to ensure continuity between the image to be displayed and the image displayed using the decoded image data.

Feature F7. The display control means executes predetermined processing on the predetermined image data stored in the image information storage means to display an image corresponding to the predetermined image data (step S810 in the 3D control unit 97). Function to execute the process of)
When displaying the image corresponding to the decoded image data created by executing the decoding process on the special moving image data, the predetermined process is executed on the decoded image data by the predetermined process execution unit. Configuration,
When the image data is used in the display control means, the image data is read from the image information storage means to a reading storage means (VRAM 86, register 93),
The reading storage means includes a first reading area (VRAM 86) in which the predetermined image data is stored, and a second reading area (register 93) in which the decoded image data is read. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F6.

  According to the feature F7, when image data is used in the display control unit, the image data is not used directly from the image information storage unit but is used after being once read out to the reading storage unit. For this reason, when the image data is used in the display control means by reading the image data into the reading storage means in advance, the image data can be used immediately. Further, the reading storage means is provided with a first reading area from which predetermined image data is read and a second reading area from which the decoded image data of the special moving image data is read, so that it can be used in accordance with each application. Thus, when the image data is used in the display control means, it is possible to designate the area according to the type of the image data.

  In this case, special image data having the configuration of the feature F1 and not including difference data is stored in the image information storage unit. As a result, the special image data is read not to the first reading area but to the second reading area, so that it is not necessary to secure an area for using the special image data in the first reading area. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity required in the first read area.

Feature F8. The image information storage means stores a plurality of types of the predetermined image data,
The gaming machine is
First read execution means for reading all of the plurality of types of predetermined image data to the first read area when a predetermined read timing is reached;
In a situation where decoded image data corresponding to moving image data other than the special moving image data is stored in the second reading area, the decoded image data corresponding to the special moving image data is stored in the second reading area. A second read execution means for overwriting the decoded image data on the decoded image data already stored in the second read area;
The gaming machine according to Feature F7, comprising:

  According to the feature F8, since all of a plurality of types of predetermined image data are read to the first reading area, it is not necessary to read the predetermined image data as necessary. On the other hand, the decoded image data is read out to the second reading area as needed, and when new decoded image data is created, the second reading area is overwritten. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required in the second read area. In this case, special image data having the configuration of the feature F1 and not including difference data is stored in the image information storage unit. As a result, the special image data is read not to the first reading area but to the second reading area, so that it is not necessary to secure an area for using the special image data in the first reading area. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity required in the first read area.

  Feature F9. The gaming machine according to Feature F8, wherein the first read execution unit reads all of the plurality of types of the predetermined image data into the first read area when supply of operating power is started.

  According to the feature F9, it is possible to cause a state in which all of a plurality of types of predetermined image data have been read to the first reading area at an early stage.

  Feature F10. The decoded image data created by executing the decoding process on the special moving image data is texture data used to display a three-dimensional image. Any one of features F1 to F9 The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature F10, it is possible to achieve an excellent effect as described above when using texture data.

  In addition, with respect to any one configuration of the features F1 to F10, the features A1 to A11, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E11, the features F1 to F10, and the features G1 to G10. Any one or more of the features H1 to H6, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J3, and features K1 to K8 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature G group>
Feature G1. Display means for displaying images (first sub-display device 43, second sub-display device 44);
Image information storage means (memory module 83) for storing image data in advance;
Drawing data is created based on setting the image data in the setting storage means (the first sub-frame area 117 and the second sub-frame area 118), and an image signal corresponding to the drawing data is sent to the display means. Display control means (effect LSI 85) for displaying an image on the display means based on the output;
In a gaming machine equipped with
The display means includes a first display means (first sub display device 43) and a second display means (second sub display device 44),
The display control unit creates first drawing data for displaying an image on the first display unit in a partial area of the setting storage unit, and displays the image on the second display unit. 2 Aggregation setting means for setting the drawing data in another area of the setting storage means (in the first embodiment, the function of executing the drawing process in the drawing area for sub display in the 2D control unit 96, the second implementation A gaming machine having a function of executing drawing data synthesis processing for sub-display in the 3D control unit 97 in the form.

  According to the feature G1, the first drawing data for displaying the image on the first display means and the second drawing data for displaying the image on the second display means are created in the same setting storage means. As a result, even when there are a plurality of display means, the number of setting storage means can be reduced, and image display on the plurality of display means can be performed while simplifying the hardware configuration for accessing the setting storage means. It can be realized.

  Feature G2. A part of the setting storage means in which the first drawing data is created is defined as a first setting area (an odd line area), and the setting storage means in which the second drawing data is created. The other area is defined as a second setting area (an even line area), and the gaming machine according to the feature G1.

  According to the feature G2, in the configuration in which both the first drawing data and the second drawing data are created in the same setting storage unit, the area in which the first drawing data is set in the setting storage unit is fixed. At the same time, the area in which the second drawing data is set is fixed in the setting storage means. Thereby, it is not necessary to assign an area in the setting storage unit every time the first drawing data and the second drawing data are created, and the processing configuration can be simplified.

  Feature G3. The first drawing portion data constituting a part of the first drawing data is present between a plurality of second drawing portion data constituting a part of the second drawing data, and the second drawing portion data is a plurality of the plurality of the second drawing portion data. The gaming machine according to Feature G2, wherein an arrangement order of data in the setting storage means is set so as to exist between the first drawing partial data.

  According to the feature G3, in the configuration in which both the first drawing data and the second drawing data are created in the same setting storage unit, the first drawing data and the second drawing data are respectively stored in the entire setting storage unit. It is possible to set it in a distributed manner.

  Feature G4. The gaming machine according to Feature G3, wherein the first drawing portion data and the second drawing portion data are alternately arranged in at least a data arrangement order in a predetermined direction in the setting storage means.

  According to the feature G4, the first drawing portion data and the second drawing portion data are alternately arranged, so that each drawing portion data can be output as an image signal according to the order arranged in a predetermined direction. It is possible to alternately output image signals to the first display means and the second display means.

  Feature G5. In any one of the characteristics G1 to G4, the aggregation setting unit causes both the first drawing data and the second drawing data to be set in the setting storage unit. The gaming machine described.

  According to the characteristic G5, in the configuration in which both the first drawing data and the second drawing data are created in the same setting storage unit, the period for creating the first drawing data and the period for creating the second drawing data are It is possible to overlap.

  Feature G6. The aggregation setting means is characterized in that both the first drawing data and the second drawing data to be used at the same update timing are set in the setting storage means. The gaming machine according to Feature G5.

  In the feature G6, in the configuration in which both the first drawing data and the second drawing data are created in the same setting storage unit, the images of both the first display unit and the second display unit are updated at one update timing. It becomes possible to do.

  Feature G7. The display control means, based on the occurrence of one signal output trigger, the image signal corresponding to the first drawing unit data constituting a part of the first drawing data and a part of the second drawing data Characterized by comprising signal output means for outputting the image signal corresponding to the second drawing unit data constituting the function (function for executing signal output processing in the second display circuit 99). The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the feature G7, both the output of the image signal to the first display means and the output of the image signal to the second display means are performed based on the occurrence of the signal output trigger once. As a result, in the configuration in which both the first drawing data and the second drawing data are created in the same setting storage means, the image update in the first display means and the image update in the second display means are started simultaneously. It is possible to make progress simultaneously.

  Feature G8. The game according to Feature G7, wherein the first drawing unit data is data of a minimum unit in the first drawing data, and the second drawing unit data is data of a minimum unit in the second drawing data. Machine.

  According to the characteristic G8, in the configuration in which both the output of the image signal to the first display means and the output of the image signal to the second display means are performed based on the occurrence of the signal output trigger once, these images are output. Since the signal output target data is the minimum unit data, it is possible to prevent the image signal output processing execution period for one signal output trigger from becoming extremely long.

  Feature G9.1: The first drawing unit data and the second drawing unit data, which are the output targets of the image signal when the signal is output once, are set in an adjacent order in the data arrangement order in the setting storage unit. The gaming machine according to Feature G7 or G8, wherein

  According to the feature G9, the drawing unit data adjacent to each other in the setting storage means is set as the output target of the image signal for one signal output trigger, and the first display means is generated for one occurrence of the signal output trigger. Both the output of the image signal and the output of the image signal to the second display means can be performed.

Feature G10. The first drawing data is created using the image data read from the image information storage means to create the first drawing data,
The second drawing data is created using any one of the image data read from the image information storage unit to create the second drawing data. Game machines.

  According to the feature G10, the first drawing data is individually created using the image data, and the second drawing data is individually created using the image data. Thereby, it is not necessary to previously store image data for simultaneously creating both the first drawing data and the second drawing data in the image information storage means.

  Note that for any one of the configurations of the features G1 to G10, the features A1 to A11, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E11, the features F1 to F10, and the features G1 to G10 are used. Any one or more of the features H1 to H6, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J3, and features K1 to K8 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature H group>
Feature H1. Display means for displaying an image (main display device 41, first sub display device 43, second sub display device 44);
Image information storage means (memory module 83) for storing image data in advance;
Instruction control means (production CPU 82) for providing instruction information (drawing list) for instructing the content of an image to be displayed on the display means;
The image data is stored in accordance with the contents instructed in the instruction information (main first frame area 114, main second frame area 115, sub first frame area 117, sub second frame area 118). Display control means (effect LSI 85) for causing the display means to display an image,
In a gaming machine equipped with
The display means includes a first display means (first sub display device 43) and a second display means (second sub display device 44),
The instruction control means includes, as the instruction information, information for specifying the image data to be used for displaying an image on the first display means, and a use target for displaying an image on the second display means. A game machine characterized in that it can provide aggregation instruction information (drawing list shown in FIG. 35) in which both pieces of information specifying the image data are aggregated and set.

  According to the feature H1, information for displaying an image on a plurality of display means is provided to the display control means in a state where the information is aggregated into the aggregation instruction information. Accordingly, it is possible to reduce the number of instruction information provided from the instruction control unit to the display control unit as compared with the configuration in which the instruction information is individually provided for each of the plurality of display units.

  Feature H2. The gaming machine according to Feature H1, wherein the aggregation instruction information is set with information for displaying an image on each of the first display means and the second display means at the same update timing. .

  According to the feature H2, since information for displaying an image on each display unit at the same update timing is set to be aggregated in the aggregation instruction information, the display control unit is all set in the aggregation instruction information. This information can be handled as information for displaying an image at one update timing, and there is no need to execute a process for determining which update timing corresponds to which of the different update timings. . Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load of processing executed using the aggregation instruction information in the display control means.

Feature H3. In the instruction information, a plurality of the image data is designated as a use target,
The display control means stores a plurality of the image data designated as use targets in the instruction information in an order according to setting order information (display order priority data) set in the instruction information. It is the structure which sets to the means sequentially,
In the aggregation instruction information, the setting order indicates whether the image data specified as a use target is data for displaying an image on any of the first display means and the second display means. The gaming machine according to the feature H1 or H2, which is specified using information.

  According to the feature H3, which display means corresponds to the image data designated as the use target by using the setting order information for specifying the setting order of the image data by the display control means. Identified. As a result, it is not necessary to set dedicated information for specifying the type of display means to be set in the aggregation instruction information, so that the number of types of information set in the aggregation instruction information can be suppressed. .

  Feature H4. In the aggregation instruction information, the setting order information corresponding to the image data to be used for displaying an image on the first display means is an information group of a first order range (which is greater than or equal to a first display target reference value). The setting order information corresponding to the image data to be used for displaying the image on the second display means in the aggregation instruction information is included in the second order range. The gaming machine according to Feature H3, wherein the gaming machine is included in the information group (value greater than or equal to the second display target reference value).

  According to the feature H4, in the configuration in which the type of display means to be set is specified using the setting order information, the setting order indicating which display means the image data specified as the use target corresponds to. Clearly differentiated in information. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load for specifying the type of display means to be set in the display control means.

Feature H5. The instruction control means includes instruction information creation means (function to execute drawing list creation processing in the effect CPU 82) that creates the instruction information with reference to a reference information group (display control execution target table),
In the reference information group, as information for specifying the type of the image data to be used in the instruction information creation unit, type information (display target data) corresponding to the type of the display unit to be displayed, Individual order information (display order data) corresponding to the setting order to the setting storage means in the plurality of types of image data to be used in the display means to be displayed is set,
The gaming machine according to the feature H3 or H4, wherein the instruction information creating means derives the setting order information based on the type information and the individual order information.

  According to the feature H5, setting order information is not set as it is in the reference information group, but type information and individual order information are set, and setting order information is used using the type information and individual order information. Is derived. Thus, when setting the reference information group at the gaming machine design stage, it is only necessary to set the type of the display means to be set and the setting order in the plural types of image data to be used by the display means. There is no need to set the final setting order information. Therefore, the design work can be facilitated.

  Feature H6. The instruction information creating means executes predetermined calculation processing (processing in steps S1305 and S1306 in the effect CPU 82) by using the numerical information corresponding to the type information for the numerical information corresponding to the individual order information. Then, the gaming machine according to the feature H5, wherein the numerical value information derived by the predetermined arithmetic processing is used as the setting order information.

  According to the feature H6, when the setting order information is derived using the type information and the individual order information set in the reference information group, a predetermined calculation process is executed using the type information and the individual order information. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load for deriving the setting order information.

  Note that for any one of the configurations of the features H1 to H6, the features A1 to A11, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E11, the features F1 to F10, and the features G1 to G10. Any one or more of the features H1 to H6, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J3, and features K1 to K8 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to the invention of the feature group E, the feature group F, the feature group G and the feature group H, the following problems can be solved.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, and the like are known. As these gaming machines, those equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. The gaming machine is equipped with a memory in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the display device using the image data read from the memory. It becomes.

  Here, in the gaming machines such as the above-described examples, a configuration capable of suitably performing display control is required, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature I group>
Feature I1. Predetermined display means for displaying an image (first sub display device 43, second sub display device 44);
A displacement drive control means (a function of executing the process of step S303 in the distribution side MPU 73) for displacing the predetermined display means;
Display control means (effect CPU 82, effect LSI 85) for executing display control of the predetermined display means;
With
The display control means is a displacement-corresponding image (rotation period image 153) that makes it difficult for the player to identify that the predetermined display means is performing a displacement operation in a situation where the predetermined display means is performing a predetermined displacement operation. ) Is displayed on the predetermined display means (a function for executing the processing of steps S1810 to S1812 in the effect CPU 82, 2D control unit 96, 3D control unit 97). Machine.

  According to the characteristic I1, the predetermined display unit displays a displacement corresponding image that makes it difficult for the player to identify that the predetermined display unit is performing the displacement operation in a situation where the predetermined display unit is performing the predetermined displacement operation. The As a result, it is possible to cause a situation in which the predetermined display means is displaced before the player notices it, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature I2. The predetermined displacement operation is a predetermined rotation operation in the predetermined display means,
The gaming machine according to Feature I1, wherein the displacement corresponding image is an image having no directionality in a direction along a display surface of the predetermined display unit.

  According to the feature I2, the displacement corresponding image is an image having no directivity in the direction along the display surface of the predetermined display unit, so that the predetermined display unit is in a state where the predetermined display unit is performing a predetermined rotation operation. By displaying the displacement corresponding image, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to identify that the predetermined display means is rotating.

  Feature I3. The gaming machine according to the feature I1 or I2, wherein the displacement corresponding image is displayed so as to be recognized by a player as being displayed on a non-displacement display surface.

  According to the feature I3, since the displacement-corresponding image is displayed so that the player can recognize that it is displayed on the non-displacement display surface, the player is informed that the predetermined display means is moving. It is possible to make it difficult to identify.

  More specifically, regarding the configuration of the feature I3, “the displacement corresponding image includes a member that does not follow the predetermined display unit around the predetermined display unit when the predetermined display unit performs the predetermined displacement operation. In other words, the display direction is displayed so as not to change.

Feature I4. Specific display means (main display device 41) for displaying images;
The predetermined display means includes a display surface of the specific display means and a display surface of the predetermined display means from the front of the gaming machine at a position facing a part of the display surface of the specific display means from the direction of the display surface. Both are configured to perform the predetermined displacement operation in a predetermined posture that is visible.
The displacement correspondence control means, when the predetermined display means is performing the predetermined displacement operation, in the area existing around the display surface of the predetermined display means on the display surface of the specific display means. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I3, wherein an image corresponding to is displayed.

  According to the characteristic I4, in a situation where the predetermined display means is performing a predetermined displacement operation, a part of the display surface of the specific display means exists around the display surface of the predetermined display means, and In the area of the part, an image corresponding to the displacement corresponding image on the predetermined display means is displayed. Accordingly, it is possible to display an image having a relationship with the displacement corresponding image displayed on the predetermined display unit around the predetermined display unit performing the predetermined displacement operation. The predetermined display unit and the specific display unit It is possible to perform an integrated display effect.

  Feature I5. The predetermined display means performs the predetermined displacement operation in a state where the display surface of the specific display means is located over the entire periphery of the display surface of the predetermined display means. A gaming machine according to feature I4.

  According to the characteristic I5, it is possible to cause the player to have an illusion that the display surface of the predetermined display means is a partial area on the display surface of the specific display means, and that the predetermined display means is performing a displacement operation. Image display that makes it difficult for a person to recognize it.

  Feature I6. The predetermined correspondence control means straddles the boundary between the display surface of the specific display means and the display surface of the predetermined display means as the displacement corresponding image when the predetermined display means performs the predetermined displacement operation. The gaming machine according to the characteristic I4 or I5, wherein the continuity image is displayed on the specific display unit and the predetermined display unit.

  According to the feature I6, since the image of the specific display unit displayed around the predetermined display unit and the image displayed on the predetermined display unit are displayed so as to have continuity, pay attention to these images. It is difficult for a player who is present to recognize that the predetermined display means is moving.

  Feature I7. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I6, wherein an arrangement state of the predetermined display unit is different between a timing of starting the predetermined displacement operation and a timing of ending the predetermined displacement operation.

  According to the characteristic I7, in a situation where a displacement corresponding image that makes it difficult for the player to recognize that the predetermined display means is displacing is displayed, the predetermined display means performs a displacing operation and the arrangement state of the predetermined display means By making these different, it is expected that the player will recognize that the arrangement state of the predetermined display means has been changed without noticing, and it is possible to give the player an unexpectedness.

  Feature I8. The display control means displays on the predetermined display means an image (a parallel period image 152) that allows the player to easily recognize the arrangement state of the predetermined display means before the predetermined display means performs the predetermined displacement operation. And means for causing the predetermined display means to display an image (separation period image 154) on which the player can easily recognize the arrangement state of the predetermined display means after the predetermined display means performs the predetermined displacement operation. The gaming machine according to Feature I7, which includes a function of executing the processing of Steps S1806 to S1808 and Steps S1814 to S1816 in the CPU 82, a 2D control unit 96, and a 3D control unit 97).

  According to the characteristic I8, before and after the predetermined display unit performs the predetermined displacement operation, an image that allows the player to easily recognize the arrangement state of the predetermined display unit is displayed on the predetermined display unit, and the predetermined display unit performs the predetermined displacement operation. In such a situation, the predetermined display means displays a displacement corresponding image that makes it difficult for the player to recognize that the predetermined display means is moving. This makes it possible to strongly give the player the impression that the arrangement state of the predetermined display means has been changed without noticing.

Feature I9. A first display means (first sub display device 43) and a second display means (second sub display device 44) as the predetermined display means;
The displacement drive control means causes the first display means and the second display means to start the predetermined displacement operation in a state where the first display means and the second display means are arranged in parallel in a predetermined direction. The game according to any one of features I1 to I8, wherein the predetermined displacement operation is terminated in a state in which the first display unit and the second display unit are arranged in a direction different from the predetermined direction. Machine.

  According to the characteristic I9, the juxtaposition direction of the first display unit and the second display unit differs before and after the predetermined displacement operation. In this case, it is difficult for the player to recognize that the first display means and the second display means are performing the predetermined displacement operation by displaying the displacement corresponding image in a situation where the predetermined displacement operation is being performed. . Thereby, it is expected that the player recognizes that the juxtaposition direction of the first display means and the second display means has been changed without noticing, and it is possible to give the player an unexpectedness.

  In addition, with respect to any one configuration of the features I1 to I9, the features A1 to A11, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E11, the features F1 to F10, and the features G1 to G10. Any one or more of the features H1 to H6, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J3, and features K1 to K8 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature J group>
Feature J1. Predetermined display means for displaying an image (first sub display device 43, second sub display device 44);
Rotation drive control means for rotating the predetermined display means (function to execute the process of step S303 in the distribution side MPU 73);
Display control means (effect CPU 82, effect LSI 85) for executing display control of the predetermined display means;
With
The display control means is an annular notification control means (right-handed notification in the effect CPU 82) for displaying on the predetermined display means an annular notification image (sub-right-hand notification image 143) in which notification character images are annularly arranged. And a 2D control unit 96 and a 3D control unit 97).

  According to the feature J1, it is possible to give the player a surprise by performing a rotating operation on the predetermined display means, and to improve the interest of the game. In this case, the notification character image is arranged in a ring shape. This makes it possible for the player to recognize the content of the character image for notification even when the predetermined display means is performing a specific rotation operation.

  Feature J2. The gaming machine according to feature J1, wherein the annular notification control means displays the annular notification image as if it is rotating.

  According to the feature J2, since the ring notification image is displayed as being rotated, the ring notification image in the predetermined display direction is displayed regardless of the rotation position of the predetermined display means. Can be visually recognized.

  Feature J3. The gaming machine according to feature J2, wherein the annular notification control unit changes a rotation display mode of the annular notification image in accordance with an operation mode of a rotation operation in the predetermined display unit.

  According to the feature J3, since the rotation display mode of the annular notification image is changed according to the operation mode of the rotation operation in the predetermined display unit, the operation mode of the rotation operation in the predetermined display unit is in any mode. It is possible to make the display content of the notification image easy to recognize by the player.

  In addition, with respect to any one of the features J1 to J3, the features A1 to A11, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E11, the features F1 to F10, and the features G1 to G10. Any one or more of the features H1 to H6, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J3, and features K1 to K8 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature K group>
Feature K1. Specific display means for displaying an image (main display device 41);
Predetermined display means for displaying an image (first sub display device 43, second sub display device 44);
Displacement control means for displacing the predetermined display means to a predetermined facing position facing a part of the display surface of the specific display means from the direction of the display surface (function of executing step S303 in the distribution side MPU 73) )When,
The specific notification image (abnormality notification image 176) is displayed in the specific display when a notification target event occurs in a situation where the control by the displacement control unit is executed so that the predetermined display unit is disposed at the predetermined facing position. Notification control means (function for executing the processing of step S2008 to step S2012 in the CPU 82 for production, 2D control part 96, 3D control part 97) to be displayed on the means;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the characteristic K1, the specific notification image when the notification target event occurs is displayed on the specific display unit even when the control is executed so that the predetermined display unit is arranged at the predetermined facing position. . Thus, even if the predetermined display means is not arranged at the predetermined facing position due to some failure, the specific notification image is displayed on the specific display means, and the specific notification image is displayed to the player or the manager of the game hall. It can be recognized.

  Feature K2. When the notification target event occurs in a situation in which the predetermined display unit is disposed at the predetermined facing position, the notification control unit sets a region on the display surface of the specific display unit that is not opposed to the predetermined display unit. The game machine according to Feature K1, wherein at least a part of the specific notification image is displayed.

  According to the feature K2, it is possible to prevent the specific notification image from being completely hidden by the predetermined display unit. Thereby, it is possible to ensure the visibility of the specific notification image displayed on the specific display unit even in a situation where the predetermined display unit is disposed at the predetermined facing position.

Feature K3. The displacement control means displaces the predetermined display means so that the predetermined facing position changes in a predetermined displacement period.
In the region where the notification control unit does not face the predetermined display unit over the entire predetermined displacement period on the display surface of the specific display unit when the notification target event occurs during the predetermined displacement period. The gaming machine according to Feature K2, wherein the specific notification image is displayed.

  According to the characteristic K3, the specific notification image is displayed in an area that does not face the predetermined display unit over the entire predetermined displacement period, so that the display position of the specific notification image according to the position of the predetermined display unit Even without performing control such as changing the above, it is possible to ensure the visibility of the specific notification image displayed on the specific display means.

Feature K4. There are multiple types of notification target events,
There are multiple types of the specific notification images corresponding to the notification target event,
The notification control unit limits the number of the specific notification images to be displayed to a predetermined number in a situation where the predetermined display unit is disposed at the predetermined facing position. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the feature K4, the number of the specific notification images to be displayed is limited to a predetermined number in a situation where the area for displaying the specific notification image is limited by the specific display unit. It becomes possible to secure a certain size of the specific notification image to be displayed.

Feature K5. Priorities to be displayed of the specific notification image are set for the plurality of types of notification target events,
In the situation where the predetermined display unit is disposed at the predetermined facing position, the notification control unit is configured to notify the notification target on the higher priority side when the notification target event exceeds the predetermined number. The game machine according to Feature K4, wherein the specific notification image corresponding to an event is displayed.

  According to the feature K5, even when the number of specific notification images to be displayed is limited to a predetermined number in a situation where the predetermined display unit is disposed at a predetermined facing position, the notification target on the higher priority side It is possible to display a specific notification image corresponding to the event.

  Feature K6. The notification control unit displays a predetermined notification image (common notification image 175) on the predetermined display unit when the notification target event occurs in a state where the predetermined display unit is disposed at the predetermined facing position. The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K5.

  According to the feature K6, not only the specific notification image is displayed on the specific display unit but also the predetermined notification image is displayed on the predetermined display unit, so that it is possible to emphasize that the notification target event has occurred. Become.

  Feature K7. The gaming machine according to Feature K6, wherein the predetermined notification image is a common image that does not correspond to a type of the notification target event.

  According to the feature K7, the predetermined display unit does not display an image corresponding to the type of the notification target event but displays a common image not corresponding to the type of the notification target event as the predetermined notification image. It is possible to reduce the processing load for displaying the predetermined notification image on the means.

  Feature K8. The game machine according to claim K6 or K7, wherein the notification control unit displays only one predetermined notification image on the predetermined display unit even when the notification target event has occurred a plurality of times. .

  According to the feature K8, even when the notification target event has occurred a plurality of times, only one predetermined notification image is displayed on the predetermined display unit, so that an image other than the predetermined notification image is displayed on the predetermined display unit. It is possible to ensure a wide area.

  In addition, with respect to any one of the features K1 to K8, the features A1 to A11, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E11, the features F1 to F10, and the features G1 to G10. Any one or more of the features H1 to H6, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J3, and features K1 to K8 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to the invention of the feature group I, the feature J group, and the feature K group, the following problems can be solved.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, and the like are known. As these gaming machines, those equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. The gaming machine is equipped with a memory in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the display device using the image data read from the memory. It becomes.

  Here, in the gaming machine such as the above example, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The basic configuration of the gaming machine to which the above features can be applied or applied to each feature is shown below.

  Pachinko gaming machine: operation means operated by a player, game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operation means, a ball path for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game A gaming machine that includes gaming components arranged in an area, and gives a bonus to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion among the gaming components.

  Revolving type gaming machine such as a slot machine: equipped with a picture display device for variably displaying a plurality of pictures, variably starting display of the plurality of pictures due to the operation of the start operation means, and due to the operation of the stop operation means In addition, the game machine is configured such that the variable display of the plurality of patterns is stopped when a predetermined time elapses and a privilege is given to the player according to the pattern after the stop.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Pachinko machine, 41 ... Main display device, 43 ... 1st sub display device, 44 ... 2nd sub display device, 73 ... Distribution side MPU, 82 ... Production CPU, 83 ... Memory module, 85 ... Production LSI 86 ... VRAM, 92 ... transfer controller, 93 ... register, 94 ... pre-transfer controller, 95 ... video decoder, 96 ... 2D controller, 97 ... 3D controller, 114 ... first frame area for main, 115 ... main Second frame area for use, 117 ... first frame area for sub, 118 ... second frame area for sub, 121 ... storage area for before transfer, 121a to 121t ... first to 20th storage area before transfer, 122 ... Storage area for after transfer, 125 ... Search table, 128 ... Index table, 143 ... Sub right-handed notification image, 152 ... Side-by-side image, 153 ... Rotation During image, 154 ... separation period image, 175 ... common notification image, 176 ... abnormality notification image 185 ... special video data.

Claims (2)

Display means for displaying an image;
Image information storage means for storing image data in advance;
Display control means for creating drawing data based on setting the image data in the setting storage means, and displaying an image on the display means based on outputting an image signal corresponding to the drawing data to the display means; ,
In a gaming machine equipped with
The display means includes a first display means and a second display means,
The display control unit creates first drawing data for displaying an image on the first display unit in a partial area of the setting storage unit, and displays the image on the second display unit. 2 comprising aggregation setting means for setting drawing data in another area of the setting storage means ,
The aggregation setting unit displays the first drawing data and the second data in the setting storage unit even when the image is displayed on the first display unit and the image is not displayed on the second display unit. A gaming machine characterized by setting drawing data . The game machine according to claim 1, wherein a game is played using a game medium.

Images